US20060271182A1 - Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns - Google Patents

Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20060271182A1
US20060271182A1 US11/417,902 US41790206A US2006271182A1 US 20060271182 A1 US20060271182 A1 US 20060271182A1 US 41790206 A US41790206 A US 41790206A US 2006271182 A1 US2006271182 A1 US 2006271182A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
mask
eye
patient
axis
target
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US11/417,902
Inventor
Bruce Christie
Thomas Silvestrini
Kevin Hahnen
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Individual
Original Assignee
Individual
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Individual filed Critical Individual
Priority to US11/417,902 priority Critical patent/US20060271182A1/en
Publication of US20060271182A1 publication Critical patent/US20060271182A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2/00Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
    • A61F2/02Prostheses implantable into the body
    • A61F2/14Eye parts, e.g. lenses, corneal implants; Implanting instruments specially adapted therefor; Artificial eyes
    • A61F2/15Implant having one or more holes, e.g. for nutrient transport, for facilitating handling
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B3/00Apparatus for testing the eyes; Instruments for examining the eyes
    • A61B3/10Objective types, i.e. instruments for examining the eyes independent of the patients' perceptions or reactions
    • A61B3/14Arrangements specially adapted for eye photography
    • A61B3/15Arrangements specially adapted for eye photography with means for aligning, spacing or blocking spurious reflection ; with means for relaxing
    • A61B3/152Arrangements specially adapted for eye photography with means for aligning, spacing or blocking spurious reflection ; with means for relaxing for aligning
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2/00Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
    • A61F2/02Prostheses implantable into the body
    • A61F2/14Eye parts, e.g. lenses, corneal implants; Implanting instruments specially adapted therefor; Artificial eyes
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2/00Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
    • A61F2/02Prostheses implantable into the body
    • A61F2/14Eye parts, e.g. lenses, corneal implants; Implanting instruments specially adapted therefor; Artificial eyes
    • A61F2/145Corneal inlays, onlays, or lenses for refractive correction
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2/00Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
    • A61F2/02Prostheses implantable into the body
    • A61F2/14Eye parts, e.g. lenses, corneal implants; Implanting instruments specially adapted therefor; Artificial eyes
    • A61F2/147Implants to be inserted in the stroma for refractive correction, e.g. ring-like implants
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2/00Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
    • A61F2/02Prostheses implantable into the body
    • A61F2/14Eye parts, e.g. lenses, corneal implants; Implanting instruments specially adapted therefor; Artificial eyes
    • A61F2/16Intraocular lenses
    • A61F2/1601Lens body having features to facilitate aqueous fluid flow across the intraocular lens, e.g. for pressure equalization or nutrient delivery
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F9/00Methods or devices for treatment of the eyes; Devices for putting-in contact lenses; Devices to correct squinting; Apparatus to guide the blind; Protective devices for the eyes, carried on the body or in the hand
    • A61F9/007Methods or devices for eye surgery
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02Ophthalmic agents
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02CSPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C7/00Optical parts
    • G02C7/02Lenses; Lens systems ; Methods of designing lenses
    • G02C7/04Contact lenses for the eyes
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02CSPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C7/00Optical parts
    • G02C7/02Lenses; Lens systems ; Methods of designing lenses
    • G02C7/04Contact lenses for the eyes
    • G02C7/046Contact lenses having an iris pattern
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02CSPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C7/00Optical parts
    • G02C7/16Shades; shields; Obturators, e.g. with pinhole, with slot
    • G02C7/165Shades; shields; Obturators, e.g. with pinhole, with slot with stenopaeic apertures
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2/00Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
    • A61F2/02Prostheses implantable into the body
    • A61F2/14Eye parts, e.g. lenses, corneal implants; Implanting instruments specially adapted therefor; Artificial eyes
    • A61F2/16Intraocular lenses
    • A61F2002/1681Intraocular lenses having supporting structure for lens, e.g. haptics
    • A61F2002/1689Intraocular lenses having supporting structure for lens, e.g. haptics having plate-haptics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2/00Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
    • A61F2/02Prostheses implantable into the body
    • A61F2/14Eye parts, e.g. lenses, corneal implants; Implanting instruments specially adapted therefor; Artificial eyes
    • A61F2/16Intraocular lenses
    • A61F2002/1696Having structure for blocking or reducing amount of light transmitted, e.g. glare reduction
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2/00Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
    • A61F2/02Prostheses implantable into the body
    • A61F2/14Eye parts, e.g. lenses, corneal implants; Implanting instruments specially adapted therefor; Artificial eyes
    • A61F2/16Intraocular lenses
    • A61F2002/16965Lens includes ultraviolet absorber
    • A61F2002/1699Additional features not otherwise provided for
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2250/00Special features of prostheses classified in groups A61F2/00 - A61F2/26 or A61F2/82 or A61F9/00 or A61F11/00 or subgroups thereof
    • A61F2250/0014Special features of prostheses classified in groups A61F2/00 - A61F2/26 or A61F2/82 or A61F9/00 or A61F11/00 or subgroups thereof having different values of a given property or geometrical feature, e.g. mechanical property or material property, at different locations within the same prosthesis
    • A61F2250/0023Special features of prostheses classified in groups A61F2/00 - A61F2/26 or A61F2/82 or A61F9/00 or A61F11/00 or subgroups thereof having different values of a given property or geometrical feature, e.g. mechanical property or material property, at different locations within the same prosthesis differing in porosity
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2250/00Special features of prostheses classified in groups A61F2/00 - A61F2/26 or A61F2/82 or A61F9/00 or A61F11/00 or subgroups thereof
    • A61F2250/0058Additional features; Implant or prostheses properties not otherwise provided for
    • A61F2250/0067Means for introducing or releasing pharmaceutical products into the body
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2250/00Special features of prostheses classified in groups A61F2/00 - A61F2/26 or A61F2/82 or A61F9/00 or A61F11/00 or subgroups thereof
    • A61F2250/0058Additional features; Implant or prostheses properties not otherwise provided for
    • A61F2250/0096Markers and sensors for detecting a position or changes of a position of an implant, e.g. RF sensors, ultrasound markers
    • A61F2250/0098Markers and sensors for detecting a position or changes of a position of an implant, e.g. RF sensors, ultrasound markers radio-opaque, e.g. radio-opaque markers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02CSPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C2202/00Generic optical aspects applicable to one or more of the subgroups of G02C7/00
    • G02C2202/04Lenses comprising decentered structures

Definitions

  • This application is directed to masks for improving the depth of focus of an eye of a human patient and methods and apparatuses for applying such masks. More particularly, this application is directed to apparatuses and methods for aligning a mask with the line of sight of an eye and applying the mask to the eye.
  • Presbyopia or the inability to clearly see objects up close is a common condition that afflicts many adults over the age of 40. Presbyopia diminishes the ability to see or read up close. Near objects appear blurry and out of focus. Presbyopia may be caused by defects in the focusing elements of the eye or the inability (due to aging) of the ciliary muscles to contract and relax and thereby control the shape of the lens in the eye.
  • the human eye functions by receiving light rays from an object and bending, refracting, and focusing those rays.
  • the primary focusing elements of the human eye are the lens (also referred to as the intraocular lens) and the cornea.
  • Light rays from an object are bent by the cornea, which is located in the anterior part of the eye.
  • the light rays subsequently pass through the intraocular lens and are focused thereby onto the retina, which is the primary light receiving element of the eye. From the retina, the light rays are converted to electrical impulses, which are then transmitted by the optic nerves to the brain.
  • the cornea and lens bend and focus the light rays in such a way that they converge at a single point on the retina. Convergence of the light rays on the retina produces a focused image. However, if the cornea or the lens are not functioning properly, or are irregularly shaped, the images may not converge at a single point on the retina. Similarly, the image may not converge at a single point on the retina if the muscles in the eye can no longer adequately control the lens. This condition is sometimes described as loss of accommodation. In presbyopic patients, for example, the light rays often converge at a point behind the retina. To the patient, the resulting image is out of focus and appears blurry.
  • Eye glasses and contact lenses are shaped and curved to help bend light rays and improve focusing of the light rays onto the retina of the patient.
  • some vision deficiencies, such as presbyopia are not adequately addressed by these approaches.
  • a mask configured to be implanted in a cornea of a patient to increase the depth of focus of the patient includes an anterior surface, a posterior surface, and a plurality of holes.
  • the anterior surface is configured to reside adjacent a first corneal layer.
  • the posterior surface is configured to reside adjacent a second corneal layer.
  • the plurality of holes extends at least partially between the anterior surface and the posterior surface.
  • the plurality of holes is configured to substantially eliminate visible diffraction patterns.
  • a mask configured to be implanted in a cornea of a patient to increase the depth of focus of the patient.
  • the mask includes a body that has an anterior surface configured to reside adjacent a first corneal layer and a posterior surface configured to reside adjacent a second corneal layer.
  • the body is formed of a substantially opaque material that has a relatively high water content.
  • the body is capable of substantially maintaining natural nutrient flow from the first corneal layer to the second corneal layer.
  • the body being is configured to substantially eliminate diffraction patterns that are visible to the patient.
  • a body is configured to have an anterior surface capable of residing adjacent a first layer of a cornea of a patient and a posterior surface capable of residing adjacent a second layer of the cornea.
  • a peripheral portion of the body is configured to be substantially opaque to incident light.
  • a central portion of the body is configured to be transparent along an optic axis to substantially all of the incident light.
  • the body is configured with a transport structure capable of substantially maintaining natural nutrient flow from the first layer to the second layer without producing visible diffraction patterns.
  • a method of making a mask is provided.
  • a body that has an anterior surface, a posterior surface, an outer periphery, and an inner periphery is provided.
  • the anterior surface is configured to reside adjacent a first layer of a cornea of a patient.
  • the posterior surface is configured to reside adjacent a second layer of the cornea.
  • a plurality of non-uniform locations for forming a plurality of holes between the anterior surface and the posterior surface is generated.
  • a subset of locations among the plurality of locations is modified to maintain a performance characteristic of the mask.
  • a hole is formed in the body at locations corresponding to the subset of locations. The holes are configured to substantially maintain natural nutrient flow from the first layer to the second layer without producing visible diffraction patterns.
  • a method for increasing the depth of focus of an eye of a patient.
  • the eye has a visual axis.
  • the visual axis of the eye is aligned with an instrument axis of an ophthalmic instrument.
  • the ophthalmic instrument has an aperture through which the patient may look along the instrument axis.
  • a first reference target is imaged on the instrument axis at a first distance with respect to the eye.
  • a mask comprising a pin-hole aperture having a mask axis is aligned with the instrument axis such that the mask axis and the instrument axis are substantially collinear.
  • the mask is applied to the eye of the patient while the alignment of the mask and the instrument axis is maintained.
  • a method for increasing the depth of focus of an eye of a patient includes a visual axis and a cornea that has an epithelial sheet, a Bowman's membrane, and a stroma.
  • the visual axis of the eye is located using more than one reference target.
  • a mask that includes a pin-hole aperture having a mask axis is aligned with the visual axis of the eye. The mask is applied to the eye while maintaining the alignment of the mask axis and the visual axis.
  • a method for correcting vision is provided.
  • a LASIK procedure is performed.
  • the eye is moved until at least two reference targets are aligned.
  • a mask is applied to the eye.
  • an apparatus for aligning a mask with a visual axis of an eye of a patient includes an optics housing, a first target, a second target, a lens, and a light source.
  • the optics housing defines an aperture at a first location into which the eye may be directed and an instrument axis.
  • the first target is coupled with the optics housing and is positioned on the instrument axis at a first distance relative to the first location.
  • the second target is coupled with the optics housing and is positioned on the instrument axis at a second distance relative to the first location.
  • the lens is coupled with the optics housing. The second distance is equal to the focal length of the lens.
  • the light source is off-set from the instrument axis and is configured to indicate the location of the visual axis of the eye.
  • an apparatus for aligning a mask with a visual axis of an eye of a patient includes a fixture for locating the eye at a first location.
  • the apparatus for aligning also includes a first target, a second target, and a marker.
  • the first target is positioned on an instrument axis at a first distance relative to the first location.
  • the second target is positioned on the instrument axis at a second distance relative to the first location.
  • the marker is configured to indicate the location of the instrument axis.
  • a method of treating a patient is provided.
  • a reference point on a cornea is identified.
  • the reference point is marked.
  • a corneal flap is lifted to expose an intracorneal surface.
  • An implant is positioned on the intracorneal surface.
  • the flap is closed to cover at least a portion of the implant.
  • a method of treating a patient is provided.
  • a reference point on a cornea is identified.
  • the reference point is marked.
  • a corneal pocket is created to expose an intracorneal surface.
  • An implant is positioned on the intracorneal surface.
  • a method of treating a patient is provided.
  • a reference point on a cornea is identified.
  • the reference point is marked.
  • a stromal surface is exposed.
  • An implant is positioned on the stromal surface. At least a portion of the implant is covered.
  • FIG. 1 is a plan view of the human eye.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional side view of the human eye.
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional side view of the human eye of a presbyopic patient wherein the light rays converge at a point behind the retina of the eye.
  • FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional side view of a presbyopic eye implanted with one embodiment of a mask wherein the light rays converge at a point on the retina.
  • FIG. 5 is a plan view of the human eye with a mask applied thereto.
  • FIG. 6 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a mask.
  • FIG. 7 is a plan frontal view of an embodiment of a mask with a hexagon-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 8 is a plan frontal view of an embodiment of a mask with an octagon-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 9 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with an oval-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 10 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a pointed oval-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 11 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a star-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 12 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a teardrop-shaped pinhole like aperture spaced above the true center of the mask.
  • FIG. 13 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a teardrop-shaped pinhole like aperture centered within the mask.
  • FIG. 14 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a teardrop-shaped pinhole like aperture spaced below the true center of the mask.
  • FIG. 15 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask embodying with a square-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 16 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a kidney-shaped oval pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 17 is a side view of an embodiment of a convex mask.
  • FIG. 18 is a side view of an embodiment of a concave mask.
  • FIG. 19 is a side view of an embodiment of a mask with a gel to provide opacity to the lens.
  • FIG. 20 is frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a weave of polymeric fibers.
  • FIG. 21 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 20 .
  • FIG. 22 is a front plan view of an embodiment of a mask having regions of varying opacity.
  • FIG. 23 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 22 .
  • FIG. 24 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a centrally located pinhole like aperture and radially extending slots emanating from the center to the periphery of the mask.
  • FIG. 25 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 24 .
  • FIG. 26 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a central pinhole like aperture, surrounded by a plurality of holes radially spaced from the pinhole like aperture and slots extending radially spaced from the holes and extending to the periphery of the mask.
  • FIG. 27 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 26 .
  • FIG. 28 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a central pinhole like aperture, a region that includes a plurality of holes radially spaced from the aperture, and a region that includes rectangular slots spaced radially from the holes.
  • FIG. 29 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 28 .
  • FIG. 30 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a non-circular pinhole like aperture, a first set of slots radially spaced from the aperture, and a region that includes a second set of slots extending to the periphery of the mask and radially spaced from the first set of slots.
  • FIG. 31 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 30 .
  • FIG. 32 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a central pinhole like aperture and a plurality of holes radially spaced from the aperture.
  • FIG. 33 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 32 .
  • FIG. 34 is an embodiment of a mask that includes two semi-circular mask portions.
  • FIG. 35 is an embodiment of a mask that includes a half-moon shaped region and a centrally-located pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 36 is an embodiment of a mask including two half-moon shaped portions.
  • FIG. 37 is a enlarged, diagrammatic view of an embodiment of a mask that includes particulate structure adapted for selectively controlling light transmission through the mask in a high light environment.
  • FIG. 38 is a view of the mask of FIG. 37 in a low light environment.
  • FIG. 39 is an embodiment of a mask that includes a barcode formed on the annular region of the mask.
  • FIG. 40 is another an embodiment of a mask that includes connectors for securing the mask within the eye.
  • FIG. 41 is a plan view of an embodiment of a mask made of a spiraled fibrous strand.
  • FIG. 42 is a plan view of the mask of FIG. 41 being removed from the eye.
  • FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view similar to that of FIG. 1 , but showing certain axes of the eye.
  • FIG. 44A illustrates a single-target fixation method for aligning an eye with the optical axis of an ophthalmic instrument.
  • FIG. 44B illustrates another single-target fixation method for aligning an eye with the optical axis of an ophthalmic instrument.
  • FIG. 45A shows an apparatus for projecting a target onto an optical axis at an infinite distance.
  • FIG. 45B shows an apparatus for projecting a target onto an optical axis at a finite distance.
  • FIG. 46 illustrates a dual-target fixation method.
  • FIG. 47 shows an apparatus with which two targets can be projected simultaneously by the same projection lens to provide fixation targets at a large distance (such as infinity) and a shorter (finite) distance.
  • FIG. 48 shows another embodiment of an apparatus for combining two targets to project them simultaneously at different axial distances.
  • FIG. 49A shows an example of a dual target pattern as viewed by the patient when the target patterns are aligned.
  • FIG. 49B shows the dual target pattern of FIG. 49A when the patterns are offset.
  • FIG. 50A shows an example of another dual target pattern as viewed by the patient when the target patterns are aligned.
  • FIG. 50B shows the dual target pattern of FIG. 50A when the target patterns are offset.
  • FIG. 51 shows one embodiment of an apparatus configured to locate the visual axis of an eye of a patient by aligning the axis with an axis of the apparatus.
  • FIG. 52 is a flow chart illustrating one method of screening a patient for the use of a mask.
  • FIG. 53A-53C show a mask, similar to those described herein, inserted beneath an epithelium sheet of a cornea.
  • FIG. 54A-54C show a mask, similar to those described herein, inserted beneath an Bowman's membrane of a cornea.
  • FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram of one embodiment of a surgical system configured located the visual axis of a patient's eye by aligning the visual axis with an axis of the system.
  • FIG. 55A is a perspective view of another embodiment of a dual target fixation target.
  • FIG. 55B is a top view of the fixation target of FIG. 55A showing the first target.
  • FIG. 55C is a top view of the fixation target of FIG. 55A showing the second target.
  • FIG. 56 is a top view of another embodiment of a surgical system that includes an alignment device and a clamp configured to couple the alignment device with a surgical viewing device.
  • FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the alignment device shown in FIG. 56 .
  • FIG. 58 is a top view of the alignment device shown in FIG. 57 .
  • FIG. 59 is a schematic view of internal components of the alignment device of FIG. 57 .
  • FIG. 60 is a top view of another embodiment of a mask configured to increase depth of focus.
  • FIG. 60A is an enlarged view of a portion of the view of FIG. 60 .
  • FIG. 61A is a cross-sectional view of the mask of FIG. 60A taken along the section plane 61 — 61 .
  • FIG. 61B is a cross-sectional view similar to FIG. 61A of another embodiment of a mask.
  • FIG. 61C is a cross-sectional view similar to FIG. 61C of another embodiment of a mask.
  • FIG. 62A is a graphical representation of one arrangement of holes of a plurality of holes that may be formed on the mask of FIG. 60 .
  • FIG. 62B is a graphical representation of another arrangement of holes of a plurality of holes that may be formed on the mask of FIG. 60 .
  • FIG. 62C is a graphical representation of another arrangement of holes of a plurality of holes that may be formed on the mask of FIG. 60 .
  • FIG. 63A is an enlarged view similar to that of FIG. 60A showing a variation of a mask having non-uniform size.
  • FIG. 63B is an enlarged view similar to that of FIG. 60A showing a variation of a mask having a non-uniform facet orientation.
  • FIG. 64 is a top view of another embodiment of a mask having a hole region and a peripheral region.
  • FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of an eye illustrating a treatment of a patient wherein a flap is opened to place an implant and a location is marked for placement of the implant.
  • FIG. 65A is a partial plan view of the eye of FIG. 65 wherein an implant has been applied to a corneal flap and positioned with respect to a ring.
  • FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view of an eye illustrating a treatment of a patient wherein a pocket is created to place an implant and a location is marked for placement of the implant.
  • FIG. 66A is a partial plan view of the eye of FIG. 66 wherein an implant has been positioned in a pocket and positioned with respect to a ring.
  • This application is directed to masks for improving the depth of focus of an eye of a patient and methods and apparatuses for applying such masks.
  • the masks generally employ pin-hole vision correction and have nutrient transport structures.
  • the masks may be applied to the eye in any manner and in any location, e.g., as an implant in the cornea (sometimes referred to as a “corneal inlay”).
  • the masks can also be embodied in or combined with lenses and applied in other regions of the eye, e.g., as or in combination with a contact lenses or an intraocular lenses.
  • Apparatuses and methods for applying the masks to the patient generally use the patient's vision to locate the patient's line of sight while the mask is being applied to the eye so that the mask may be properly aligned with the line of sight.
  • a mask that has a pinhole aperture may be used to improve the depth of focus of a human eye.
  • presbyopia is a problem of the human eye that commonly occurs in older human adults wherein the ability to focus becomes limited to inadequate range.
  • FIGS. 1-6 illustrate how presbyopia interferes with the normal function of the eye and how a mask with a pinhole aperture mitigates the problem.
  • FIG. 1 shows the human eye
  • FIG. 2 is a side view of the eye 10 .
  • the eye 10 includes a cornea 12 and an intraocular lens 14 posterior to the cornea 12 .
  • the cornea 12 is a first focusing element of the eye 10 .
  • the intraocular lens 14 is a second focusing element of the eye 10 .
  • the eye 10 also includes a retina 16 , which lines the interior of the rear surface of the eye 10 .
  • the retina 16 includes the receptor cells which are primarily responsible for the sense of vision.
  • the retina 16 includes a highly sensitive region, known as the macula, where signals are received and transmitted to the visual centers of the brain via the optic nerve 18 .
  • the retina 16 also includes a point with particularly high sensitivity 20 , known as the fovea. As discussed in more detail in connection with FIG. 8 , the fovea 20 is slightly offset from the axis of symmetry of the eye 10 .
  • the eye 10 also includes a ring of pigmented tissue known as the iris 22 .
  • the iris 22 includes smooth muscle for controlling and regulating the size of an opening 24 in the iris 22 , which is known as the pupil.
  • An entrance pupil 26 is seen as the image of the iris 22 viewed through the cornea 12 (See FIG. 7 ). A central point of the entrance pupil 28 is illustrated in FIG. 7 and will be discussed further below.
  • the eye 10 resides in an eye-socket in the skull and is able to rotate therein about a center of rotation 30 .
  • FIG. 3 shows the transmission of light through the eye 10 of a presbyotic patient. Due to either an aberration in the cornea 12 or the intraocular lens 14 , or loss of muscle control, light rays 32 entering the eye 10 and passing through the cornea 12 and the intraocular lens 14 are refracted in such a way that the light rays 32 do not converge at a single focal point on the retina 16 .
  • FIG. 3 illustrates that in a presbyotic patient, the light rays 32 often converge at a point behind the retina 16 . As a result, the patient experiences blurred vision.
  • FIG. 4 there is shown the light transmission through the eye 10 to which a mask 34 has been applied.
  • the mask 34 is shown implanted in the cornea 12 in FIG. 4 .
  • the mask 34 can be, in various modes of application, implanted in the cornea 12 (as shown), used as a contact lens placed over the cornea 12 , incorporated in the intraocular lens 14 (including the patient's original lens or an implanted lens), or otherwise positioned on or in the eye 10 .
  • the light rays 32 that pass through the mask 34 , the cornea 12 , and the lens 14 converge at a single focal point on the retina 16 .
  • the light rays 32 that would not converge at the single point on retina 16 are blocked by the mask 34 .
  • the mask 34 preferably includes an annular region 36 surrounding a pinhole opening or aperture 38 substantially centrally located on the mask 34 .
  • the pinhole aperture 38 is generally located around a central axis 39 , referred to herein as the optical axis of the mask 34 .
  • the pinhole aperture 38 preferably is in the shape of a circle. It has been reported that a circular aperture, such as the aperture 38 may, in some patients, produce a so-called “halo effect” where the patient perceives a shimmering image around the object being viewed. Accordingly, it may be desirable to provide an aperture 38 in a shape that diminishes, reduces, or completely eliminates the so-called “halo effect.”
  • FIGS. 7-42 illustrate a variety of embodiments of masks that can improve the vision of a patient with presbyopia.
  • the masks described in connection with FIG. 7-42 are similar to the mask 34 , except as set forth below. Accordingly, the masks described in connection with FIGS. 7-42 can be used and applied to the eye 10 of a patient in a similar fashion to the mask 34 .
  • FIG. 7 shows an embodiment of a mask 34 a that includes an aperture 38 a formed in the shape of a hexagon.
  • FIG. 8 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 b that includes an aperture 38 b formed in the shape of an octagon.
  • FIG. 9 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 c that includes an aperture 38 c formed in the shape of an oval
  • FIG. 10 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 d that includes an aperture 38 d formed in the shape of a pointed oval.
  • FIG. 11 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 e wherein the aperture 38 e is formed in the shape of
  • FIGS. 12-14 illustrate further embodiments that have tear-drop shaped apertures.
  • FIG. 12 shows a mask 34 f that has a tear-drop shaped aperture 38 f that is located above the true center of the mask 34 f .
  • FIG. 13 shows a mask 34 g that has a tear-drop shaped aperture 38 g that is substantially centered in the mask 34 g .
  • FIG. 14 shows a mask 34 h that has a tear-drop shaped aperture 38 h that is below the true center of the mask 34 h .
  • FIG. 12-14 illustrate that the position of aperture can be tailored, e.g., centered or off-center, to provide different effects.
  • an aperture that is located below the true center of a mask generally will allow more light to enter the eye because the upper portion of the aperture 34 will not be covered by the eyelid of the patient. Conversely, where the aperture is located above the true center of the mask, the aperture may be partially covered by the eyelid. Thus, the above-center aperture may permit less light to enter the eye.
  • FIG. 15 shows an embodiment of a mask 34 i that includes an aperture 38 i formed in the shape of a square.
  • FIG. 16 shows an embodiment of a mask 34 j that has a kidney-shaped aperture 38 j . It will be appreciated that the apertures shown in FIGS. 7-16 are merely exemplary of non-circular apertures. Other shapes and arrangements may also be provided and are within the scope of the present invention.
  • the mask 34 preferably has a constant thickness, as discussed below. However, in some embodiments, the thickness of the mask may vary between the inner periphery (near the aperture 38 ) and the outer periphery.
  • FIG. 17 shows a mask 34 k that has a convex profile, i.e., that has a gradually decreasing thickness from the inner periphery to the outer periphery.
  • FIG. 18 shows a mask 34 l that has a concave profile, i.e., that has a gradually increasing thickness from the inner periphery to the outer periphery.
  • Other cross-sectional profiles are also possible.
  • the annular region 36 is at least partially and preferably completely opaque.
  • the opacity of the annular region 36 prevents light from being transmitted through the mask 32 (as generally shown in FIG. 4 ).
  • Opacity of the annular region 36 may be achieved in any of several different ways.
  • the material used to make mask 34 may be naturally opaque.
  • the material used to make the mask 34 may be substantially clear, but treated with a dye or other pigmentation agent to render region 36 substantially or completely opaque.
  • the surface of the mask 34 may be treated physically or chemically (such as by etching) to alter the refractive and transmissive properties of the mask 34 and make it less transmissive to light.
  • the surface of the mask 34 may be treated with a particulate deposited thereon.
  • the surface of the mask 34 may be deposited with particulate of titanium, gold or carbon to provide opacity to the surface of the mask 34 .
  • the particulate may be encapsulated within the interior of the mask 34 , as generally shown in FIG. 19 .
  • the mask 34 may be patterned to provide areas of varying light transmissivity, as generally shown in FIGS. 24-33 , which are discussed in detail below.
  • a mask 34 m formed or made of a woven fabric, such as a mesh of polyester fibers.
  • the mesh may be a cross-hatched mesh of fibers.
  • the mask 34 m includes an annular region 36 m surrounding an aperture 38 m .
  • the annular region 36 m comprises a plurality of generally regularly positioned apertures 36 m in the woven fabric allow some light to pass through the mask 34 m .
  • the amount of light transmitted can be varied and controlled by, for example, moving the fibers closer together or farther apart, as desired. Fibers more densely distributed allow less light to pass through the annular region 36 m .
  • the thickness of fibers can be varied to allow more or less light through the openings of the mesh. Making the fiber strands larger results in the openings being smaller.
  • FIG. 22 shows an embodiment of a mask 34 n that includes an annular region 36 n that has sub-regions with different opacities.
  • the opacity of the annular region 36 n may gradually and progressively increase or decrease, as desired.
  • FIG. 22 shows one embodiment where a first area 42 closest to an aperture 38 n has an opacity of approximately 60%.
  • a second area 44 which is outlying with respect to the first area 42 , has a greater opacity, such as 70%.
  • a third area 46 which is outlying with respect to the second area 42 , has an opacity of between 85 to 100%.
  • light blocking materials of the type described above in variable degrees may be selectively deposited on the surface of a mask to achieve a graduated opacity.
  • the mask may be formed from co-extruded rods made of material having different light transmissive properties.
  • the co-extruded rod may then be sliced to provide disks for a plurality of masks, such as those described herein.
  • FIGS. 24-33 shows examples of masks that have been modified to provide regions of differing opacity.
  • FIG. 24 shows a mask 34 o that includes an aperture 38 o and a plurality of cutouts 48 in the pattern of radial spokes extending from near the aperture 38 o to an outer periphery 50 of the mask 34 o .
  • FIG. 24 shows that the cutouts 48 are much more densely distributed about a circumference of the mask near aperture 38 o than are the cutouts 48 about a circumference of the mask near the outer periphery 50 . Accordingly, more light passes through the mask 34 o nearer aperture 38 o than near the periphery 50 . The change in light transmission through the mask 34 o is gradual.
  • FIGS. 26-27 show another embodiment of a mask 34 p .
  • the mask 34 p includes an aperture 38 p and a plurality of circular cutouts 52 p , and a plurality of cutouts 54 p .
  • the circular cutouts 52 p are located proximate the aperture 38 p .
  • the cutouts 54 p are located between the circular cutouts 52 p and the periphery 50 p .
  • the density of the circular cutouts 52 p generally decreases from the near the aperture 38 p toward the periphery 50 p .
  • the periphery 50 p of the mask 34 p is scalloped by the presence of the cutouts 54 , which extend inward from the periphery 50 p , to allow some light to pass through the mask at the periphery 50 p.
  • FIGS. 28-29 shows another embodiment similar to that of FIGS. 26-27 wherein a mask 34 q includes a plurality of circular cutouts 52 q and a plurality of cutouts 54 q .
  • the cutouts 54 q are disposed along the outside periphery 50 q of the mask 34 q , but not so as to provide a scalloped periphery.
  • FIGS. 30 and 31 illustrate an embodiment of a mask 34 r that includes an annular region 36 r that is patterned and an aperture 38 r that is non-circular.
  • the aperture 38 r is in the shape of a starburst.
  • Surrounding the aperture 38 r is a series of cutouts 54 r that are more densely spaced toward the aperture 38 r .
  • the mask 34 r includes an outer periphery 50 r that is scalloped to provide additional light transmission at the outer periphery 50 r.
  • FIGS. 32 and 33 show another embodiment of a mask 34 s that includes an annular region 36 s and an aperture 38 s .
  • the annular region 36 s is located between an outer periphery 50 s of the mask 34 s and the aperture 38 s .
  • the annular region 36 s is patterned.
  • a plurality of circular openings 56 s is distributed over the annular region 36 s of the mask 34 s . It will be appreciated that the density of the openings 56 s is greater near the aperture 38 s than near the periphery 50 s of the mask 34 s . As with the examples described above, this results in a gradual increase in the opacity of the mask 34 s from aperture 38 s to periphery 50 s.
  • FIGS. 34-36 show further embodiments.
  • FIG. 34 shows a mask 34 t that includes a first mask portion 58 t and a second mask portion 60 t .
  • the mask portions 58 t , 60 t are generally “C-shaped.”
  • the mask portions 58 t , 60 t are implanted or inserted such that the mask portions 58 t , 60 t define a pinhole or aperture 38 t.
  • FIG. 35 shows another embodiment wherein a mask 34 u includes two mask portions 58 u , 60 u .
  • Each mask portion 58 u , 60 u is in the shape of a half-moon and is configured to be implanted or inserted in such a way that the two halves define a central gap or opening 62 u , which permits light to pass therethrough.
  • opening 62 u is not a circular pinhole
  • the mask portions 58 u , 60 u in combination with the eyelid (shown as dashed line 64 ) of the patient provide a comparable pinhole effect.
  • FIG. 36 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 v that includes an aperture 38 v and that is in the shape of a half-moon.
  • the mask 34 v may be implanted or inserted into a lower portion of the cornea 12 where, as described above, the combination of the mask 34 v and the eyelid 62 provides the pinhole effect.
  • the mask may be a gel-filled disk, as shown in FIG. 19 .
  • the gel may be a hydrogel or collagen, or other suitable material that is biocompatible with the mask material and can be introduced into the interior of the mask.
  • the gel within the mask may include particulate 66 suspended within the gel. Examples of suitable particulate are gold, titanium, and carbon particulate, which, as discussed above, may alternatively be deposited on the surface of the mask.
  • the material of the mask 34 may be any biocompatible polymeric material. Where a gel is used, the material is suitable for holding a gel. Examples of suitable materials for the mask 34 include the preferred polymethylmethacrylate or other suitable polymers, such as polycarbonates and the like. Of course, as indicated above, for non-gel-filled materials, a preferred material may be a fibrous material, such as a Dacron mesh.
  • the mask 34 may also be made to include a medicinal fluid, such as an antibiotic that can be selectively released after application, insertion, or implantation of the mask 34 into the eye of the patient. Release of an antibiotic after application, insertion, or implantation provides faster healing of the incision.
  • the mask 34 may also be coated with other desired drugs or antibiotics. For example, it is known that cholesterol deposits can build up on the eye. Accordingly, the mask 34 may be provided with a releasable cholesterol deterring drug. The drug may be coated on the surface of the mask 34 or, in an alternative embodiment, incorporated into the polymeric material (such as PMMA) from which the mask 34 is formed.
  • FIGS. 37 and 38 illustrate one embodiment where a mask 34 w comprises a plurality of nanites 68 .
  • “Nanites” are small particulate structures that have been adapted to selectively transmit or block light entering the eye of the patient. The particles may be of a very small size typical of the particles used in nanotechnology applications.
  • the nanites 68 are suspended in the gel or otherwise inserted into the interior of the mask 34 w , as generally shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 .
  • the nanites 68 can be preprogrammed to respond to different light environments.
  • the nanites 68 turn and position themselves to substantially and selectively block some of the light from entering the eye.
  • nanites may respond by turning or be otherwise positioned to allow more light to enter the eye, as shown in FIG. 38 .
  • Nano-devices or nanites are crystalline structures grown in laboratories.
  • the nanites may be treated such that they are receptive to different stimuli such as light.
  • the nanites can be imparted with energy where, in response to a low light and high light environments, they rotate in the manner described above and generally shown in FIG. 38 .
  • Nanoscale devices and systems and their fabrication are described in Smith et al., “Nanofabrication,” Physics Today, February 1990, pp. 24-30 and in Craighead, “Nanoelectromechanical Systems,” Science, Nov. 24, 2000, Vol. 290, pp. 1532-1535, both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. Tailoring the properties of small-sized particles for optical applications is disclosed in Chen et al. “Diffractive Phase Elements Based on Two-Dimensional Artificial Dielectrics,” Optics Letters, Jan. 15, 1995, Vol. 20, No. 2, pp. 121-123, also incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • FIG. 39 shows one embodiment of a mask 34 x that includes a bar code 70 or other printed indicia.
  • the masks described herein may be incorporated into the eye of a patient in different ways.
  • the mask 34 may be provided as a contact lens placed on the surface of the eyeball 10 .
  • the mask 34 may be incorporated in an artificial intraocular lens designed to replace the original lens 14 of the patient.
  • the mask 34 is provided as a corneal implant or inlay, where it is physically inserted between the layers of the cornea 12 .
  • the mask 34 When used as a corneal implant, layers of the cornea 12 are peeled away to allow insertion of the mask 34 .
  • the optical surgeon using a laser
  • the mask 34 is then inserted and the flap is placed back in its original position where, over time, it grows back and seals the eyeball.
  • the mask 34 is attached or fixed to the eye 10 by support strands 72 and 74 shown in FIG. 40 and generally described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,976,732, incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • the surgeon may be required to remove additional corneal tissue.
  • the surgeon may use a laser to peel away additional layers of the cornea 12 to provide a pocket that will accommodate the mask 34 .
  • Application of the mask 34 to the cornea 12 of the eye 10 of a patient is described in greater detail in connection with FIGS. 53A-54C .
  • Removal of the mask 34 may be achieved by simply making an additional incision in the cornea 12 , lifting the flap and removing the mask 34 .
  • ablation techniques may be used to completely remove the mask 34 .
  • FIGS. 41 and 42 illustrate another embodiment, of a mask 34 y that includes a coiled strand 80 of a fibrous or other material.
  • Strand 80 is coiled over itself to form the mask 34 y , which may therefore be described as a spiral-like mask.
  • This arrangement provides a pinhole or aperture 38 y substantially in the center of the mask 34 y .
  • the mask 34 y can be removed by a technician or surgeon who grasps the strand 80 with tweezers 82 through an opening made in a flap of the corneal 12 .
  • FIG. 42 shows this removal technique.
  • the various masks discussed herein can be used to improve the vision of a presbyopic patient as well as patient's with other vision problems.
  • the masks discussed herein can be deployed in combination with a LASIK procedure, to eliminate the effects of abrasions, aberrations, and divots in the cornea. It is also believed that the masks disclosed herein can be used to treat patients suffering from macular degeneration, e.g., by directing light rays to unaffected portions of retina, thereby improving the vision of the patient. Whatever treatment is contemplated, more precise the alignment of the central region of a mask with a pin-hole aperture with the visual axis of the patient is believed to provide greater clinical effect to the patient.
  • Alignment of the central region of the pinhole aperture 38 , in particular, the optical axis 39 , of the mask 34 with the visual axis of the eye 10 may be achieved in a variety of ways. As discussed more fully below, such alignment may be achieved by imaging two reference targets at different distances and effecting movement of the patient's eye to a position where the images of the first and second reference targets appear aligned as viewed by the patient's eye. When the patient views the targets as being aligned, the patient's visual axis is located.
  • FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view of the eye 10 , similar to that shown in FIG. 1 , indicating a first axis 1000 and a second axis 1004 .
  • the first axis 1000 represents the visual axis, or line of sight, of the patient and the second axis 1004 indicates the axis of symmetry of the eye 10 .
  • the visual axis 1000 is an axis that connects the fovea 20 and a target 1008 .
  • the visual axis 1000 also extends through the central point 28 of the entrance pupil 26 .
  • the target 1008 is sometimes referred to herein as a “fixation point.”
  • the visual axis 1000 also corresponds to the chief ray of the bundle of rays emanating from the target 1008 that passes through the pupil 22 and reaches the fovea 20 .
  • the axis of symmetry 1004 is an axis passing through the central point 28 of the entrance pupil 26 and the center of rotation 30 of the eye 10 .
  • the cornea 12 is located at the front of the eye 10 and, along with the iris 22 , admits light into the eye 10 .
  • Light entering the eye 10 is focused by the combined imaging properties of the cornea 12 and the intraocular lens 14 (see FIGS. 2-3 ).
  • the image of the target 1008 is formed at the retina 16 .
  • the fovea 20 (the region of the retina 16 with particularly high resolution) is slightly off-set from the axis of symmetry 1004 of the eye 10 .
  • This visual axis 1000 is typically inclined at an angle ⁇ of about six (6) degrees to the axis of symmetry 1004 of the eye 10 for an eye with a centered iris.
  • FIGS. 44A and 44B illustrate single-target fixation methods for aligning an eye with an optical axis of an instrument also referred to herein as an “instrument axis.”
  • the eye 10 is shown looking into an aperture of a projection lens 1012 .
  • the lens aperture is shown as the entire lens 1012 .
  • the projection lens 1012 reimages a reference target 1016 at an infinite distance, producing a collimated beam 1020 .
  • the reference target 1016 in FIG. 44A is shown reimaged at an infinite distance, which is achieved by positioning the target object at a distance 1024 equal to the focal length f of the lens 1012 , i.e. the reference target 1016 is at the lens focal point.
  • FIG. 44A shows the eye 10 fixated on the reference target 1016 along a ray 1020 c , which appears to come from the reference target 1016 as imaged by the projection lens 1012 .
  • the eye 10 is here decentered a distance 1028 from an optical axis 1032 of the instrument, i.e., the instrument axis, which may be the central axis of the lens 1012 .
  • This decentration of the eye 10 with respect to the optical axis 1032 of the instrument does not affect fixation to an infinitely distant image because all rays projected by the lens 1012 are parallel.
  • an eye can be fixated on the target but still be off-center of the optical axis of the instrument.
  • FIG. 44B is similar to FIG. 44A , except that a reference target 1016 ′ is located somewhat closer to the projection lens 1012 that is the reference target 1016 so that an image 1036 of the reference target 1016 ′ appears at a large but finite distance 1040 behind the lens 1012 .
  • the eye 10 in FIG. 44B is fixated on the reference target 1016 ′ along a ray 1020 c ′, which is decentered a distance 1028 from an optical axis 1032 of the instrument.
  • a decentered eye fixated on a finite-distance target is not merely off-center but is also angularly offset from the optical axis 1032 of the instrument.
  • FIG. 45A shows one embodiment of a projection lens 1012 used to create an optical image at infinite distance, as was schematically shown in FIG. 44A .
  • the reference target 1016 typically is a back-illuminated pattern on a transparent glass reticle 1044 .
  • the reference target 1016 is located at a distance 1024 on the lens' optical axis 1032 at the lens' focal point, i.e. the reference target 1016 is located such that the distance 1024 is equal to the distance f.
  • a diffusing plate 1048 and a condensing lens 1052 are used to ensure full illumination of the reference target 1016 throughout the aperture of the projection lens 1012 .
  • Light rays projected by the projection lens 1012 are substantially parallel depending upon the degree of imaging perfection achieved in the optical system. Assuming a well-corrected lens with small aberrations, the image as observed through the aperture of the projection lens 1012 will appear to be at infinity.
  • FIG. 45B shows a somewhat different optical system in which a target 1016 ′ is projected so that an image 1036 appears at a large but finite distance 1040 behind the lens 1012 , as was shown schematically in FIG. 44B .
  • the diffusing plate 1048 and the condensing lens 1052 again are used to ensure that full illumination of the target reference 112 ′ is achieved throughout the aperture of the projection lens 1012 .
  • the reference target 1016 ′ is located at an object distance 1024 ′, which is inside the focal point in accordance with the aforementioned Gaussian equation.
  • the object distance 1024 ′ is a distance that is less than the focal length f of the lens 1012 ′.
  • the path of a typical light ray 1056 from the center of the reference target 1016 ′ is shown. If the eye 10 is aligned with this ray 1056 , the reference target 1016 is observed as if it were located at the location of the image 1036 , i.e. at a finite distance. The ray 1056 would then be similar to ray 1020 c ′ of FIG. 44B , and fixation of the eye 10 could be established as appropriate for the given degree of decentration from the optical axis 1032 .
  • FIG. 46 illustrates a fixation method whereby the single-target fixation methods shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B are both used simultaneously in a dual-target fixation system.
  • the eye 10 With two fixation targets 1016 and 1016 ′ at different distances, the eye 10 will see angular disparity (parallax) between the target images (i.e., they will not appear to be superimposed) if the eye is decentered.
  • the rays 1020 a to 1020 g of the infinite-distance target 1016 are parallel to one another, while the rays 1020 a ′ to 1020 g ′ of the finite distance target 1016 ′ diverge.
  • the only rays of the targets that coincide are rays 1020 d and 10204 d ′, which are collinear along the optical axis 1032 of the instrument.
  • the eye 10 can be simultaneously fixated on both targets if the visual axis, represented by the first axis 1000 of the eye 10 , is centered on the optical axis of the instrument, i.e. along the ray 1020 d (which is the same as 1020 d ′).
  • both images are fixated.
  • FIG. 47 shows schematically an apparatus with which two reticle patterns could be projected simultaneously by the same projection lens to provide fixation targets 1016 and 1016 ′ at a large distance 1024 (such as infinity) and a shorter (finite) distance 1024 ′. It is preferable that both fixation targets are at relatively large distances so that only slight focus accommodation of the eye 10 is required to compensate for these different distances.
  • a visual event e.g., angular displacement (parallax) between the images is minimized
  • alignment of the eye 10 with the optical axis 1032 of the apparatus is facilitated.
  • Providing two fixation targets at different apparent distances will simplify accurate alignment of the sighted eye with an ophthalmic apparatus in the surgical procedures disclosed herein and in other similar surgical procedures.
  • FIG. 48 shows another embodiment of an apparatus for combining two fixation targets 1016 and 1016 ′ to project them simultaneously at different axial distances.
  • a beamsplitter plate or cube 1060 is inserted between the patterns and the projection lens 1012 so each pattern can be illuminated independently.
  • the targets 1016 , 1016 ′ can be opaque lines seen against a light background, bright lines seen against a dark background, or a combination of these forms.
  • FIG. 49A shows an example of a typical dual pattern as viewed by the patient when the patterns are aligned, i.e. when the patient's eye is aligned with the optical axis of the apparatus.
  • the dual pattern set in this embodiment comprises an opaque fine-line cross 1064 seen against a broader bright cross 1068 .
  • FIG. 49B shows the same dual pattern set as shown in FIG. 49A , except the patterns are offset, indicating that the eye 10 is decentered with respect to the optical axis of the associated optical instrument.
  • FIG. 50A shows an example of another dual pattern as viewed by the patient when the patterns are aligned, i.e. when the patient's eye is aligned with the optical axis of the ophthalmic instrument.
  • the dual pattern set in this embodiment comprises an opaque circle 1072 seen against a bright circle 1076 .
  • the circle 1072 has a diameter that is greater than the diameter of the circle 1076 .
  • FIG. 50B shows the same dual pattern set as shown in FIG. 50A , except the patterns are offset, indicating that the eye 10 is decentered with respect the optical axis of the associated optical instrument. It is not necessary that the targets appear as crosses or circles; patterns such as dots, squares, and other shapes and patterns also can suffice.
  • color is used to indicate when the patient's eye is aligned with the optical axis of the apparatus.
  • a dual color set can be provided.
  • the dual color set may comprise a first region of a first color and a second region of a second color.
  • the patient visual axis is located when the first color and the second color are in a particular position relative to each other. This may cause a desired visual effect to the patient's eye, e.g., when the first region of the first color is aligned with the second region of the second color, the patient may observe a region of a third color. For example, if the first region is colored blue and the second region is colored yellow, the patient will see a region of green. Additional details concerning locating a patient's visual axis or line of sight are contained in U.S. Pat. No. 5,474,548, issued Dec. 12, 1995, incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • FIG. 51 shows one embodiment of an ophthalmic instrument 1200 that can be used in connection with various methods described herein to locate the visual axis of a patient.
  • the instrument 1200 includes an optics housing 1202 and a patient locating fixture 1204 that is coupled with the optics housing 1202 .
  • the optics housing 1202 includes an optical system 1206 that is configured to project two reticle patterns simultaneously to provide fixation targets at a large distance, e.g., infinity, and a shorter, finite distance.
  • the optical system 1206 of the instrument includes a first reference target 1208 , a second reference target 1210 , and a projection lens 1212 .
  • the first and second reference targets 1208 , 1210 are imaged by the projection lens 1212 along an instrument axis 1213 of the ophthalmic instrument 1200 .
  • the first reference target 1208 is formed on a first glass reticle 1214 located a first distance 1216 from the lens 1212 and the second target 1210 is formed on a second glass reticle 1218 located a second distance 1220 from the lens 1212 .
  • the second distance 1220 is equal to the focal length f of the lens 1212 , as was discussed in connection with FIG. 44A .
  • positioning the second target 1210 at the focal length f of the lens 1212 causes the second target 1210 to be imaged at an infinite distance from the lens 1212 .
  • the first distance 1216 preferably is less than the second distance 1220 .
  • the first reference target 1208 is thereby imaged at a large but finite distance from the lens 1212 .
  • the optical system 1206 preferably also includes a light source 1222 that marks the visual axis of the patient after the visual axis has been located in the manner described above.
  • the light source 1222 is positioned separately from the first and second reference targets 1208 , 1210 .
  • the light source 1222 is positioned at a ninety degree angle to the instrument axis 1213 and is configured to direct light toward the axis 1213 .
  • a beamsplitter plate or cube 1224 is provided between the first and second reference targets 1208 , 1210 and the patient to route light rays emitted by the light source 1222 to the eye of the patient.
  • the beamsplitter 1224 is an optical component that reflects light rays from the direction of the light source 1222 , but permits the light rays to pass through the beamsplitter along the instrument axis 1213 .
  • light rays form the first and second reference targets 1208 , 1210 and from the light source 1222 may be propagated toward the eye of the patient.
  • the beamsplitter 1224 could be replaced with a mirror that is movable into and out of the instrument axis 1213 to alternately reflect light from the light source 1222 to the eye or to permit light from the first and second reference targets 1208 , 1210 to reach the eye.
  • the patient locating fixture 1204 includes an elongate spacer 1232 and a contoured locating pad 1234 .
  • the contoured locating pad 1234 defines an aperture through which the patient may look along the instrument axis 213 .
  • the spacer 1232 is coupled with the optics housing 1202 and extends a distance 1236 between the housing 1202 and the contoured locating pad 1234 .
  • the spacer 1232 defines a lumen 1238 that extends between the contoured locating pads 1234 and the optics housing 1202 .
  • the magnitude of the distance 1236 may be selected to increase the certainty of the location of the patient's visual axis. In some embodiments, it is sufficient that the distance 1236 be a relatively fixed distance.
  • the patient's head When the alignment apparatus 1200 is used, the patient's head is brought into contact with the contoured locating pad 1234 , which locates the patients eye 10 in the aperture at a fixed distance from the first and second reference targets 1208 , 1210 . Once the patient's head is positioned in the contoured locating pad 1234 , the patient may move the eye 10 as discussed above, to locate the visual axis. After locating the visual axis, the light source 1222 is engaged to emit light toward the eye 10 , e.g., as reflected by the beamsplitter 1224 .
  • the light emitted by the light source 1222 is reflected by the beamsplitter 1224 along the instrument axis 1213 toward the patient's eye 10 . Because the visual axis of the eye 10 was previously aligned with the instrument axis 1213 , the light from the light source 1222 reflected by the beamsplitter 1224 is also aligned with the visual axis of the eye 10 .
  • the reflected light provides a visual marker of the location of the patient's visual axis.
  • the marking function of the light source 1222 is particularly useful in connection with the methods, described below, of applying a mask. Additional embodiments of ophthalmic instruments embodying this technique are described below in connection with FIGS. 55-59 .
  • FIG. 52 shows an exemplary process for screening a patient interested in increasing his or her depth of focus.
  • the process begins at step 1300 , in which the patient is fitted with soft contact lenses, i.e., a soft contact lens in placed in each of the patient's eyes. If needed, the soft contact lenses may include vision correction.
  • the visual axis of each of the patient's eyes is located as described above.
  • a mask such as any of those described above, is placed on the soft contact lenses such that the optical axis of the aperture of the mask is aligned with the visual axis of the eye. In this position, the mask will be located generally concentric with the patient's pupil.
  • the curvature of the mask should parallel the curvature of the patient's cornea.
  • the process continues at a step 1330 , in which the patient is fitted with a second set of soft contact lenses, i.e., a second soft contact lens is placed over the mask in each of the patient's eyes. The second contact lens holds the mask in a substantially constant position.
  • the patient's vision is tested. During testing, it is advisable to check the positioning of the mask to ensure that the optical axis of the aperture of the mask is substantially collinear with the visual axis of the eye. Further details of testing are set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 6,554,424, issued Apr. 29, 2003, incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • a mask is surgically implanted into the eye of a patient interested in increasing his or her depth of focus.
  • a patient may suffer from presbyopia, as discussed above.
  • the mask may be a mask as described herein, similar to those described in the prior art, or a mask combining one or more of these properties.
  • the mask may be configured to correct visual aberrations.
  • the mask may be pre-rolled or folded for ease of implantation.
  • the mask may be implanted in several locations.
  • the mask may be implanted underneath the cornea's epithelium sheet, beneath the cornea's Bowman membrane, in the top layer of the cornea's stroma, or in the cornea's stroma.
  • the mask When the mask is placed underneath the cornea's epithelium sheet, removal of the mask requires little more than removal of the cornea's epithelium sheet.
  • FIGS. 53 a through 53 c show a mask 1400 inserted underneath an epithelium sheet 1410 .
  • the surgeon first removes the epithelium sheet 1410 .
  • the epithelium sheet 1410 may be rolled back.
  • the surgeon creates a depression 1415 in a Bowman's membrane 420 corresponding to the visual axis of the eye.
  • the visual axis of the eye may be located as described above and may be marked by use of the alignment apparatus 1200 or other similar apparatus.
  • the depression 1415 should be of sufficient depth and width to both expose the top layer 1430 of the stroma 1440 and to accommodate the mask 1400 .
  • the mask 1400 is then placed in the depression 1415 . Because the depression 1415 is located in a position to correspond to the visual axis of the patient's eye, the central axis of the pinhole aperture of the mask 1400 will be substantially collinear with the visual axis of the eye. This will provide the greatest improvement in vision possible with the mask 1400 .
  • the epithelium sheet 1410 is placed over the mask 1400 . Over time, as shown in FIG. 53 c , the epithelium sheet 1410 will grow and adhere to the top layer 1430 of the stroma 1440 , as well as the mask 1400 depending, of course, on the composition of the mask 1400 . As needed, a contact lens may be placed over the incised cornea to protect the mask.
  • FIGS. 54 a through 54 c show a mask 1500 inserted beneath a Bowman's membrane 1520 of an eye.
  • the surgeon first hinges open the Bowman's membrane 1520 .
  • the surgeon creates a depression 1515 in a top layer 1530 of a stroma 1540 corresponding to the visual axis of the eye.
  • the visual axis of the eye may be located as described above and may be marked by using the alignment apparatus 1200 or other similar apparatus.
  • the depression 1515 should be of sufficient depth and width to accommodate the mask 1500 .
  • the mask 1500 is placed in the depression 1515 .
  • the central axis of the pinhole aperture of the mask 1500 will be substantially collinear with the visual axis of the eye. This will provide the greatest improvement in vision possible with the mask 1500 .
  • the Bowman's membrane 1520 is placed over the mask 1500 . Over time, as shown in FIG. 54 c , the epithelium sheet 1510 will grow over the incised area of the Bowman's membrane 1520 . As needed, a contact lens may be placed over the incised cornea to protect the mask.
  • a mask of sufficient thinness i.e., less than substantially 20 microns, may be placed underneath epithelium sheet 1410 .
  • an optic mark having a thickness less than about 20 microns may be placed beneath Bowman's membrane 1520 without creating a depression in the top layer of the stroma.
  • the mask may be threaded into a channel created in the top layer of the stroma.
  • a curved channeling tool creates a channel in the top layer of the stroma, the channel being in a plane parallel to the surface of the cornea.
  • the channel is formed in a position corresponding to the visual axis of the eye.
  • the channeling tool either pierces the surface of the cornea or, in the alternative, is inserted via a small superficial radial incision.
  • a laser focusing an ablative beam may create the channel in the top layer of the stroma.
  • the mask may be a single segment with a break, or it may be two or more segments.
  • the mask in this embodiment is positioned in the channel and is thereby located so that the central axis of the pinhole aperture formed by the mask is substantially collinear with the patient's visual axis to provide the greatest improvement in the patient's depth of focus.
  • the mask may be injected into the top layer of the stroma.
  • an injection tool with a stop penetrates the surface of the cornea to the specified depth.
  • the injection tool may be a ring of needles capable of producing a mask with a single injection.
  • a channel may first be created in the top layer of the stroma in a position corresponding to the visual axis of the patient. Then, the injector tool may inject the mask into the channel.
  • the mask may be a pigment, or it may be pieces of pigmented material suspended in a bio-compatible medium.
  • the pigment material may be made of a polymer or, in the alternative, made of a suture material.
  • the mask injected into the channel is thereby positioned so that the central axis of the pinhole aperture formed by the pigment material is substantially collinear with the visual axis of the patient.
  • the mask may be placed beneath the corneal flap created during keratectomy, when the outermost 20% of the cornea is hinged open.
  • a mask placed beneath the corneal flap created during keratectomy should be substantially aligned with the patient's visual axis, as discussed above, for greatest effect.
  • the mask may be aligned with the patient's visual axis and placed in a pocket created in the cornea's stroma.
  • FIG. 55 shows a surgical system 2000 that employs dual target fixation in a manner similar to that discussed above in connection with FIGS. 43-51 .
  • the surgical system 2000 enables the identification of a unique feature of a patient's eye in connection with a surgical procedure.
  • the surgical system 2000 is similar to the ophthalmic instrument 1200 except as set forth below.
  • the surgical system 2000 is configured to align an axis of the patient's eye, e.g., the patient's line of sight (sometimes referred to herein as the “visual axis”), with an axis of the system 2000 .
  • the axis of the system 2000 may be a viewing axis along which the patient may direct an eye. As discussed above, such alignment is particularly useful in many surgical procedures, including those that benefit from precise knowledge of the location of one or more structures or features of the eye on which the procedures is being performed.
  • the surgical system 2000 includes a surgical viewing device 2004 and an alignment device 2008 .
  • the surgical viewing device 2004 includes a surgical microscope.
  • the surgical viewing device 2004 may be any device or combination of devices that enables a surgeon to visualize the surgical site with sufficient clarity or that enhances the surgeon's visualization of the surgical site. A surgeon also may elect to use the alignment device 2004 without a viewing device.
  • the surgical system 2000 preferably also includes a fixture configured to conveniently mount one or more components to the surgical viewing device 2004 .
  • the alignment device 2008 includes an alignment module 2020 , a marking module 2024 , and an image capture module 2028 .
  • the marking module 2024 is eliminated. Where the marking module 2024 is eliminated, one or more of its functions may be performed by the image capture module 2028 . In another embodiment, the image capture module 2028 is eliminated.
  • the alignment device 2004 preferably also has a control device 2032 that directs one or more components of the alignment device 2004 . As discussed more fully below, the control device 2032 includes a computer 2036 and signal lines 2040 a , 2040 b , and a trigger 2042 in one embodiment.
  • the alignment module 2020 includes components that enable a patient to align a feature related to the patient's eye, vision, or sense of sight with an instrument axis, e.g., an axis of the alignment device 2008 .
  • the alignment module 2020 includes a plurality of targets (e.g., two targets) that are located on the instrument axis.
  • the alignment module 2020 includes a first target 2056 and a second target 2060 .
  • the alignment module 2020 may be employed to align the patient's line-of-sight with an axis 2052 that extends perpendicular to the faces of the targets 2056 , 2060 .
  • the alignment device 2008 could be configured such that the patient is positioned relative thereto so that the eye is positioned along the axis 2052 , it may be more convenient to position the patient such that an eye 2064 of the patient is not on the axis 2052 .
  • the patient may be positioned a distance 2068 from the axis 2052 .
  • FIG. 55 shows that the gaze of the patient's eye 2064 is directed generally along a patient viewing axis 2072 .
  • the alignment device 2008 is configured such that the patient viewing axis 2072 is at about a ninety degree angle with respect to the instrument axis 2052 .
  • a path 2076 optically connecting the targets 2056 , 2060 with the patient's eye 2064 extends partially along the axis 2052 and partially along the patient viewing axis 2072 .
  • the optical path 2076 defines the path along which the images of the targets 2056 , 2060 are cast when the alignment device 2008 is configured such that the patient's eye 2064 is not on the axis 2052 .
  • the alignment device 2008 includes a beamsplitter 2080 located on the axis 2052 to direct along the patient viewing axis 2072 light rays coming toward the beamsplitter 2080 from the direction of the targets 2056 , 2060 .
  • at least a portion of the optical path 2076 is defined from the patient's eye 2064 to the beamsplitter 2080 and from the beamsplitter 2080 to the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 .
  • the alignment device 2008 is configured to enable the patient viewing axis 2072 to be at about a ninety degree angle with respect to the axis 2052 , other angles are possible and may be employed as desired.
  • the arrangement of FIG. 55 is convenient because it enables a surgeon to be directly above and relatively close to the patient if the patient is positioned on his or her back on an operating table.
  • the first target 2056 is on the axis 2052 and on the optical path 2076 between the second target 2060 and the patient's eye 2064 . More particularly, light rays that are directed from the second target 2060 intersect the first target 2056 and are thereafter directed toward the beamsplitter 2080 . As discussed more fully below, the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 are configured to project a suitable pattern toward the patient's eye 2064 .
  • the patient interacts with the projected images of the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 to align the line-of-sight (or other unique anatomical feature) of the patient's eye 2064 or of the patient's sense of vision with an axis of the instrument, such as the axis 2052 , the viewing axis 2072 , or the optical path 2076 .
  • the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 may take any suitable form.
  • the targets 2056 , 2060 may be similar to those hereinbefore described.
  • the targets 2056 , 2060 may be formed on separate reticles or as part of a single alignment target.
  • at least one of the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 includes a glass reticle with a pattern formed thereon.
  • the pattern on the first target 2056 and the pattern on the second target 2060 may be linear patterns that are combined to form a third linear pattern when the patient's line-of-sight is aligned with the axis 2052 or optical path 2076 .
  • FIGS. 55A-55C shows one embodiment of an alignment target 2081 .
  • the alignment target 2081 can be formed of glass or another substantially transparent medium.
  • the alignment target 2081 includes a first surface 2082 and a second surface 2083 .
  • the first and second surfaces 2082 , 2083 are separated by a distance 2084 .
  • the distance 2084 is selected to provide sufficient separation between the first and second surfaces 2082 , 2083 to facilitate alignment by the patient by any of the methods described herein.
  • the alignment target 2081 includes a first pattern 2085 that may comprise a linear pattern formed on the first surface 2082 and a second pattern 2086 that may comprise a linear pattern formed on the second surface 2083 .
  • the first and second patterns 2085 , 2086 are selected so that when the patient's line-of-sight is properly aligned with an axis of the alignment device 2008 , the first and second patterns 2085 , 2086 form a selected pattern (as in FIG. 55B ) but when the patient's line-of-sight is properly aligned with an axis of the alignment device 2008 , the first and second patterns 2085 , 2086 do not form the selected pattern (as in FIG. 55C ).
  • the first and second pattern 2085 , 2086 each are generally L-shaped. When aligned, the first and second patterns 2085 , 2086 form a cross. When not aligned, a gap is formed between the patterns and they appear as an L and an inverted L. This arrangement advantageously exploits vernier acuity, which is the ability of the eye to keenly detect misalignment of displaced lines. Any other combination of non-linear or linear patterns (e.g., other linear patterns that exploit vernier acuity) can be used as targets, as discussed above.
  • the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 may be made visible to the patient's eye 2064 in any suitable manner.
  • a target illuminator 2090 may be provided to make the targets 2056 , 2060 visible to the eye 2064 .
  • the target illuminator 2090 is a source of radiant energy, such as a light source.
  • the light source can be any suitable light source, such as an incandescent light, a fluorescent light, one or more light emitting diodes, or any other source of light to illuminate the targets 2056 , 2060 .
  • the alignment module 2020 also may include one or more optic elements, such as lenses, that relatively sharply focus the images projected from the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 to present sharp images to the patient's eye 2064 .
  • the focal length of the optic element or system of optical elements may be located at any suitable location, e.g., at the first or second targets 2056 , 2060 , between the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 in front of the first target 2056 , or behind the second target 2060 .
  • the focal length is the distance from a location (e.g., the location of an optic element) to the plane at which the optic element focuses the target images projected from the first and second target 2056 , 2060 .
  • FIG. 55 shows a series of arrows that indicate the projection of the images of the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 to the patient's eye 2064 .
  • an arrow 2094 indicates the direction of light cast by the target illuminator 2090 along the axis 2052 toward the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 .
  • the light strikes the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 and is absorbed by or passed through the targets to cast an image of the targets 2056 , 2060 along the axis 2052 in a direction indicated by an arrow 2098 .
  • FIG. 55 shows a series of arrows that indicate the projection of the images of the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 to the patient's eye 2064 .
  • an arrow 2094 indicates the direction of light cast by the target illuminator 2090 along the axis 2052 toward the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 .
  • the light strikes the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 and is absorbed by or passed through the
  • the image of the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 intersects a beamsplitter 2102 that forms a part of the marking module 2024 and the image capture module 2028 .
  • the beamsplitter 2102 is configured to transmit the majority of the light conveying the images of the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 toward the beamsplitter 2080 as indicated by an arrow 2106 .
  • the beamsplitter 2102 will be discussed in greater detail below.
  • the light is thereafter reflected by the beamsplitter 2080 along the patient viewing axis 2072 and toward the patient's eye 2064 .
  • the beamsplitter 2080 transmits some of the incident light beyond the beamsplitter 2080 along the axis 2050 . In one embodiment, 70 percent of the light incident on the beamsplitter 2080 is reflected toward the patient's eye 2064 and 30 percent is transmitter.
  • the beamsplitter 2080 can be configured to transmit and reflect in any suitable fraction.
  • the patient may interact with those images to align a feature of the patient's eye 2064 with an axis of the alignment device 2008 .
  • the patient aligns the line-of-sight of the eye 2064 with the patient viewing axis 2072 of the alignment device 2008 .
  • the patient is positioned such that the optical path 2076 intersects the patient's eye 2064 .
  • the patient is instructed to focus on the first target 2056 .
  • Motion is provided between the patient's eye 2064 and the optical path 2076 (and therefore between the patient's eye 2064 and the targets 2056 , 2060 ).
  • the relative motion between the patient's eye 2064 and the targets 2056 , 2060 may be provided by the patient moving his or her head with respect to the patient viewing axis 2072 .
  • the patient may be enabled to move all or a portion of the surgical system 2000 while the patient remains stationary.
  • the line-of-sight of the patient is aligned with the patient viewing axis 2072 , the optical path 2076 , and the axis 2052 of the alignment module 2020 .
  • one or both of the marking module 2024 and the image capture module 2028 may be included to assist the surgeon in placing a mask after the eye 2064 has been aligned. At least one of the marking module 2024 and the image capture module 2028 may be used to correlate the line-of-sight of the patient's eye 2064 , which is not otherwise visible, with a visual cue, such as a visible physical feature of the patient's eye, a marker projected onto the eye or an image of the eye, or a virtual image of a marker visible to the surgeon, or any combination of the foregoing. As is discussed in more detail below, the virtual image may be an image that is directed toward the surgeon's eye that appears from the surgeon's point of view to be on the eye 2064 at a pre-selected location.
  • the marking module 2024 is configured to produce an image, sometimes referred to herein as a “marking image”, that is visible to the surgeon and that is assists the surgeon in placing a mask or performing another surgical procedure after the line of sight of the eye 2064 has been located.
  • the marking module 2024 of the alignment device 2008 shown includes a marking target 2120 and a marking target illuminator 2124 .
  • the marking target illuminator 2124 preferably is a source of light, such as any of those discussed above in connection with the target illuminator 2090 .
  • FIG. 55 shows that in one embodiment, the marking target 2120 is a structure configured to produce a marking image when light is projected onto the marking target 2120 .
  • the marking target 2120 may be similar to the targets 2056 , 2060 .
  • the marking target 2120 is a glass reticle with a suitable geometrical pattern formed thereon.
  • the pattern formed on the marking target 2120 may be a clear two dimensional shape that is surrounded by one or more opaque regions. For example, a clear annulus of selected width surrounded by opaque regions could be provided.
  • the marking target 2120 may be a glass reticle with an opaque two dimensional shape surrounded by substantially clear regions.
  • the marking target 2120 need not be made of glass and need not have a fixed pattern.
  • the marking target 2120 may be located in any suitable location with respect to the beamsplitter 2080 or the alignment device 2008 as discussed below.
  • FIG. 55 shows that in one embodiment, the marking image is generated in a manner similar to the manner in which the images of the first and second targets 2056 , 2060 are generated.
  • the marking target 2124 and the marking target illuminator 2124 cooperate to produce, generate, or project the marking image along a marking image axis 2128 .
  • the marking image is conveyed by light along the axis 2128 .
  • the marking target illuminator 2124 casts light toward the marking target 2120 in a direction indicated by an arrow 2132 .
  • the marking target 2120 interacts with the light cast by the marking target illuminator 2124 , e.g., by at least one of transmitting, absorbing, filtering, and attenuating at least a portion of the light.
  • An arrow 2136 indicates the direction along which the marking image generated by the interaction of the marking target illuminator 2124 and the marking target 2120 is conveyed.
  • the marking image preferably is conveyed along the marking axis 2128 .
  • the marking target 2120 is located off of the axis 2052 and the image of the marking target initially is cast in a direction generally perpendicular to the axis 2052 .
  • a beamsplitter 2140 is positioned on the marking axis 2128 in the embodiment of FIG. 55 .
  • the beamsplitter 2140 is configured to be substantially transparent to light being transmitted along the marking axis 2128 from the direction of the marking target 2120 .
  • the light conveying the marking image is substantially entirely transmitted beyond the beamsplitter 2140 along the marking axis 2128 toward the axis 2052 as indicated by an arrow 2144 .
  • the beamsplitter 2140 generally does not affect the marking image.
  • a surface of the beamsplitter 2102 that faces the marking target 2120 is reflective to light.
  • the light conveying the marking image is reflected and thereafter is conveyed along the axis 2052 as indicated by the arrow 2106 .
  • the surface of the beamsplitter 2080 that faces the beamsplitter 2102 also is reflective to at least some light (e.g., 70 percent of the incident light, as discussed above).
  • the light conveying the marking image is reflected and thereafter is conveyed along the patient viewing axis 2072 toward the patient's eye 2064 as indicated by the arrow 2148 .
  • a marking image projected from the marking target 2120 may be projected onto the patient's eye 2064 .
  • projecting the marking image onto the patient's eye 2064 may assist the surgeon in accurately placing a mask.
  • the surgeon may be assisted in that the location of line-of-sight of the patient's eye (or some other generally invisible feature of the eye 2064 ) is correlated with a visible feature of the eye, such as the iris or other anatomical feature.
  • the marking image is a substantially circular ring that has a diameter that is greater than the size of the inner periphery of the iris under surgical conditions (e.g., the prevailing light and the state of dilation of the patient's eye 2064 ).
  • the marking image is a substantially circular ring that has a diameter that is less than the size of the outer periphery of the iris under surgical conditions (e.g., light and dilation of the eye 2064 ).
  • the marking image is a substantially circular ring that has a size that is correlated to another feature of the eye 2064 , e.g., the limbus of the eye.
  • a marking module in one embodiment, includes a secondary marking module.
  • the secondary marking module is not routed through the optics of associated with the alignment device 2008 . Rather, the secondary marking module is coupled with the alignment device 2008 .
  • the secondary marking module includes a source of radiant energy, e.g., a laser or light source similar to any of these discussed herein.
  • the source of radiant energy is configured to direct a plurality of spots (e.g., two, three, four, or more than four spots) onto the patient's eye 2064 .
  • the spots preferably are small, bright spots.
  • the spots indicate positions on the eye 2064 that correlate with a feature of a mask, such as an edge of a mask, when the mask is in the correct position with respect to the line-of-sight of the eye 2064 .
  • the spots can be aligned with the projected marking target such that they hit at a selected location on the projected marking target (e.g., circumferentially spaced locations on the inner edge, on the outer edge, or on both the inner and outer edges).
  • the marking module may give a visual cue as to the proper positioning of a mask that is correlated to the location of the line-of-sight without passing through the optics of the alignment device.
  • the visual cue of the secondary marking module may be coordinated with the marking image of the marking module 2024 in some embodiments.
  • a visual cue generated for the benefit of the surgeon e.g., the reflection of the image of the marking target 2120
  • this is due to the generally poor reflection of marking images off of the cornea. Where reflection of the marking image off of the cornea is poor, the reflection of the image may be quite dim.
  • the cornea is an off-center aspherical structure, so the corneal reflection (purkinje images) may be offset from the location of the intersection of the visual axis and the corneal surface as viewed by the surgeon.
  • One technique for increasing the visibility of a visual cue involves applying a substance to the eye that can react with the projected image of the marking target 2120 .
  • a dye such as fluorescein dye
  • the marking target illuminator 2124 may be activated to cause an image of the marking target 2120 to be projected onto the eye, as discussed above.
  • the marking target illuminator 2124 is configured to project light from all or a discrete portion of the visible spectrum of electromagnetic radiant energy, e.g., the wavelengths corresponding to blue light, to project the image of the marking target 2120 onto the eye 2064 .
  • the projected image interacts with the dye and causes the image of the marking target 2120 to be illuminated on the surface of the cornea.
  • the presence of the dye greatly increases the visibility of the image of the marking target. For example, where the marking target 2120 is a ring, a bright ring will be visible to the surgeon because the light causes the dye to fluoresce.
  • This technique substantially eliminates errors in placement of a mask due to the presence of the purkinje images and may generally increase the brightness of the image of the marking target 2120 .
  • a drape is placed over the cornea.
  • the drape may have any suitable configuration.
  • the drape may be a relatively thin structure that will substantially conform to the anterior structure of the eye.
  • the drape may be formed in a manner similar to the formation of a conventional contact lens.
  • the drape is a contact lens.
  • the visual cue enhancing device preferably has suitable reflecting properties.
  • the visual cue enhancing device diffusely reflects the light projecting the image of the marking target 2120 onto the cornea.
  • the visual cue enhancing device is configured to interact with a discrete portion of the visible spectrum of electromagnetic radiant energy, e.g., the wavelengths thereof corresponding to blue light.
  • the alignment device 2008 shown in FIG. 55 also includes an image capture module 2028 .
  • the image capture module 2028 of the surgical system 2000 is capable of capturing one or more images of the patient's eye 2064 to assist the surgeon in performing surgical procedures on the eye 2064 .
  • the image capture module 2028 preferably includes a device to capture an image, such as a camera 2200 and a display device 2204 to display an image.
  • the display device 2204 may be a liquid crystal display.
  • the image capture module 2028 may be controlled in part by the control device 2032 of the surgical system 2000 .
  • the computer 2036 may be employed to process images captured by the camera 2200 and to convey an image to the display device 2204 where it is made visible to the surgeon.
  • the computer 2036 may also direct the operation of or be responsive to at least one of the camera 2200 , the display device 2204 , the trigger 2042 , and any other component of the image capture module 2028 .
  • the camera 2200 can be any suitable camera.
  • One type of camera that can be used is a charge-coupled device camera, referred to herein as a CCD camera.
  • One type of CCD camera incorporates a silicon chip, the surface of which includes light-sensitive pixels. When light, e.g., a photon or light particle, hits a pixel, an electric charge is registered at the pixels that can be detected. Images of sufficient resolution can be generated with a large array of sensitive pixels.
  • one advantageous embodiment provides precise alignment of a selected pixel (e.g., one in the exact geometric center of the display device 2204 ) with the axis 2052 . When such alignment is provided, the marking module may not be needed to align a mask with the line-of-sight of the eye 2064 .
  • an image captured by the camera 2200 aids the surgeon attempting to align a mask, such as any of the masks described herein, with the eye 2064 .
  • the image capture module 2028 is configured to capture an image of one or more physical attributes of the eye 2064 , the location of which may be adequately correlated to the line-of-sight of the eye 2064 .
  • the image of the patient's iris may be directed along the patient viewing axis 2072 to the beamsplitter 2080 as indicated by the arrow 2148 .
  • a side of the beamsplitter 2080 that faces the beamsplitter 2080 is reflective to light transmitted from the eye 2064 .
  • the beamsplitter 2080 is reflected by the beamsplitter 2080 and is conveyed along the axis 2052 toward the beamsplitter 2102 , as indicated by the arrow 2106 .
  • the surface of the beamsplitter 2102 facing the beamsplitter 2080 is reflective to light.
  • substantially all of the light conveying the image of the iris is reflected by the beamsplitter 2102 and is conveyed along the marking axis 2128 toward the beamsplitter 2140 , as indicated by the arrow 2144 .
  • the surface of the beamsplitter 2140 facing the beamsplitter 2102 and the camera 2200 is reflective to light.
  • substantially all of the light conveying the image of the iris is reflected along an image capture axis 2212 that extends between the beamsplitter 2140 and the camera 2200 .
  • the light is conveyed along an image capture axis 2212 as indicated by an arrow 2216 .
  • the image captured by the camera 2200 is conveyed to the computer 2036 by way of a signal line 2040 a .
  • the computer 2036 processes the signal in a suitable manner and generates signals to be conveyed along a signal line 2040 b to the display device 2204 .
  • Any suitable signal line and computer or other signal processing device can be used to convey signals from the camera 2200 to the display device 2204 .
  • the signal lines 2040 a , 2040 b need not be physical lines.
  • any suitable wireless technology may be used in combination with or in place of physical lines or wires.
  • the capturing of the image by the camera 2200 may be triggered in any suitable way.
  • the trigger 2042 may be configured to be manually actuated.
  • the trigger 2042 is configured to be actuated by the patient when his or her eye 2064 is aligned (e.g., when the targets 2056 , 2060 are aligned, as discussed above).
  • the likelihood of the eye 2064 moving prior to the capturing of the image is greatly reduced.
  • another person participating in the procedure may be permitted to trigger the capturing of the image, e.g., on the patient's cue.
  • the control device 2032 may be configured to automatically capture the image of the patient's eye 2064 based on a predetermined criteria.
  • the display device 2204 is configured to be illuminated to direct an image along the axis 2052 toward the beamsplitter 2080 as indicated by an arrow 2208 .
  • the surface of the beamsplitter 2080 that faces the display device 2204 preferably is reflective to light directed from the location of the beamsplitter 2080 .
  • the image on the display 2052 is reflected by the beamsplitter 2080 toward an eye 2212 of the surgeon as indicated by an arrow 2216 .
  • the beamsplitter 2080 preferably is transparent from the perspective of the surgeon's eye 2212 .
  • the surgeon may simultaneously view the patient's eye 2064 and the image on the display device 2204 in one embodiment.
  • the marking image may be projected at the same time that an image is displayed on the display device 2204 .
  • the marking image and the image on the display will appear to both be on the patient's eye. In one arrangement, they have the same configuration (e.g., size and shape) and therefore overlap. This can reinforce the image from the perspective of the surgeon, further increasing the visibility of the visual cue provided by the marking image.
  • the display device 2204 is located at a distance 2220 from the beamsplitter 2080 .
  • the patient is located a distance 2224 from the axis 2052 .
  • the distance 2220 is about equal to the distance 2224 .
  • both the display device 2204 and the patient's eye 2064 are at the focal length of the surgical viewing device 2004 . This assures that the image generated by the display device 2204 is in focus at the same time that the patient's eye is in focus.
  • the system 2000 is configured to track movement of the patient's eye 2064 during the procedure.
  • the trigger 2042 is actuated by the patient when the eye 2064 is aligned with an axis of the alignment device 2008 .
  • the image capture module 2028 may be configured to respond to such movements by moving the image formed on the display device 2204 .
  • a ring may be formed on the display device 2204 that is similar to those discussed above in connection with the marking target 2120 .
  • the beamsplitter 2080 enables the surgeon to see the ring visually overlaid on the patient's eye 2064 .
  • the image capture module 2028 compares the real-time position of the patient's eye 2064 with the image of the eye captured when the trigger 2042 is actuated. Differences in the real-time position and the position captured by the camera 2200 are determined. The position of the ring is moved an amount corresponding to the differences in position. As a result, from the perspective of the surgeon, movements of the ring and the eye correspond and the ring continues to indicate the correct position to place a mask.
  • a first variation is substantially identical to the embodiment shown in FIG. 55 , except as set forth below.
  • the video capture module 2028 is eliminated.
  • This embodiment is similar to that set forth above in connection with FIG. 51 .
  • the marking module 2024 is configured to project the marking target onto the surface of the patient's eye. This variation is advantageous in that it has a relatively simple construction. Also, this variation projects the marking image onto the surface of the cornea, proximate the surgical location.
  • the marking module 2024 is configured to display the marking image to the surgeon's eye 2212 but not to the patient's eye 2064 . This may be provided by positioning the marking target 2120 approximately in the location of the display device 2204 .
  • the marking image may be generated and presented to the surgeon in any suitable manner.
  • the marking target 2120 and marking target illuminator 2124 may be repositioned so that they project the image of the marking target 2120 as indicated by the arrows 2208 , 2216 .
  • the marking target 2120 and the marking target illuminator 2124 may be replaced by a unitary display, such as an LCD display.
  • This implementation of the first variation is advantageous in that the marking image is visible to the surgeon but is not visible to the patient. The patient is freed from having to respond to or being subject to the marking image. This can increase alignment performance by increasing patient comfort and decreasing distractions, thereby enabling the patient to remain still during the procedure.
  • a dual marking image is presented to the eye 2212 of the surgeon.
  • this implementation has a marking module 2024 similar to that shown in FIG. 55 and discussed above, except as set forth below.
  • a virtual image is presented to the surgeon's eye 2212 .
  • a virtual image generation surface is positioned in substantially the same location as the display device 2204 . The surface may be a mirror, another reflective surface, or a non-reflective surface.
  • the display device 2204 is a white card.
  • a first fraction of the light conveying the marking image is reflected by the beamsplitter 2080 to the patient's eye 2064 . The marking image is thus formed on the patient's eye.
  • a second fraction of the light conveying the marking image is transmitted to the virtual image generation surface.
  • the marking image is formed on or reflected by the virtual image generation surface.
  • the marking target thus also is visible to the surgeon's eye 2212 in the form of a virtual image of the target.
  • the virtual image and the marking image formed on the patient's eye are both visible to the surgeon.
  • This implementation of the first variation is advantageous in that the virtual image and the marking image of the marking target are visible to the surgeon's eye 2212 and are reinforced each other making the marking image highly visible to the surgeon.
  • the marking module 2024 is eliminated.
  • the image capture module 2028 provides a visual cue for the surgeon to assist in the placement of a mask.
  • an image can be displayed on the display device 2204 , as discussed above.
  • the image can be generated in response to the patient actuating the trigger 2042 .
  • the patient actuates the trigger when the targets 2056 , 2060 appear aligned, as discussed above.
  • care should be taken to determine the position of the display device 2204 in the alignment device because the image formed on the display device 2204 is to give the surgeon a visual cue indicating the location of the line-of-sight of the patient.
  • the display device 2204 is carefully coupled with the alignment module so that the axis 2052 extends through a known portion (e.g., a known pixel) thereof. Because the precise location of the axis 2052 on the display device 2204 is known, the relationship of the image formed thereon to the line-of-sight of the patient is known.
  • a known portion e.g., a known pixel
  • FIG. 56 shows a portion of a surgical system 2400 that is similar to the surgical system 2000 discussed above except as set forth below.
  • the surgical system 2400 may be modified according to any of the variations and embodiments hereinbefore described.
  • the portion of the surgical system 2400 is shown from the surgeon's viewpoint in FIG. 56 .
  • the surgical system 2400 includes an alignment device 2404 and a fixture 2408 .
  • the alignment device 2404 is similar to the alignment device 2008 discussed above, except as set forth below.
  • the surgical system 2400 is shown without a surgical microscope or other viewing device, but is configured to be coupled with one by way of the fixture 2408 .
  • the fixture 2408 may take any suitable form.
  • the fixture 2408 includes a clamp 2412 , an elevation adjustment mechanism 2416 , and suitable members to interconnect the clamp 2408 and the mechanism 2416 .
  • the clamp 2412 is a ring clamp that includes a first side portion 2420 , a second side portion 2424 , and a clamping mechanism 2426 to actuate the first and second side portion 2420 , 2424 with respect to each other.
  • the first side portion 2420 has a first arcuate inner surface 2428 and the second side portion 2424 has a second arcuate inner surface 2432 that faces the first arcuate inner surface 2428 .
  • the clamping mechanism 2426 is coupled with each of the first and second side portions 2420 , 2424 to cause the first and second arcuate inner surfaces 2428 , 2432 to move toward or away from each other. As the first and second arcuate inner surfaces 2428 , 2432 move toward each other they apply a force to a structure, such as a portion of a surgical microscope, placed between the first and second arcuate inner surfaces 2428 , 2432 . In one embodiment, the force applied by the first and second arcuate inner surfaces 2428 , 2432 is sufficient to clamp the alignment device 2404 with respect to a surgical viewing aid. In one embodiment, the clamp 2412 is configured to couple with any one of (or more than one of) the currently commercially available surgical microscopes.
  • the fixture 2408 preferably also is configured to suspend the alignment device 2404 at an elevation below the clamp 2412 .
  • a bracket 2440 is coupled with the clamp 2412 , which is an L-shaped bracket in the illustrated embodiment with a portion of the L extending downward from the clamp 2412 .
  • FIG. 56 shows the L-shaped bracket spaced laterally from the clamp 2412 by a spacer 2444 .
  • the bracket 2440 is pivotably coupled with the spacer 2444 so that the alignment device 2404 can be easily rotated out of the field of view of the surgical microscope or viewing aid, which is visible through the spaced defined between the surfaces 2428 , 2432 .
  • the fixture 2408 is also configured to enable the alignment device 2404 to be positioned at a selected elevation within a range of elevations beneath the clamp 2412 .
  • the elevation of the alignment device 2404 may be easily and quickly adjusted by manipulating a suitable mechanism.
  • manual actuation may be employed by providing a knob 2460 coupled with a rack-and-pinion gear coupling 2464 .
  • the rack-and-pinion gear coupling 2464 can be actuated by another manual device that is more remote, such as by a foot pedal or trigger or by an automated device.
  • FIGS. 57-59 show further details of the alignment device 2404 .
  • the alignment device 2404 is operatively coupled with an illuminator control device 2500 and includes an alignment module 2504 , a marking module 2508 , and an image routing module 2512 .
  • the illuminator control device 2500 controls light or energy sources associated with the alignment control device 2404 .
  • the illuminator control device 2500 forms a part of a computer or other signal processing device, similar to the computer 2036 discussed above.
  • the alignment module 2504 is similar to the alignment module 2020 except as set forth below.
  • the alignment module 2504 includes a housing 2520 that extends between a first end 2524 and a second end 2528 .
  • the first end 2524 of the housing 2520 is coupled with the image routing module 2512 and interacts with the image routing module 2512 in a manner described below.
  • the housing 2520 includes a rigid body 2532 that preferably is hollow.
  • An axis 2536 extends within the hollow portion of the housing 2520 between the first and second ends 2524 , 2528 .
  • the second end 2528 of the housing 2520 is enclosed by an end plate 2540 .
  • the housing 2520 is configured to protect a variety of components that are positioned in the hollow spaced defined therein.
  • a target illuminator 2560 is positioned inside the housing 2520 near the second end 2528 thereof.
  • a power cable 2564 (or other electrical conveyance) that extends from the end plate 2540 electrically connects the target illuminator 2560 to a power source.
  • the target illuminator 2560 could also be triggered and powered by a wireless connection.
  • the power source forms a portion of the illuminator control device 2500 to which the power cable 2564 is connected. Power may be from any suitable power source, e.g., from a battery or electrical outlet of suitable voltage.
  • the illuminator control device 2500 enables the surgeon (or other person assisting in a procedure) to control the amount of energy supplied to the target illuminator 2560 in the alignment module 2504 .
  • the illuminator control device 2500 has a brightness control so that the brightness of the target illumination 2560 can be adjusted.
  • the brightness control may be actuated in a suitable manner, such as by a brightness control knob 2568 .
  • the brightness control may take any other suitable form to provide manual analog (e.g., continuous) adjustment of the amount of energy applied to the target illuminator 2560 or to provide manual digital (e.g., discrete) adjustment of the amount of energy applied to the target illuminator 2560 .
  • the brightness control may be adjustable automatically, e.g., under computer control.
  • the illuminator control device 2500 may also have an on-off switch 2572 configured to selectively apply and cut off power to the target illuminator 2560 .
  • the on-off switch 2572 may be operated manually, automatically, or in a partially manual and partially automatic mode.
  • the brightness control and on-off switch could be controlled wirelessly in another embodiment.
  • first target 2592 located in the housing 2520 are a first target 2592 , a second target 2596 , and a lens 2600 .
  • the first and second targets 2592 , 2596 are configured to present a composite image to the patient's eye such that the patient may align the line-of-sight of the eye with an axis (e.g., the axis 2536 ) of the alignment module 2504 .
  • the first and second targets 2592 , 2596 are similar to the targets discussed above.
  • the alignment target 2081 which includes two targets on opposite ends of a single component, may be positioned within the housing 2520 .
  • the lens 2600 may be any suitable lens.
  • the lens 2600 is configured to sharply focus one or both of the images of the first and second targets 2592 , 2596 in a manner similar to the focus of the targets 2056 , 2060 , discussed above.
  • the alignment module 2504 is configured such that the position of the first and second targets 2592 , 2596 within the housing 2520 can be adjusted.
  • the adjustability of the first and second targets 2592 , 2596 may be provided with any suitable arrangement.
  • FIGS. 57-58 shows that in one embodiment the alignment module 2504 includes a target adjustment device 2612 to provide rapid gross adjustment and fine adjustment of the positions of the targets 2592 , 2596 within the housing 2520 .
  • the target adjustment device 2612 includes a support member 2616 that extends along at least a portion of the housing 2520 between the first end 2524 and the second end 2528 . In one embodiment, the support member 2616 is coupled with the end plate 2540 and with the image routing module 2512 . In one embodiment, the target adjustment device 2612 includes a lens fixture 2620 that is coupled with the lens 2600 and a target fixture 2624 that is coupled with the first and second targets 2592 , 2596 . In another embodiment, each of the first and second targets 2592 , 2596 is coupled with a separate target fixture so that the targets may be individually positioned and adjusted.
  • the lens 2600 may be adjustable as shown, or in a fixed position. Movement of the lens and the targets 2592 , 2596 enable the patterns on the targets 2592 , 2596 to be brought into focus from the patient's point of view.
  • the support member 2616 is a threaded rod and each of the first and second target fixtures 2620 , 2624 has a corresponding threaded through hole to receive the threaded support member 2616 .
  • an adjustment device such as a knob 2628 is coupled with the threaded support member 2616 so that the support member 2616 may be rotated.
  • the knob 2628 may be knurled to make it easier to grasp and rotate.
  • Rotation of the support member 2616 causes the first and second target fixtures 2620 , 2624 to translate on the support member 2616 along the outside of the housing 2520 .
  • the movement of the first and second target fixtures 2620 , 2624 provides a corresponding movement of the first and second targets 2592 , 2596 within the housing 2520 .
  • a quick release mechanism 2640 is provided to enable the first and second target fixtures 2620 , 2624 selectively to clamp and to release the support member 2616 .
  • the quick release mechanism 2640 can be a spring loaded clamp that causes the through holes formed in the first and second target fixtures 2620 , 2624 to open to create a gap through which the support member 2616 can pass.
  • the first and second target fixtures 2620 , 2624 are removed from the support member 2616 , the can be quickly moved to another position on the support member 2616 . After rapid repositioning, fine positioning of the first and second target fixtures 2620 , 2624 may be achieved with by turning the support member 2616 .
  • the alignment device 2404 also includes a marking module 2508 that is similar to the marking module 2024 described above, except as set forth below.
  • the marking module includes a housing 2642 that is generally rigid and that defines a hollow space within the housing.
  • the housing 2642 includes a first end 2644 that is coupled with the image routing module 2512 and a second end 2648 that is closed by an end plate 2652 .
  • the housing 2642 includes a first portion 2656 and a second portion 2660 .
  • the first and second portions 2656 , 2660 preferably are configured to be disengaged from each other so that components located in the hollow space defined in the housing 2642 to be accessed. Such rapid access facilitates servicing and reconfiguring of the components located in the housing 2642 .
  • the first portion 2656 extends between the first end 2644 and a midpoint of the housing 2642 .
  • the second portion 2660 extends between the first portion 2656 and the second end 2648 of the housing 2642 .
  • the first portion 2656 has a male member with external threads and the second portion 2660 has a female member with internal thread such that the first and second portions 2656 , 2660 may be engaged with and disengaged from each other by way of the threads.
  • the housing 2642 provides a space in which one or more components may be positioned.
  • the housing 2642 encloses a marking target illuminator 2680 and a marking target 2684 .
  • the marking target illuminator 2680 may be a suitable source of radiant energy, e.g., a light source, such as an incandescent light, a fluorescent light, a light-emitting diode, or other source of radiant energy.
  • a light source such as an incandescent light, a fluorescent light, a light-emitting diode, or other source of radiant energy.
  • the marking target illuminator 2680 may include or be coupled with suitable optical components to process the light generated thereby in a useful manner, e.g., by providing one or more filters to modify the light, e.g., by allowing a subset of the spectrum of light energy emitted by the light source (e.g., one or more bands of the electromagnetic spectrum) to be transmitted toward the marking target 2684 .
  • the marking target illuminator 2680 is located near the end plate 2652 .
  • a power cable 2688 (or other electrical conveyance) that extends from the end plate 2652 electrically connects the marking target illuminator 2680 to a power source.
  • the power source forms a portion of the illuminator control device 2500 to which the power cable 2688 is connected.
  • Power may be from any suitable power source, e.g., from a battery or electrical outlet of suitable voltage.
  • the illuminator control device 2500 enables the surgeon (or other person assisting in a procedure) to control the amount of energy supplied to the target illuminator 2680 in the marking module 2508 .
  • the illuminator control device 2500 has a brightness control so that the brightness of the marking target illumination 2680 can be adjusted.
  • the brightness control may be actuated in a suitable manner, such as by a brightness control knob 2692 .
  • the brightness control may be similar to that discussed above in connection with the brightness control of the target illuminator 2560 .
  • the illuminator control device 2500 may also have an on-off switch 2696 configured to selectively apply and cut off power to the marking target illuminator 2680 .
  • the on-off switch 2696 may be operated manually, automatically, or in a partially manual and partially automatic mode. Any of the power supply, the brightness control, and the on-off switch may be implemented wirelessly in various other embodiments.
  • the marking target 2684 is a reticle, e.g., made of glass, with an annular shape formed thereon.
  • the annular shape formed on the marking target 2684 may be a substantially clear annulus surrounded by opaque regions. In this configuration, light directed toward the marking target 2684 interacts with the marking target 2684 to produce and annular image.
  • the marking target 2684 may be a substantially clear reticle with an opaque shape, such as an opaque annular shape.
  • the annular image is directed into the image routing device 2684 , as discussed further below.
  • the marking target 2684 may be housed in a fixture 2718 that is removable, e.g., when the first portion 2656 and the second portion 2660 of the housing 2642 are decoupled.
  • the first portion 2656 of the housing 2642 is configured to engage the fixture 2718 to relatively precisely position the marking target 2684 with respect to an axis of the housing 2642 .
  • FIG. 59 shows the image routing module 2512 in greater detail.
  • the image routing module 2512 is primarily useful for routing light that conveys the target and marking images to an eye of a patient.
  • the image routing module 2512 provides flexibility in the positioning of the various components of the alignment device 2404 .
  • the image routing module 2512 enables the housing 2520 and the housing 2556 to be generally in the same plane and positioned generally parallel to each other.
  • This provides a relatively compact arrangement for the alignment device 2404 , which is advantageous in the surgical setting because, as discussed above, it is desirable for the surgeon to be as close to the surgical site as possible.
  • the compact arrangement of the alignment device 2404 minimizes or at least reduces the extent to which the alignment device 2404 interferes with free movement of the surgeon and others assisting the surgeon.
  • FIGS. 58 and 59 shows that the image routing module 2512 includes a housing 2720 that is coupled with the first end 2524 and the housing 2520 and with the first end 2644 of the housing 2642 .
  • a space defined within the housing 2720 houses a first optic device 2728 and a second optic device 2732 .
  • the first optic device 2728 has a reflective surface that faces the marking target 2684 and is configured to reflect light conveying an image of the marking target 2684 toward the second optic device 2732 .
  • the first optic device 2728 may be a mirror.
  • the second optic device 2732 has a surface 2736 that faces the first optic device 2728 and is reflective to light from the first optic device 2728 .
  • the second optic device 2732 thus reflects light that is directed toward it by the first optic device 2728 .
  • the image routing module 2512 also may include a third optic device 2740 and a frame 2744 coupled with the housing 2720 .
  • the frame 2744 is configured to position and orient the third optic device 2740 with respect to the housing 2720 .
  • the third optic device 2740 is a beamsplitter and the frame 2744 holds the third optic device 2740 at about a forty-five degree angle with respect to the axis 2520 . In this position, the third optic device 2740 interacts with light reflected by the first surface 2736 of the second optic device 2732 .
  • the third optic device 2740 may operate in a manner similar to the beamsplitter 2080 of FIG. 55 .
  • the second optic device 2732 is configured to be transparent to substantially all of the light conveying an image along the axis 2536 such that the image conveyed along the axis 2536 may be directed to the third optic device 2740 and thereafter to an eye of a surgeon, as discussed about in connection with FIG. 55 .
  • the image routing device is shown with first, second, and third optic devices 2728 , 2732 , 2740 to route light conveying images in a particular manner, one skilled in the art will recognize that the image routing device 2512 could have more or fewer optic devices that route the image, depending on the desired geometry and compactness of the alignment device 2404 .
  • a variation of the alignment device 2404 provides a marking module with a secondary marking module not routed through the optics of the alignment device 2404 .
  • the secondary marking module includes a source of radiant energy, e.g., a laser or other light source.
  • the source of radiant energy is configured to direct a plurality of spots (e.g., three, four, or more than four spots) onto the patient's eye.
  • the spots indicate positions on the eye that correlate with an edge of a mask when the mask is in the correct position with respect to the line-of-sight of the eye 2064 .
  • the spots can be aligned with the projected marking target such that they hit at a selected location on the projected marking target (e.g., circumferentially spaced locations on the inner edge, on the outer edge, or on both the inner and outer edges).
  • At least a portion of the secondary marking module is coupled with the frame 2744 in one embodiment.
  • a laser of the secondary marking module could be attached to the frame 2744 and suspended therefrom, oriented downward toward the patient's eye. As discussed above, this arrangement provides a secondary device for marking the proper location of a mask with respect to a patient's line of sight after the line of sight has been identified.
  • Some of the embodiments described below include nutrient transport structures that are configured to enhance or maintain nutrient flow between adjacent tissues by facilitating transport of nutrients across the mask.
  • the nutrient transport structures of some of the embodiments described below are configured to at least substantially prevent nutrient depletion in adjacent tissues.
  • the nutrient transport structures can decrease negative effects due to the presence of the mask in adjacent corneal layers when the mask is implanted in the cornea, increasing the longevity of the masks.
  • the inventors have discovered that certain arrangements of nutrient transport structures generate diffraction patterns that interfere with the vision improving effect of the masks described herein. Accordingly, certain masks are described herein that include nutrient transport structures that do not generate diffraction patterns or otherwise interfere with the vision enhancing effects of the mask embodiments.
  • FIGS. 60-61 show one embodiment of a mask 3000 configured to increase depth of focus of an eye of a patient suffering from presbyopia.
  • the mask 3000 is similar to the masks hereinbefore described, except as set forth below.
  • the mask 3000 is configured to be applied to an eye of a patient, e.g., by being implanted in the cornea of the patient.
  • the mask 3000 may be implanted within the cornea in any suitable manner, such as those discussed above in connection with FIGS. 53A-54C .
  • the mask 3000 includes a body 3004 that has an anterior surface 3008 and a posterior surface 3012 .
  • the body 3004 is capable of substantially maintaining natural nutrient flow between the first corneal layer and the second corneal layer.
  • the material is selected to maintain at least about ninety-six percent of the natural flow of at least one nutrient (e.g., glucose) between a first corneal layer (e.g., the layer 1410 ) and a second corneal layer (e.g., the layer 1430 ).
  • the body 3004 may be formed of any suitable material, including at least one of an open cell foam material, an expanded solid material, and a substantially opaque material.
  • the material used to form the body 3004 has relatively high water content.
  • the mask 3000 includes and a nutrient transport structure 3016 .
  • the nutrient transport structure 3016 may comprise a plurality of holes 3020 .
  • the holes 3020 are shown on only a portion of the mask 3000 , but the holes 3020 preferably are located throughout the body 3004 in one embodiment.
  • the holes 3020 are arranged in a hex pattern, which is illustrated by a plurality of locations 3020 ′ in FIG. 62A . As discussed below, a plurality of locations may be defined and later used in the later formation of a plurality of holes 3020 on the mask 3000 .
  • the mask 3000 has an outer periphery 3024 that defines an outer edge of the body 3004 .
  • the mask 3000 includes an aperture 3028 at least partially surrounded by the outer periphery 3024 and a non-transmissive portion 3032 located between the outer periphery 3024 and the aperture 3028 .
  • the mask 3000 is symmetrical, e.g., symmetrical about a mask axis 3036 .
  • the outer periphery 3024 of the mask 3000 is circular and has a diameter of less than about 6 mm in one embodiment.
  • the mask is circular and has a diameter in the range of 4 to 6 mm.
  • the mask 3000 is circular and has a diameter of less than 4 mm.
  • the outer periphery 3024 has a diameter of about 3.8 mm in another embodiment.
  • masks that are asymmetrical or that are not symmetrical about a mask axis provide benefits, such as enabling a mask to be located or maintained in a selected position with respect to the anatomy of the eye.
  • the body 3004 of the mask 3000 may be configured to coupled with a particular anatomical region of the eye.
  • the body 3004 of the mask 3000 may be configured to conform to the native anatomy of the region of the eye in which it is to be applied.
  • the body 3004 may be provided with an amount of curvature along the mask axis 3036 that corresponds to the anatomical curvature.
  • one environment in which the mask 3000 may be deployed is within the cornea of the eye of a patient.
  • the cornea has an amount of curvature that varies from person to person about a substantially constant mean value within an identifiable group, e.g., adults.
  • at least one of the anterior and posterior surfaces 3008 , 3012 of the mask 3000 may be provided with an amount of curvature corresponding to that of the layers of the cornea between which the mask 3000 is applied.
  • the mask 3000 has a desired amount of optical power.
  • Optical power may be provided by configuring the at least one of the anterior and posterior surfaces 3008 , 3012 with curvature.
  • the anterior and posterior surfaces 3008 , 3012 are provided with different amounts of curvature.
  • the mask 3000 has varying thickness from the outer periphery 3024 to the aperture 3028 .
  • one of the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012 of the body 3004 is substantially planar. In one planar embodiment, very little or no uniform curvature can be measured across the planar surface. In another embodiment, both of the anterior and posterior surfaces 3008 , 3012 are substantially planar.
  • the body 3004 of the mask 3000 has a thickness 3038 of between about 5 micron and about 10 micron. In one embodiment, the thickness 3038 of the mask 3000 is about 5 micron. In another embodiment, the thickness 3038 of the mask 3000 is about 8 micron. In another embodiment, the thickness 3038 of the mask 3000 is about 10 micron.
  • Thinner masks generally are more suitable for applications wherein the mask 3000 is implanted at a relatively shallow location in (e.g., close to the anterior surface of) the cornea.
  • the body 3004 may be sufficiently flexible such that it can take on the curvature of the structures with which it is coupled without negatively affecting the optical performance of the mask 3000 .
  • the mask 3000 is configured to be implanted about 5 um beneath the anterior surface of the cornea.
  • the mask 3000 is configured to be implanted about 65 um beneath the anterior surface of the cornea.
  • the mask 3000 is configured to be implanted about 125 um beneath the anterior surface of the cornea. Further details regarding implanting the mask 3000 in the cornea are discussed above in connection with FIGS. 53A-54C .
  • a substantially planar mask has several advantages over a non-planar mask. For example, a substantially planar mask can be fabricated more easily than one that has to be formed to a particular curvature. In particular, the process steps involved in inducing curvature in the mask 3000 can be eliminated. Also, a substantially planar mask may be more amenable to use on a wider distribution of the patient population (or among different sub-groups of a broader patient population) because the substantially planar mask uses the curvature of each patient's cornea to induce the appropriate amount of curvature in the body 3004 .
  • the mask 3000 is configured specifically for the manner and location of coupling with the eye.
  • the mask 3000 may be larger if applied over the eye as a contact lens or may be smaller if applied within the eye posterior of the cornea, e.g., proximate a surface of the lens of the eye.
  • the thickness 3038 of the body 3004 of the mask 3000 may be varied based on where the mask 3000 is implanted. For implantation at deeper levels within the cornea, a thicker mask may be advantageous. Thicker masks are advantageous in some applications. For example, they are generally easier to handle, and therefore are easier to fabricate and to implant. Thicker masks may benefit more from having a preformed curvature than thinner masks. A thicker mask could be configured to have little or no curvature prior to implantation if it is configured to conform to the curvature of the native anatomy when applied.
  • the aperture 3028 is configured to transmit substantially all incident light along the mask axis 3036 .
  • the non-transmissive portion 3032 surrounds at least a portion of the aperture 3028 and substantially prevents transmission of incident light thereon.
  • the aperture 3028 may be a through-hole in the body 3004 or a substantially light transmissive (e.g., transparent) portion thereof.
  • the aperture 3028 of the mask 3000 generally is defined within the outer periphery 3024 of the mask 3000 .
  • the aperture 3028 may take any of suitable configurations, such as those described above in connection with FIGS. 6-42 .
  • the aperture 3028 is substantially circular and is substantially centered in the mask 3000 .
  • the size of the aperture 3028 may be any size that is effective to increase the depth of focus of an eye of a patient suffering from presbyopia.
  • the aperture 3028 can be circular, having a diameter of less than about 2.2 mm in one embodiment.
  • the diameter of the aperture is between about 1.8 mm and about 2.2 mm.
  • the aperture 3028 is circular and has a diameter of about 1.8 mm or less.
  • the non-transmissive portion 3032 is configured to prevent transmission of radiant energy through the mask 3000 .
  • the non-transmissive portion 3032 prevents transmission of substantially all of at least a portion of the spectrum of the incident radiant energy.
  • the non-transmissive portion 3032 is configured to prevent transmission of substantially all visible light, e.g., radiant energy in the electromagnetic spectrum that is visible to the human eye.
  • the non-transmissive portion 3032 may substantially prevent transmission of radiant energy outside the range visible to humans in some embodiments.
  • preventing transmission of light through the non-transmissive portion 3032 decreases the amount of light that reaches the retina and the fovea that would not converge at the retina and fovea to form a sharp image.
  • the size of the aperture 3028 is such that the light transmitted therethrough generally converges at the retina or fovea. Accordingly, a much sharper image is presented to the eye than would otherwise be the case without the mask 3000 .
  • the non-transmissive portion 3032 prevents transmission of about 90 percent of incident light. In another embodiment, the non-transmissive portion 3032 prevents transmission of about 92 percent of all incident light.
  • the non-transmissive portion 3032 of the mask 3000 may be configured to be opaque to prevent the transmission of light.
  • the term “opaque” is intended to be a broad term meaning capable of preventing the transmission of radiant energy, e.g., light energy, and also covers structures and arrangements that absorb or otherwise block all or less than all or at least a substantial portion of the light. In one embodiment, at least a portion of the body 3004 is configured to be opaque to more than 99 percent of the light incident thereon.
  • the non-transmissive portion 3032 may be configured to prevent transmission of light without absorbing the incident light.
  • the mask 3000 could be made reflective or could be made to interact with the light in a more complex manner, as discussed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,554,424, issued Apr. 29, 2003, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • the mask 3000 also has a nutrient transport structure that in some embodiments comprises the plurality of holes 3020 .
  • the presence of the plurality of holes 3020 may affect the transmission of light through the non-transmissive portion 3032 by potentially allowing more light to pass through the mask 3000 .
  • the non-transmissive portion 3032 is configured to absorb about 99 percent or more of the incident light from passing through the mask 3000 without holes 3020 being present.
  • the presence of the plurality of holes 3020 allows more light to pass through the non-transmissive portion 3032 such that only about 92 percent of the light incident on the non-transmissive portion 3032 is prevented from passing through the non-transmissive portion 3032 .
  • the holes 3020 may reduce the benefit of the aperture 3028 on the depth of focus of the eye by allowing more light to pass through the non-transmissive portion to the retina.
  • the transport structure 3016 (e.g., the holes 3020 ) is capable of substantially maintaining natural nutrient flow from a first corneal layer (i.e., one that is adjacent to the anterior surface 3008 of the mask 3000 ) to the second corneal layer (i.e., one that is adjacent to the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000 ).
  • the plurality of holes 3020 are configured to enable nutrients to pass through the mask 3000 between the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012 .
  • the holes 3020 of the mask 3000 shown in FIG. 60 may be located anywhere on the mask 3000 .
  • Other mask embodiments described hereinbelow locate substantially all of the nutrient transport structure in one or more regions of a mask.
  • each of the holes 3020 of FIG. 60 extends at least partially between the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000 .
  • each of the holes 3020 includes a hole entrance 3060 and a hole exit 3064 .
  • the hole entrance 3060 is located adjacent to the anterior surface 3008 of the mask 3000 .
  • the hole exit 3064 is located adjacent to the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000 .
  • each of the holes 3020 extends the entire distance between the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000 .
  • the transport structure 3016 is configured to maintain the transport of one or more nutrients across the mask 3000 .
  • the transport structure 3016 of the mask 3000 provides sufficient flow of one or more nutrients across the mask 3000 to prevent depletion of nutrients at least at one of the first and second corneal layers (e.g., the layers 1410 and 1430 ).
  • One nutrient of particular importance to the viability of the adjacent corneal layers is glucose.
  • the transport structure 3016 of the mask 3000 provides sufficient flow of glucose across the mask 3000 between the first and second corneal layers to prevent glucose depletion that would harm the adjacent corneal tissue.
  • the mask 3000 is capable of substantially maintaining nutrient flow (e.g., glucose flow) between adjacent corneal layers.
  • the nutrient transport structure 3016 is configured to prevent depletion of more than about 4 percent of glucose (or other biological substance) in adjacent tissue of at least one of the first corneal layer and the second corneal layer.
  • the holes 3020 may be configured to maintain the transport of nutrients across the mask 3000 .
  • the holes 3020 are formed with a diameter of about 0.015 mm or more.
  • the holes have a diameter of about 0.020 mm.
  • the holes have a diameter of about 0.025 mm.
  • the holes 3020 have a diameter in the range of about 0.020 mm to about 0.029 mm.
  • the number of holes in the plurality of holes 3020 is selected such that the sum of the surface areas of the hole entrances 3060 of all the holes 3000 comprises about 5 percent or more of surface area of the anterior surface 3008 of the mask 3000 .
  • the number of holes 3020 is selected such that the sum of the surface areas of the hole exits 3064 of all the holes 3020 comprises about 5 percent or more of surface area of the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000 . In another embodiment, the number of holes 3020 is selected such that the sum of the surface areas of the hole exits 3064 of all the holes 3020 comprises about 5 percent or more of surface area of the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3012 and the sum of the surface areas of the hole entrances 3060 of all the holes 3020 comprises about 5 percent or more of surface area of the anterior surface 3008 of the mask 3000 .
  • Each of the holes 3020 may have a relatively constant cross-sectional area. In one embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of each of the holes 3020 is substantially circular. Each of the holes 3020 may comprise a cylinder extending between the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012 .
  • the relative position of the holes 3020 is of interest in some embodiments.
  • the holes 3020 of the mask 3000 are hex-packed, e.g., arranged in a hex pattern.
  • each of the holes 3020 is separated from the adjacent holes 3020 by a substantially constant distance, sometimes referred to herein as a hole pitch 3072 .
  • the hole pitch 3072 is about 0.062 mm.
  • FIG. 60 advantageously enables nutrients to flow from the first corneal layer to the second corneal layer.
  • the inventors have discovered that negative visual effects can arise due to the presence of the transport structure 3016 .
  • a hex packed arrangement of the holes 3020 can generate diffraction patterns visible to the patient.
  • patients might observe a plurality of spots, e.g., six spots, surrounding a central light with holes 3020 having a hex patterned.
  • the inventors have discovered a variety of techniques that produce advantageous arrangements of a transport structure such that diffraction patterns and other deleterious visual effects do not substantially inhibit other visual benefits of a mask.
  • the nutrient transport structure is arranged to spread the diffracted light out uniformly across the image to eliminate observable spots.
  • the nutrient transport structure employs a pattern that substantially eliminates diffraction patterns or pushes the patterns to the periphery of the image.
  • FIG. 62B-62C show two embodiments of patterns of holes 4020 that may be applied to a mask that is otherwise substantially similar to the mask 3000 .
  • the holes 4020 of the hole patterns of FIGS. 62A-62B are spaced from each other by a random hole spacing or hole pitch. In other embodiments discussed below, holes are spaced from each other by a non-uniform amount, e.g., not a random amount.
  • the holes 4020 have a substantially uniform shape (cylindrical shafts having a substantially constant cross-sectional area).
  • FIG. 62C illustrates a plurality of holes 4020 separated by a random spacing, wherein the density of the holes is greater than that of FIG. 62B .
  • One way to provide a higher percentage of hole area is to increase the density of the holes. Increase hole density can also permit smaller holes to achieve the same nutrient transport as is achieved by less dense, larger holes.
  • FIG. 63A shows a portion of another mask 4000 a that is substantially similar to the mask 3000 , except as set forth below.
  • the mask 4000 a has a plurality of holes 4020 a .
  • a substantial number of the holes 4020 a have a non-uniform size.
  • the holes 4020 a may be uniform in cross-sectional shape.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the holes 4020 a is substantially circular in one embodiment.
  • the holes 4020 a may be circular in shape and have the same diameter from a hole entrance to a hole exit, but are otherwise non-uniform in at least one aspect, e.g., in size. It may be preferable to vary the size of a substantial number of the holes by a random amount.
  • the holes 4020 a are non-uniform (e.g., random) in size and are separated by a non-uniform (e.g., a random) spacing.
  • FIG. 63B illustrates another embodiment of a mask 4000 b that is substantially similar to the mask 3000 , except as set forth below.
  • the mask 4000 b includes a body 4004 b .
  • the mask 4000 b has a transport structure 4016 b that includes a plurality of holes 4020 b with a non-uniform facet orientation.
  • each of the holes 4020 b has a hole entrance 4060 b that may be located at an anterior surface 4008 b of the mask 4000 b .
  • a facet 4062 b of the hole entrance 4060 b is defined by a portion of the body 4004 b of the mask 4000 b surrounding the hole entrance 4060 b .
  • the facet 4062 b is the shape of the hole entrance 4060 b at the anterior surface 4008 b .
  • most or all the facets 4062 b have an elongate shape, e.g., an oblong shape, with a long axis and a short axis that is perpendicular to the long axis.
  • the facets 4062 b may be substantially uniform in shape.
  • the orientation of facets 4062 b is not uniform.
  • a substantial number of the facets 4062 may have a non-uniform orientation.
  • a substantial number of the facets 4062 have a random orientation.
  • the facets 4062 b are non-uniform (e.g., random) in shape and are non-uniform (e.g., random) in orientation.
  • inventions may be provided that vary at least one aspect, including one or more of the foregoing aspects, of a plurality of holes to reduce the tendency of the holes to produce visible diffraction patterns or patterns that otherwise reduce the vision improvement that may be provided by a mask with an aperture, such as any of those described above.
  • the hole size, shape, and orientation of at least a substantial number of the holes may be varied randomly or may be otherwise non-uniform.
  • FIG. 64 shows another embodiment of a mask 4200 that is substantially similar to any of the masks hereinbefore described, except as set forth below.
  • the mask 4200 includes a body 4204 .
  • the body 4204 has an outer peripheral region 4205 , an inner peripheral region 4206 , and a hole region 4207 .
  • the hole region 4207 is located between the outer peripheral region 4205 and the outer peripheral region 4206 .
  • the body 4204 may also include an aperture region, where the aperture (discussed below) is not a through hole.
  • the mask 4200 also includes a nutrient transport structure 4216 .
  • the nutrient transport structure includes a plurality of holes 4220 .
  • At least a substantial portion of the holes 4220 are located in the hole region 4207 .
  • the holes 4220 are located in the hole region 4207 .
  • the hole 4220 may be located through the hole region 4207 .
  • the outer peripheral region 4205 may extend from an outer periphery 4224 of the mask 4200 to a selected outer circumference 4226 of the mask 4200 .
  • the selected outer circumference 4225 of the mask 4200 is located a selected radial distance from the outer periphery 4224 of the mask 4200 . In one embodiment, the selected outer circumference 4225 of the mask 4200 is located about 0.05 mm from the outer periphery 4224 of the mask 4200 .
  • the inner peripheral region 4206 may extend from an inner location, e.g., an inner periphery 4226 adjacent an aperture 4228 of the mask 4200 to a selected inner circumference 4227 of the mask 4200 .
  • the selected inner circumference 4227 of the mask 4200 is located a selected radial distance from the inner periphery 4226 of the mask 4200 . In one embodiment, the selected inner circumference 4227 of the mask 4200 is located about 0.05 mm from the inner periphery 4226 .
  • the mask 4200 may be the product of a process that involves random selection of a plurality of locations and formation of holes on the mask 4200 corresponding to the locations.
  • the method can also involve determining whether the selected locations satisfy one or more criteria. For example, one criterion prohibits all, at least a majority, or at least a substantial portion of the holes from being formed at locations that correspond to the inner or outer peripheral regions 4205 , 4206 . Another criterion prohibits all, at least a majority, or at least a substantial portion of the holes 4220 from being formed too close to each other. For example, such a criterion could be used to assure that a wall thickness, e.g., the shortest distance between adjacent holes, is not less than a predetermined amount. In one embodiment, the wall thickness is prevented from being less than about 20 microns.
  • the outer peripheral region 4205 is eliminated and the hole region 4207 extends from the inner peripheral region 4206 to an outer periphery 4224 .
  • the inner peripheral region 4206 is eliminated and the hole region 4207 extends from the outer peripheral region 4205 to an inner periphery 4226 .
  • FIG. 61B shows a mask 4300 that is similar to the mask 3000 except as set forth below.
  • the mask 4300 includes a body 4304 that has an anterior surface 4308 and a posterior surface 4312 .
  • the mask 4300 also includes a nutrient transport structure 4316 that, in one embodiment, includes a plurality of holes 4320 .
  • the holes 4320 are formed in the body 4304 so that nutrient transport is provided but transmission of radiant energy (e.g., light) to the retinal locations adjacent the fovea through the holes 4304 is substantially prevented.
  • the holes 4304 are formed such that when the eye with which the mask 4300 is coupled is directed at an object to be viewed, light conveying the image of that object that enters the holes 4320 cannot exit the holes along a path ending near the fovea.
  • each of the holes 4320 has a hole entrance 4360 and a hole exit 4364 .
  • Each of the holes 4320 extends along a transport axis 4366 .
  • the transport axis 4366 is formed to substantially prevent propagation of light from the anterior surface 4308 to the posterior surface 4312 through the holes 4320 .
  • at least a substantial number of the holes 4320 have a size to the transport axis 4366 that is less than a thickness of the mask 4300 .
  • at least a substantial number of the holes 4320 have a longest dimension of a perimeter at least at one of the anterior or posterior surfaces 4308 , 4312 (e.g., a facet) that is less than a thickness of the mask 4300 .
  • the transport axis 4366 is formed at an angle with respect to a mask axis 4336 that substantially prevents propagation of light from the anterior surface 4308 to the posterior surface 4312 through the hole 4320 .
  • the transport axis 4366 of one or more holes 4320 is formed at an angle with respect to the mask axis 4336 that is large enough to prevent the projection of most of the hole entrance 4360 from overlapping the hole exit 4364 .
  • the hole 4320 is circular in cross-section and has a diameter between about 0.5 micron and about 8 micron and the transport axis 4366 is between 5 and 85 degrees.
  • the length of each of the holes 4320 (e.g., the distance between the anterior surface 4308 and the posterior surface 4312 ) is between about 8 and about 92 micron.
  • the diameter of the holes 4320 is about 5 micron and the transport angle is about 40 degrees or more. As the length of the holes 4320 increases it may be desirable to include additional holes 4320 . In some cases, additional holes 4320 counteract the tendency of longer holes to reduce the amount of nutrient flow through the mask 4300 .
  • FIG. 61C shows another embodiment of a mask 4400 similar to the mask 3000 , except as set forth below.
  • the mask 4400 includes a body 4404 that has an anterior surface 4408 , a first mask layer 4410 adjacent the anterior surface 44008 , a posterior surface 4412 , a second mask layer 4414 adjacent the posterior surface 4412 , and a third layer 4415 located between the first mask layer 4410 and the second mask layer 4414 .
  • the mask 4400 also includes a nutrient transport structure 4416 that, in one embodiment, includes a plurality of holes 4420 .
  • the holes 4420 are formed in the body 4404 so that nutrient are transported across the mask, as discussed above, but transmission of radiant energy (e.g., light) to retinal locations adjacent the fovea through the holes 4404 is substantially prevented.
  • the holes 4404 are formed such that when the eye with which the mask 4400 is coupled is directed at an object to be viewed, light conveying the image of that object that enters the holes 4420 cannot exit the holes along a path ending near the fovea.
  • the mask 4400 includes a first hole portion 4420 a that extends along a first transport axis 4466 a
  • the second mask layer 4414 includes a second hole portion 4420 b extending along a second transport axis 4466 b
  • the third mask layer 4415 includes a third hole portion 4420 c extending along a third transport axis 4466 c .
  • the first, second, and third transport axes 4466 a , 4466 b , 4466 c preferably are not collinear.
  • first and second transport axes 4466 a , 4466 b are parallel but are off-set by a first selected amount. In one embodiment, the second and third transport axes 4466 b , 4466 c are parallel but are off-set by a second selected amount. In the illustrated embodiment, each of the transport axes 44466 a , 4466 b , 4466 c are off-set by one-half of the width of the hole portions 4420 a , 4420 b , 4420 c .
  • the inner-most edge of the hole portion 4420 a is spaced from the axis 4336 by a distance that is equal to or greater than the distance of the outer-most edge of the hole portion 4420 b from the axis 4336 . This spacing substantially prevents light from passing through the holes 4420 from the anterior surface 4408 to the posterior surface 4412 .
  • the first and second amounts are selected to substantially prevent the transmission of light therethrough.
  • the first and second amounts of off-set may be achieved in any suitable fashion.
  • One technique for forming the hole portions 4420 a , 4420 b , 4420 c with the desired off-set is to provide a layered structure.
  • the mask 4400 may include the first layer 4410 , the second layer 4414 , and the third layer 4415 .
  • FIG. 61C shows that the mask 4400 can be formed with three layers.
  • the mask 4400 is formed of more than three layers. Providing more layers may advantageously further decrease the tendency of light to be transmitted through the holes 4420 onto the retina.
  • the body of the mask may be formed of a material selected to provide adequate nutrient transport and to substantially prevent negative optic effects, such as diffraction, as discussed above.
  • the masks are formed of an open cell foam material. In another embodiment, the masks are formed of an expanded solid material.
  • various random patterns of holes may advantageously be provided for nutrient transport. In some embodiment, it may be sufficient to provide regular patterns that are non-uniform in some aspect. Non-uniform aspects to the holes may be provided by any suitable technique.
  • a plurality of locations 4020 ′ is generated.
  • the locations 4020 ′ are a series of coordinates that may comprise a non-uniform pattern or a regular pattern.
  • the locations 4020 ′ may be randomly generated or may be related by a mathematical relationship (e.g., separated by a fixed spacing or by an amount that can be mathematically defined).
  • the locations are selected to be separated by a constant pitch or spacing and may be hex packed.
  • a subset of the locations among the plurality of locations 4020 ′ is modified to maintain a performance characteristic of the mask.
  • the performance characteristic may be any performance characteristic of the mask.
  • the performance characteristic may relate to the structural integrity of the mask.
  • the subset of locations may be moved with respect to their initial positions as selected in the first step.
  • each of the locations in the subset of locations is moved by an amount equal to a fraction of the hole spacing.
  • each of the locations in the subset of locations may be moved by an amount equal to one-quarter of the hole spacing.
  • the locations that are moved preferably are randomly or pseudo-randomly selected.
  • the subset of location is moved by a random or a pseudo-random amount.
  • an outer peripheral region is defined that extends between the outer periphery of the mask and a selected radial distance of about 0.05 mm from the outer periphery.
  • an inner peripheral region is defined that extends between an aperture of the mask and a selected radial distance of about 0.05 mm from the aperture.
  • an outer peripheral region is defined that extends between the outer periphery of the mask and a selected radial distance and an inner peripheral region is defined that extends between the aperture of the mask and a selected radial distance from the aperture.
  • the subset of location is modified by excluding those locations that would correspond to holes formed in the inner peripheral region or the outer peripheral region.
  • the strength of the mask in these regions is increased.
  • the mask may be easier to handle during manufacturing or when being applied to a patient without causing damage to the mask.
  • the subset of locations is modified by comparing the separation of the holes with minimum and or maximum limits. For example, it may be desirable to assure that no two locations are closer than a minimum value. In some embodiments this is important to assure that the wall thickness, which corresponds to the separation between adjacent holes, is no less than a minimum amount. As discussed above, the minimum value of separation is about 20 microns in one embodiment, thereby providing a wall thickness of no less than about 20 microns.
  • the subset of locations is modified and/or the pattern of location is augmented to maintain an optical characteristic of the mask.
  • the optical characteristic may be opacity and the subset of locations may be modified to maintain the opacity of a non-transmissive portion of a mask.
  • the subset of locations may be modified by equalizing the density of holes in a first region of the body compared with the density of holes in a second region of the body.
  • the locations corresponding to the first and second regions of the non-transmissive portion of the mask may be identified.
  • the first region and the second region are arcuate regions (e.g., wedges) of substantially equal area.
  • a first areal density of locations (e.g., locations per square inch) is calculated for the locations corresponding to the first region and a second areal density of locations is calculated for the locations corresponding to the second region.
  • at least one location is added to either the first or the second region based on the comparison of the first and second areal densities.
  • at least one location is removed based on the comparison of the first and second areal densities.
  • the subset of locations may be modified to maintain nutrient transport of the mask.
  • the subset of location is modified to maintain glucose transport.
  • a hole is formed in a body of a mask at locations corresponding to the pattern of locations as modified, augmented, or modified and augmented.
  • the holes are configured to substantially maintain natural nutrient flow from the first layer to the second layer without producing visible diffraction patterns.
  • the surgical system 2000 of FIG. 55 employs a marking module 2024 that provides a visual cue in the form of a projected image for a surgeon during a procedure for applying a mask.
  • some techniques for treating a patient involve positioning an implant with the aid of a marked reference point. These methods are illustrated by FIGS. 65-66B .
  • a patient is treated by placing an implant 5000 in a cornea 5004 .
  • a corneal flap 5008 is lifted to expose a surface in the cornea 5004 (e.g., an intracorneal surface).
  • Any suitable tool or technique may be used to lift the corneal flap 5008 to expose a surface in the cornea 5004 .
  • a blade e.g., a microkeratome
  • a laser or an electrosurgical tool could be used to form a corneal flap.
  • a reference point 5012 on the cornea 5004 is identified. The reference point 5012 thereafter is marked in one technique, as discussed further below.
  • the implant 5000 is positioned on the intracorneal surface.
  • the flap 5008 is then closed to cover at least a portion of the implant 5000 .
  • the surface of the cornea that is exposed is a stromal surface in one technique.
  • the stromal surface may be on the corneal flap 5008 or on an exposed surface from which the corneal flap 5008 is removed.
  • the reference point 5012 may be identified in any suitable manner.
  • the alignment devices and methods described above may be used to identify the reference point 5012 .
  • identifying the reference point 5012 involves illuminating a light spot (e.g., a spot of light formed by all or a discrete portion of radiant energy corresponding to visible light, e.g., red light).
  • the identifying of a reference point may further include placing liquid (e.g., a fluorescein dye or other dye) on the intracorneal surface.
  • identifying the reference point 5012 involves alignment using any of the techniques described herein.
  • the reference point is marked by applying a dye to the cornea or otherwise spreading a material with known reflective properties onto the cornea.
  • the dye may be a substance that interacts with radiant energy to increase the visibility of a marking target or other visual cue.
  • the reference point may be marked by a dye with any suitable tool.
  • the tool is configured so that it bites into a corneal layer, e.g., an anterior layer of the epithelium, and delivers a thin ink line into the corneal layer in one embodiment.
  • the tool may be made sharp to bite into the epithelium.
  • the tool is configured to deliver the dye as discussed above upon being lightly pressed against the eye.
  • the reference point may be marked by making an impression (e.g., a physical depression) on a surface of the cornea with or without additional delivery of a dye.
  • the reference point may be marked by illuminating a light or other source of radiant energy, e.g., a marking target illuminator and projecting that light onto the cornea (e.g., by projecting a marking target).
  • any of the foregoing techniques for marking a reference point may be combined with techniques that make a mark that indicates the location of an axis of the eye, e.g., the visual axis or line-of-sight of the eye.
  • a mark indicates the approximate intersection of the visual axis and a surface of the cornea.
  • a mark is made approximately radially symmetrically disposed about the intersection of the visual axis and a surface of the cornea.
  • some techniques involve making a mark on an intracorneal surface.
  • the mark may be made by any suitable technique.
  • a mark is made by pressing an implement against the instracorneal surface.
  • the implement may form a depression that has a size and shape that facilitate placement of a mask.
  • the implement is configured to form a circular ring (e.g., a thin line of dye, or a physical depression, or both) with a diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of a mask to be implanted.
  • the circular ring can be formed to have a diameter between about 4 mm and about 5 mm.
  • the intracorneal surface is on the corneal flap 5008 in one technique.
  • the intracorneal surface is on an exposed surface of the cornea from which the flap was removed. This exposed surface is sometimes referred to as a tissue bed.
  • the corneal flap 5008 is lifted and thereafter is laid on an adjacent surface 5016 of the cornea 5004 .
  • the corneal flap 5008 is laid on a removable support 5020 , such as a sponge.
  • the removable support has a surface 5024 that is configured to maintain the native curvature of the corneal flap 5008 .
  • FIG. 65 shows that the marked reference point 5012 is helpful in positioning an implant on an intracorneal surface.
  • the marked reference point 5012 enables the implant to be positioned with respect to the visual axis of the eye.
  • the implant 5000 is positioned so that a centerline of the implant, indicated as M CL , extends through the marked reference point 5012 .
  • FIG. 65A illustrates another technique wherein a reference 5012 ′ is a ring or other two dimensional mark.
  • the implant 5000 may be placed so that an outer edge of the implant and the ring correspond, e.g., such that the ring and the implant 5000 share the same or substantially the same center.
  • the ring and the implant 5000 are aligned so that the centerline of the implant M CL is on the line of sight of the eye, as discussed above.
  • the ring is shown in dashed lines because in the illustrated technique, it is formed on the anterior surface of the corneal flap 5008 .
  • the corneal flap 5008 is closed by returning the corneal flap 5008 to the cornea 5004 with the implant 5000 on the corneal flap 5008 .
  • the corneal flap 5008 is closed by returning the corneal flap 5008 to the cornea 5004 over the implant 5000 , which previously was placed on the tissue bed (the exposed intracorneal surface).
  • the implant 5000 When the intracorneal surface is a stromal surface, the implant 5000 is placed on the stromal surface. At least a portion of the implant 5000 is covered. In some techniques, the implant 5000 is covered by returning a flap with the implant 5000 thereon to the cornea 5004 to cover the stromal surface. In one technique, the stromal surface is exposed by lifting an epithelial layer to expose stroma. In another technique, the stromal surface is exposed by removing an epithelial layer to expose stroma. In some techniques, an additional step of replacing the epithelial layer to at least partially cover the implant 5000 is performed.
  • the implant 5000 may be repositioned to some extent in some applications.
  • pressure is applied to the implant 5000 to move the implant into alignment with the reference point 5012 .
  • the pressure may be applied to the anterior surface of the cornea 5004 proximate an edge of the implant 5000 (e.g., directly above, above and outside a projection of the outer periphery of the implant 5000 , or above and inside a projection of the outer periphery of the implant 5000 ). This may cause the implant to move slightly away from the edge proximate which pressure is applied.
  • pressure is applied directly to the implant.
  • the implant 5000 may be repositioned in this manner if the reference point 5012 was marked on the flap 5008 or if the reference point 5012 was marked on the tissue bed.
  • FIG. 66 shows that a patient may also be treated by a method that positions an implant 5100 in a cornea 5104 , e.g., in a corneal pocket 5108 .
  • Any suitable tool or technique may be used to create or form the corneal pocket 5108 .
  • a blade e.g., a microkeratome
  • a laser e.g., a laser
  • an electrosurgical tool could be used to create or form a pocket in the cornea 5104 .
  • a reference point 5112 is identified on the cornea 5104 .
  • the reference point may be identified by any suitable technique, such as those discussed herein.
  • the reference point 5112 is marked by any suitable technique, such as those discussed herein.
  • the corneal pocket 5108 is created to expose an intracorneal surface 5116 .
  • the corneal pocket 5108 may be created at any suitable depth, for example at a depth within a range of from about 50 microns to about 300 microns from the anterior surface of the cornea 5104 .
  • the implant 5100 is positioned on the intracorneal surface 5116 .
  • the marked reference point 5112 is helpful in positioning the implant 5100 on the intracorneal surface 5116 .
  • the marked reference point 5112 enables the implant 5100 to be positioned with respect to the visual axis of the eye, as discussed above.
  • the implant 5100 is positioned so that a centerline M CL of the implant 5100 extends through or adjacent to the marked reference point 5112 .
  • FIG. 66A illustrates another technique wherein a reference 5112 ′ is a ring or other two dimensional mark.
  • the implant 5100 may be placed so that an outer edge of the implant and the ring correspond, e.g., such that the ring and the implant 5100 share the same or substantially the same center.
  • the ring and the implant 5100 are aligned so that the centerline of the implant M CL is on the line of sight of the eye, as discussed above.
  • the ring is shown in solid lines because in the illustrated embodiment, it is formed on the anterior surface of the cornea 5104 above the pocket 5108 .
  • the implant 5100 may be repositioned to some extent in some applications.
  • pressure is applied to the implant 5100 to move the implant into alignment with the reference point 5112 .
  • the pressure may be applied to the anterior surface of the cornea 5104 proximate an edge of the implant 5100 (e.g., directly above, above and outside a projection of the outer periphery of the implant 5100 , or above and inside a projection of the outer periphery of the implant 5100 ). This may cause the implant 5100 to move slightly away from the edge at which pressure is applied.
  • pressure is applied directly to the implant 5100 .

Abstract

A mask configured to be implanted in a cornea of a patient to increase the depth of focus of the patient includes an anterior surface, a posterior surface, and a plurality of holes. The anterior surface is configured to reside adjacent a first corneal layer. The posterior surface is configured to reside adjacent a second corneal layer. The plurality of holes extends at least partially between the anterior surface and the posterior surface. The holes of the plurality of holes are configured to substantially eliminate visible diffraction patterns.

Description

    RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 10/854,033, filed May 26, 2004, which claims priority under 35 U.S.C. §119(e) to U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/473,824, filed on May 28, 2003 and to U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/479,129, filed on Jun. 17, 2003, all of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • 1. Field of the Invention
  • This application is directed to masks for improving the depth of focus of an eye of a human patient and methods and apparatuses for applying such masks. More particularly, this application is directed to apparatuses and methods for aligning a mask with the line of sight of an eye and applying the mask to the eye.
  • 2. Description of the Related Art
  • Presbyopia, or the inability to clearly see objects up close is a common condition that afflicts many adults over the age of 40. Presbyopia diminishes the ability to see or read up close. Near objects appear blurry and out of focus. Presbyopia may be caused by defects in the focusing elements of the eye or the inability (due to aging) of the ciliary muscles to contract and relax and thereby control the shape of the lens in the eye.
  • The human eye functions by receiving light rays from an object and bending, refracting, and focusing those rays. The primary focusing elements of the human eye are the lens (also referred to as the intraocular lens) and the cornea. Light rays from an object are bent by the cornea, which is located in the anterior part of the eye. The light rays subsequently pass through the intraocular lens and are focused thereby onto the retina, which is the primary light receiving element of the eye. From the retina, the light rays are converted to electrical impulses, which are then transmitted by the optic nerves to the brain.
  • Ideally, the cornea and lens bend and focus the light rays in such a way that they converge at a single point on the retina. Convergence of the light rays on the retina produces a focused image. However, if the cornea or the lens are not functioning properly, or are irregularly shaped, the images may not converge at a single point on the retina. Similarly, the image may not converge at a single point on the retina if the muscles in the eye can no longer adequately control the lens. This condition is sometimes described as loss of accommodation. In presbyopic patients, for example, the light rays often converge at a point behind the retina. To the patient, the resulting image is out of focus and appears blurry.
  • Traditionally, vision improvement has been achieved by prescribing eye glasses or contact lenses to the patient. Eye glasses and contact lenses are shaped and curved to help bend light rays and improve focusing of the light rays onto the retina of the patient. However, some vision deficiencies, such as presbyopia, are not adequately addressed by these approaches.
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • In one embodiment, a mask configured to be implanted in a cornea of a patient to increase the depth of focus of the patient includes an anterior surface, a posterior surface, and a plurality of holes. The anterior surface is configured to reside adjacent a first corneal layer. The posterior surface is configured to reside adjacent a second corneal layer. The plurality of holes extends at least partially between the anterior surface and the posterior surface. The plurality of holes is configured to substantially eliminate visible diffraction patterns.
  • In another embodiment, a mask configured to be implanted in a cornea of a patient to increase the depth of focus of the patient is provided. The mask includes a body that has an anterior surface configured to reside adjacent a first corneal layer and a posterior surface configured to reside adjacent a second corneal layer. The body is formed of a substantially opaque material that has a relatively high water content. The body is capable of substantially maintaining natural nutrient flow from the first corneal layer to the second corneal layer. The body being is configured to substantially eliminate diffraction patterns that are visible to the patient.
  • In another embodiment, a method of making a mask is provided. A body is configured to have an anterior surface capable of residing adjacent a first layer of a cornea of a patient and a posterior surface capable of residing adjacent a second layer of the cornea. A peripheral portion of the body is configured to be substantially opaque to incident light. A central portion of the body is configured to be transparent along an optic axis to substantially all of the incident light. The body is configured with a transport structure capable of substantially maintaining natural nutrient flow from the first layer to the second layer without producing visible diffraction patterns.
  • In another embodiment, a method of making a mask is provided. A body that has an anterior surface, a posterior surface, an outer periphery, and an inner periphery is provided. The anterior surface is configured to reside adjacent a first layer of a cornea of a patient. The posterior surface is configured to reside adjacent a second layer of the cornea. A plurality of non-uniform locations for forming a plurality of holes between the anterior surface and the posterior surface is generated. A subset of locations among the plurality of locations is modified to maintain a performance characteristic of the mask. A hole is formed in the body at locations corresponding to the subset of locations. The holes are configured to substantially maintain natural nutrient flow from the first layer to the second layer without producing visible diffraction patterns.
  • In one embodiment, a method is provided for increasing the depth of focus of an eye of a patient. The eye has a visual axis. The visual axis of the eye is aligned with an instrument axis of an ophthalmic instrument. The ophthalmic instrument has an aperture through which the patient may look along the instrument axis. A first reference target is imaged on the instrument axis at a first distance with respect to the eye. A second reference target is imaged on the instrument axis at a second distance with respect to the eye. The second distance is greater than the first distance. Movement is provided such that the patient's eye is in a position where the images of the first and second reference targets appear to the patient's eye to be aligned. A mask comprising a pin-hole aperture having a mask axis is aligned with the instrument axis such that the mask axis and the instrument axis are substantially collinear. The mask is applied to the eye of the patient while the alignment of the mask and the instrument axis is maintained.
  • In another embodiment, a method for increasing the depth of focus of an eye of a patient is provided. The eye includes a visual axis and a cornea that has an epithelial sheet, a Bowman's membrane, and a stroma. The visual axis of the eye is located using more than one reference target. A mask that includes a pin-hole aperture having a mask axis is aligned with the visual axis of the eye. The mask is applied to the eye while maintaining the alignment of the mask axis and the visual axis.
  • In another embodiment, a method for correcting vision is provided. A LASIK procedure is performed. The eye is moved until at least two reference targets are aligned. A mask is applied to the eye.
  • In another embodiment, an apparatus for aligning a mask with a visual axis of an eye of a patient includes an optics housing, a first target, a second target, a lens, and a light source. The optics housing defines an aperture at a first location into which the eye may be directed and an instrument axis. The first target is coupled with the optics housing and is positioned on the instrument axis at a first distance relative to the first location. The second target is coupled with the optics housing and is positioned on the instrument axis at a second distance relative to the first location. The lens is coupled with the optics housing. The second distance is equal to the focal length of the lens. The light source is off-set from the instrument axis and is configured to indicate the location of the visual axis of the eye.
  • In another embodiment, an apparatus for aligning a mask with a visual axis of an eye of a patient includes a fixture for locating the eye at a first location. The apparatus for aligning also includes a first target, a second target, and a marker. The first target is positioned on an instrument axis at a first distance relative to the first location. The second target is positioned on the instrument axis at a second distance relative to the first location. The marker is configured to indicate the location of the instrument axis.
  • In another embodiment, a method of treating a patient is provided. A reference point on a cornea is identified. The reference point is marked. A corneal flap is lifted to expose an intracorneal surface. An implant is positioned on the intracorneal surface. The flap is closed to cover at least a portion of the implant.
  • In another embodiment, a method of treating a patient is provided. A reference point on a cornea is identified. The reference point is marked. A corneal pocket is created to expose an intracorneal surface. An implant is positioned on the intracorneal surface.
  • In another embodiment, a method of treating a patient is provided. A reference point on a cornea is identified. The reference point is marked. A stromal surface is exposed. An implant is positioned on the stromal surface. At least a portion of the implant is covered.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 is a plan view of the human eye.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional side view of the human eye.
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional side view of the human eye of a presbyopic patient wherein the light rays converge at a point behind the retina of the eye.
  • FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional side view of a presbyopic eye implanted with one embodiment of a mask wherein the light rays converge at a point on the retina.
  • FIG. 5 is a plan view of the human eye with a mask applied thereto.
  • FIG. 6 is a perspective view of one embodiment of a mask.
  • FIG. 7 is a plan frontal view of an embodiment of a mask with a hexagon-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 8 is a plan frontal view of an embodiment of a mask with an octagon-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 9 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with an oval-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 10 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a pointed oval-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 11 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a star-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 12 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a teardrop-shaped pinhole like aperture spaced above the true center of the mask.
  • FIG. 13 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a teardrop-shaped pinhole like aperture centered within the mask.
  • FIG. 14 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a teardrop-shaped pinhole like aperture spaced below the true center of the mask.
  • FIG. 15 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask embodying with a square-shaped pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 16 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a kidney-shaped oval pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 17 is a side view of an embodiment of a convex mask.
  • FIG. 18 is a side view of an embodiment of a concave mask.
  • FIG. 19 is a side view of an embodiment of a mask with a gel to provide opacity to the lens.
  • FIG. 20 is frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask with a weave of polymeric fibers.
  • FIG. 21 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 20.
  • FIG. 22 is a front plan view of an embodiment of a mask having regions of varying opacity.
  • FIG. 23 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 22.
  • FIG. 24 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a centrally located pinhole like aperture and radially extending slots emanating from the center to the periphery of the mask.
  • FIG. 25 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 24.
  • FIG. 26 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a central pinhole like aperture, surrounded by a plurality of holes radially spaced from the pinhole like aperture and slots extending radially spaced from the holes and extending to the periphery of the mask.
  • FIG. 27 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 26.
  • FIG. 28 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a central pinhole like aperture, a region that includes a plurality of holes radially spaced from the aperture, and a region that includes rectangular slots spaced radially from the holes.
  • FIG. 29 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 28.
  • FIG. 30 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a non-circular pinhole like aperture, a first set of slots radially spaced from the aperture, and a region that includes a second set of slots extending to the periphery of the mask and radially spaced from the first set of slots.
  • FIG. 31 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 30.
  • FIG. 32 is a frontal plan view of an embodiment of a mask that includes a central pinhole like aperture and a plurality of holes radially spaced from the aperture.
  • FIG. 33 is a side view of the mask of FIG. 32.
  • FIG. 34 is an embodiment of a mask that includes two semi-circular mask portions.
  • FIG. 35 is an embodiment of a mask that includes a half-moon shaped region and a centrally-located pinhole like aperture.
  • FIG. 36 is an embodiment of a mask including two half-moon shaped portions.
  • FIG. 37 is a enlarged, diagrammatic view of an embodiment of a mask that includes particulate structure adapted for selectively controlling light transmission through the mask in a high light environment.
  • FIG. 38 is a view of the mask of FIG. 37 in a low light environment.
  • FIG. 39 is an embodiment of a mask that includes a barcode formed on the annular region of the mask.
  • FIG. 40 is another an embodiment of a mask that includes connectors for securing the mask within the eye.
  • FIG. 41 is a plan view of an embodiment of a mask made of a spiraled fibrous strand.
  • FIG. 42 is a plan view of the mask of FIG. 41 being removed from the eye.
  • FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view similar to that of FIG. 1, but showing certain axes of the eye.
  • FIG. 44A illustrates a single-target fixation method for aligning an eye with the optical axis of an ophthalmic instrument.
  • FIG. 44B illustrates another single-target fixation method for aligning an eye with the optical axis of an ophthalmic instrument.
  • FIG. 45A shows an apparatus for projecting a target onto an optical axis at an infinite distance.
  • FIG. 45B shows an apparatus for projecting a target onto an optical axis at a finite distance.
  • FIG. 46 illustrates a dual-target fixation method.
  • FIG. 47 shows an apparatus with which two targets can be projected simultaneously by the same projection lens to provide fixation targets at a large distance (such as infinity) and a shorter (finite) distance.
  • FIG. 48 shows another embodiment of an apparatus for combining two targets to project them simultaneously at different axial distances.
  • FIG. 49A shows an example of a dual target pattern as viewed by the patient when the target patterns are aligned.
  • FIG. 49B shows the dual target pattern of FIG. 49A when the patterns are offset.
  • FIG. 50A shows an example of another dual target pattern as viewed by the patient when the target patterns are aligned.
  • FIG. 50B shows the dual target pattern of FIG. 50A when the target patterns are offset.
  • FIG. 51 shows one embodiment of an apparatus configured to locate the visual axis of an eye of a patient by aligning the axis with an axis of the apparatus.
  • FIG. 52 is a flow chart illustrating one method of screening a patient for the use of a mask.
  • FIG. 53A-53C show a mask, similar to those described herein, inserted beneath an epithelium sheet of a cornea.
  • FIG. 54A-54C show a mask, similar to those described herein, inserted beneath an Bowman's membrane of a cornea.
  • FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram of one embodiment of a surgical system configured located the visual axis of a patient's eye by aligning the visual axis with an axis of the system.
  • FIG. 55A is a perspective view of another embodiment of a dual target fixation target.
  • FIG. 55B is a top view of the fixation target of FIG. 55A showing the first target.
  • FIG. 55C is a top view of the fixation target of FIG. 55A showing the second target.
  • FIG. 56 is a top view of another embodiment of a surgical system that includes an alignment device and a clamp configured to couple the alignment device with a surgical viewing device.
  • FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the alignment device shown in FIG. 56.
  • FIG. 58 is a top view of the alignment device shown in FIG. 57.
  • FIG. 59 is a schematic view of internal components of the alignment device of FIG. 57.
  • FIG. 60 is a top view of another embodiment of a mask configured to increase depth of focus.
  • FIG. 60A is an enlarged view of a portion of the view of FIG. 60.
  • FIG. 61A is a cross-sectional view of the mask of FIG. 60A taken along the section plane 6161.
  • FIG. 61B is a cross-sectional view similar to FIG. 61A of another embodiment of a mask.
  • FIG. 61C is a cross-sectional view similar to FIG. 61C of another embodiment of a mask.
  • FIG. 62A is a graphical representation of one arrangement of holes of a plurality of holes that may be formed on the mask of FIG. 60.
  • FIG. 62B is a graphical representation of another arrangement of holes of a plurality of holes that may be formed on the mask of FIG. 60.
  • FIG. 62C is a graphical representation of another arrangement of holes of a plurality of holes that may be formed on the mask of FIG. 60.
  • FIG. 63A is an enlarged view similar to that of FIG. 60A showing a variation of a mask having non-uniform size.
  • FIG. 63B is an enlarged view similar to that of FIG. 60A showing a variation of a mask having a non-uniform facet orientation.
  • FIG. 64 is a top view of another embodiment of a mask having a hole region and a peripheral region.
  • FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of an eye illustrating a treatment of a patient wherein a flap is opened to place an implant and a location is marked for placement of the implant.
  • FIG. 65A is a partial plan view of the eye of FIG. 65 wherein an implant has been applied to a corneal flap and positioned with respect to a ring.
  • FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view of an eye illustrating a treatment of a patient wherein a pocket is created to place an implant and a location is marked for placement of the implant.
  • FIG. 66A is a partial plan view of the eye of FIG. 66 wherein an implant has been positioned in a pocket and positioned with respect to a ring.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT
  • This application is directed to masks for improving the depth of focus of an eye of a patient and methods and apparatuses for applying such masks. The masks generally employ pin-hole vision correction and have nutrient transport structures. The masks may be applied to the eye in any manner and in any location, e.g., as an implant in the cornea (sometimes referred to as a “corneal inlay”). The masks can also be embodied in or combined with lenses and applied in other regions of the eye, e.g., as or in combination with a contact lenses or an intraocular lenses. Apparatuses and methods for applying the masks to the patient generally use the patient's vision to locate the patient's line of sight while the mask is being applied to the eye so that the mask may be properly aligned with the line of sight.
  • I. Overview of Pin-Hole Vision Correction
  • A mask that has a pinhole aperture may be used to improve the depth of focus of a human eye. As discussed above, presbyopia is a problem of the human eye that commonly occurs in older human adults wherein the ability to focus becomes limited to inadequate range. FIGS. 1-6 illustrate how presbyopia interferes with the normal function of the eye and how a mask with a pinhole aperture mitigates the problem.
  • FIG. 1 shows the human eye, and FIG. 2 is a side view of the eye 10. The eye 10 includes a cornea 12 and an intraocular lens 14 posterior to the cornea 12. The cornea 12 is a first focusing element of the eye 10. The intraocular lens 14 is a second focusing element of the eye 10. The eye 10 also includes a retina 16, which lines the interior of the rear surface of the eye 10. The retina 16 includes the receptor cells which are primarily responsible for the sense of vision. The retina 16 includes a highly sensitive region, known as the macula, where signals are received and transmitted to the visual centers of the brain via the optic nerve 18. The retina 16 also includes a point with particularly high sensitivity 20, known as the fovea. As discussed in more detail in connection with FIG. 8, the fovea 20 is slightly offset from the axis of symmetry of the eye 10.
  • The eye 10 also includes a ring of pigmented tissue known as the iris 22. The iris 22 includes smooth muscle for controlling and regulating the size of an opening 24 in the iris 22, which is known as the pupil. An entrance pupil 26 is seen as the image of the iris 22 viewed through the cornea 12 (See FIG. 7). A central point of the entrance pupil 28 is illustrated in FIG. 7 and will be discussed further below.
  • The eye 10 resides in an eye-socket in the skull and is able to rotate therein about a center of rotation 30.
  • FIG. 3 shows the transmission of light through the eye 10 of a presbyotic patient. Due to either an aberration in the cornea 12 or the intraocular lens 14, or loss of muscle control, light rays 32 entering the eye 10 and passing through the cornea 12 and the intraocular lens 14 are refracted in such a way that the light rays 32 do not converge at a single focal point on the retina 16. FIG. 3 illustrates that in a presbyotic patient, the light rays 32 often converge at a point behind the retina 16. As a result, the patient experiences blurred vision.
  • Turning now to FIG. 4, there is shown the light transmission through the eye 10 to which a mask 34 has been applied. The mask 34 is shown implanted in the cornea 12 in FIG. 4. However, as discussed below, it will be understood that the mask 34 can be, in various modes of application, implanted in the cornea 12 (as shown), used as a contact lens placed over the cornea 12, incorporated in the intraocular lens 14 (including the patient's original lens or an implanted lens), or otherwise positioned on or in the eye 10. In the illustrated embodiment, the light rays 32 that pass through the mask 34, the cornea 12, and the lens 14 converge at a single focal point on the retina 16. The light rays 32 that would not converge at the single point on retina 16 are blocked by the mask 34. As discussed below, it is desirable to position the mask 34 on the eye 10 so that the light rays 32 that pass through the mask 34 converge at the fovea 20.
  • Turning now to FIG. 6, there is shown one embodiment of the mask 34. As seen, the mask 34 preferably includes an annular region 36 surrounding a pinhole opening or aperture 38 substantially centrally located on the mask 34. The pinhole aperture 38 is generally located around a central axis 39, referred to herein as the optical axis of the mask 34. The pinhole aperture 38 preferably is in the shape of a circle. It has been reported that a circular aperture, such as the aperture 38 may, in some patients, produce a so-called “halo effect” where the patient perceives a shimmering image around the object being viewed. Accordingly, it may be desirable to provide an aperture 38 in a shape that diminishes, reduces, or completely eliminates the so-called “halo effect.”
  • II. Masks Employing Pin-Hole Correction
  • FIGS. 7-42 illustrate a variety of embodiments of masks that can improve the vision of a patient with presbyopia. The masks described in connection with FIG. 7-42 are similar to the mask 34, except as set forth below. Accordingly, the masks described in connection with FIGS. 7-42 can be used and applied to the eye 10 of a patient in a similar fashion to the mask 34. For example, FIG. 7 shows an embodiment of a mask 34 a that includes an aperture 38 a formed in the shape of a hexagon. FIG. 8 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 b that includes an aperture 38 b formed in the shape of an octagon. FIG. 9 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 c that includes an aperture 38 c formed in the shape of an oval, while FIG. 10 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 d that includes an aperture 38 d formed in the shape of a pointed oval. FIG. 11 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 e wherein the aperture 38 e is formed in the shape of a star or starburst.
  • FIGS. 12-14 illustrate further embodiments that have tear-drop shaped apertures. FIG. 12 shows a mask 34 f that has a tear-drop shaped aperture 38 f that is located above the true center of the mask 34 f. FIG. 13 shows a mask 34 g that has a tear-drop shaped aperture 38 g that is substantially centered in the mask 34 g. FIG. 14 shows a mask 34 h that has a tear-drop shaped aperture 38 h that is below the true center of the mask 34 h. FIG. 12-14 illustrate that the position of aperture can be tailored, e.g., centered or off-center, to provide different effects. For example, an aperture that is located below the true center of a mask generally will allow more light to enter the eye because the upper portion of the aperture 34 will not be covered by the eyelid of the patient. Conversely, where the aperture is located above the true center of the mask, the aperture may be partially covered by the eyelid. Thus, the above-center aperture may permit less light to enter the eye.
  • FIG. 15 shows an embodiment of a mask 34 i that includes an aperture 38 i formed in the shape of a square. FIG. 16 shows an embodiment of a mask 34 j that has a kidney-shaped aperture 38 j. It will be appreciated that the apertures shown in FIGS. 7-16 are merely exemplary of non-circular apertures. Other shapes and arrangements may also be provided and are within the scope of the present invention.
  • The mask 34 preferably has a constant thickness, as discussed below. However, in some embodiments, the thickness of the mask may vary between the inner periphery (near the aperture 38) and the outer periphery. FIG. 17 shows a mask 34 k that has a convex profile, i.e., that has a gradually decreasing thickness from the inner periphery to the outer periphery. FIG. 18 shows a mask 34 l that has a concave profile, i.e., that has a gradually increasing thickness from the inner periphery to the outer periphery. Other cross-sectional profiles are also possible.
  • The annular region 36 is at least partially and preferably completely opaque. The opacity of the annular region 36 prevents light from being transmitted through the mask 32 (as generally shown in FIG. 4). Opacity of the annular region 36 may be achieved in any of several different ways.
  • For example, in one embodiment, the material used to make mask 34 may be naturally opaque. Alternatively, the material used to make the mask 34 may be substantially clear, but treated with a dye or other pigmentation agent to render region 36 substantially or completely opaque. In still another example, the surface of the mask 34 may be treated physically or chemically (such as by etching) to alter the refractive and transmissive properties of the mask 34 and make it less transmissive to light.
  • In still another alternative, the surface of the mask 34 may be treated with a particulate deposited thereon. For example, the surface of the mask 34 may be deposited with particulate of titanium, gold or carbon to provide opacity to the surface of the mask 34. In another alternative, the particulate may be encapsulated within the interior of the mask 34, as generally shown in FIG. 19. Finally, the mask 34 may be patterned to provide areas of varying light transmissivity, as generally shown in FIGS. 24-33, which are discussed in detail below.
  • Turning to FIG. 20, there is shown a mask 34 m formed or made of a woven fabric, such as a mesh of polyester fibers. The mesh may be a cross-hatched mesh of fibers. The mask 34 m includes an annular region 36 m surrounding an aperture 38 m. The annular region 36 m comprises a plurality of generally regularly positioned apertures 36 m in the woven fabric allow some light to pass through the mask 34 m. The amount of light transmitted can be varied and controlled by, for example, moving the fibers closer together or farther apart, as desired. Fibers more densely distributed allow less light to pass through the annular region 36 m. Alternatively, the thickness of fibers can be varied to allow more or less light through the openings of the mesh. Making the fiber strands larger results in the openings being smaller.
  • FIG. 22 shows an embodiment of a mask 34 n that includes an annular region 36 n that has sub-regions with different opacities. The opacity of the annular region 36 n may gradually and progressively increase or decrease, as desired. FIG. 22 shows one embodiment where a first area 42 closest to an aperture 38 n has an opacity of approximately 60%. In this embodiment, a second area 44, which is outlying with respect to the first area 42, has a greater opacity, such as 70%. In this embodiment, a third area 46, which is outlying with respect to the second area 42, has an opacity of between 85 to 100%. The graduated opacity of the type described above and shown in FIG. 22 is achieved in one embodiment by, for example, providing different degrees of pigmentation to the areas 42, 44 and 46 of the mask 34 n. In another embodiment, light blocking materials of the type described above in variable degrees may be selectively deposited on the surface of a mask to achieve a graduated opacity.
  • In another embodiment, the mask may be formed from co-extruded rods made of material having different light transmissive properties. The co-extruded rod may then be sliced to provide disks for a plurality of masks, such as those described herein.
  • FIGS. 24-33 shows examples of masks that have been modified to provide regions of differing opacity. For example, FIG. 24 shows a mask 34 o that includes an aperture 38 o and a plurality of cutouts 48 in the pattern of radial spokes extending from near the aperture 38 o to an outer periphery 50 of the mask 34 o. FIG. 24 shows that the cutouts 48 are much more densely distributed about a circumference of the mask near aperture 38 o than are the cutouts 48 about a circumference of the mask near the outer periphery 50. Accordingly, more light passes through the mask 34 o nearer aperture 38 o than near the periphery 50. The change in light transmission through the mask 34 o is gradual.
  • FIGS. 26-27 show another embodiment of a mask 34 p. The mask 34 p includes an aperture 38 p and a plurality of circular cutouts 52 p, and a plurality of cutouts 54 p. The circular cutouts 52 p are located proximate the aperture 38 p. The cutouts 54 p are located between the circular cutouts 52 p and the periphery 50 p. The density of the circular cutouts 52 p generally decreases from the near the aperture 38 p toward the periphery 50 p. The periphery 50 p of the mask 34 p is scalloped by the presence of the cutouts 54, which extend inward from the periphery 50 p, to allow some light to pass through the mask at the periphery 50 p.
  • FIGS. 28-29 shows another embodiment similar to that of FIGS. 26-27 wherein a mask 34 q includes a plurality of circular cutouts 52 q and a plurality of cutouts 54 q. The cutouts 54 q are disposed along the outside periphery 50 q of the mask 34 q, but not so as to provide a scalloped periphery.
  • FIGS. 30 and 31 illustrate an embodiment of a mask 34 r that includes an annular region 36 r that is patterned and an aperture 38 r that is non-circular. As shown in FIG. 30, the aperture 38 r is in the shape of a starburst. Surrounding the aperture 38 r is a series of cutouts 54 r that are more densely spaced toward the aperture 38 r. The mask 34 r includes an outer periphery 50 r that is scalloped to provide additional light transmission at the outer periphery 50 r.
  • FIGS. 32 and 33 show another embodiment of a mask 34 s that includes an annular region 36 s and an aperture 38 s. The annular region 36 s is located between an outer periphery 50 s of the mask 34 s and the aperture 38 s. The annular region 36 s is patterned. In particular, a plurality of circular openings 56 s is distributed over the annular region 36 s of the mask 34 s. It will be appreciated that the density of the openings 56 s is greater near the aperture 38 s than near the periphery 50 s of the mask 34 s. As with the examples described above, this results in a gradual increase in the opacity of the mask 34 s from aperture 38 s to periphery 50 s.
  • FIGS. 34-36 show further embodiments. In particular, FIG. 34 shows a mask 34 t that includes a first mask portion 58 t and a second mask portion 60 t. The mask portions 58 t, 60 t are generally “C-shaped.” As shown in FIG. 34, the mask portions 58 t, 60 t are implanted or inserted such that the mask portions 58 t, 60 t define a pinhole or aperture 38 t.
  • FIG. 35 shows another embodiment wherein a mask 34 u includes two mask portions 58 u, 60 u. Each mask portion 58 u, 60 u is in the shape of a half-moon and is configured to be implanted or inserted in such a way that the two halves define a central gap or opening 62 u, which permits light to pass therethrough. Although opening 62 u is not a circular pinhole, the mask portions 58 u, 60 u in combination with the eyelid (shown as dashed line 64) of the patient provide a comparable pinhole effect.
  • FIG. 36 shows another embodiment of a mask 34 v that includes an aperture 38 v and that is in the shape of a half-moon. As discussed in more detail below, the mask 34 v may be implanted or inserted into a lower portion of the cornea 12 where, as described above, the combination of the mask 34 v and the eyelid 62 provides the pinhole effect.
  • Other embodiments employ different ways of controlling the light transmissivity through a mask. For example, the mask may be a gel-filled disk, as shown in FIG. 19. The gel may be a hydrogel or collagen, or other suitable material that is biocompatible with the mask material and can be introduced into the interior of the mask. The gel within the mask may include particulate 66 suspended within the gel. Examples of suitable particulate are gold, titanium, and carbon particulate, which, as discussed above, may alternatively be deposited on the surface of the mask.
  • The material of the mask 34 may be any biocompatible polymeric material. Where a gel is used, the material is suitable for holding a gel. Examples of suitable materials for the mask 34 include the preferred polymethylmethacrylate or other suitable polymers, such as polycarbonates and the like. Of course, as indicated above, for non-gel-filled materials, a preferred material may be a fibrous material, such as a Dacron mesh.
  • The mask 34 may also be made to include a medicinal fluid, such as an antibiotic that can be selectively released after application, insertion, or implantation of the mask 34 into the eye of the patient. Release of an antibiotic after application, insertion, or implantation provides faster healing of the incision. The mask 34 may also be coated with other desired drugs or antibiotics. For example, it is known that cholesterol deposits can build up on the eye. Accordingly, the mask 34 may be provided with a releasable cholesterol deterring drug. The drug may be coated on the surface of the mask 34 or, in an alternative embodiment, incorporated into the polymeric material (such as PMMA) from which the mask 34 is formed.
  • , FIGS. 37 and 38 illustrate one embodiment where a mask 34 w comprises a plurality of nanites 68. “Nanites” are small particulate structures that have been adapted to selectively transmit or block light entering the eye of the patient. The particles may be of a very small size typical of the particles used in nanotechnology applications. The nanites 68 are suspended in the gel or otherwise inserted into the interior of the mask 34 w, as generally shown in FIGS. 37 and 38. The nanites 68 can be preprogrammed to respond to different light environments.
  • Thus, as shown in FIG. 37, in a high light environment, the nanites 68 turn and position themselves to substantially and selectively block some of the light from entering the eye. However, in a low light environment where it is desirable for more light to enter the eye, nanites may respond by turning or be otherwise positioned to allow more light to enter the eye, as shown in FIG. 38.
  • Nano-devices or nanites are crystalline structures grown in laboratories. The nanites may be treated such that they are receptive to different stimuli such as light. In accordance with one aspect of the present invention, the nanites can be imparted with energy where, in response to a low light and high light environments, they rotate in the manner described above and generally shown in FIG. 38.
  • Nanoscale devices and systems and their fabrication are described in Smith et al., “Nanofabrication,” Physics Today, February 1990, pp. 24-30 and in Craighead, “Nanoelectromechanical Systems,” Science, Nov. 24, 2000, Vol. 290, pp. 1532-1535, both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. Tailoring the properties of small-sized particles for optical applications is disclosed in Chen et al. “Diffractive Phase Elements Based on Two-Dimensional Artificial Dielectrics,” Optics Letters, Jan. 15, 1995, Vol. 20, No. 2, pp. 121-123, also incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • Masks 34 made in accordance with the present invention may be further modified to include other properties. FIG. 39 shows one embodiment of a mask 34 x that includes a bar code 70 or other printed indicia.
  • The masks described herein may be incorporated into the eye of a patient in different ways. For example, as discussed in more detail below in connection with FIG. 52, the mask 34 may be provided as a contact lens placed on the surface of the eyeball 10. Alternatively, the mask 34 may be incorporated in an artificial intraocular lens designed to replace the original lens 14 of the patient. Preferably, however, the mask 34 is provided as a corneal implant or inlay, where it is physically inserted between the layers of the cornea 12.
  • When used as a corneal implant, layers of the cornea 12 are peeled away to allow insertion of the mask 34. Typically, the optical surgeon (using a laser) cuts away and peels away a flap of the overlying corneal epithelium. The mask 34 is then inserted and the flap is placed back in its original position where, over time, it grows back and seals the eyeball. In some embodiments, the mask 34 is attached or fixed to the eye 10 by support strands 72 and 74 shown in FIG. 40 and generally described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,976,732, incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • In certain circumstances, to accommodate the mask 34, the surgeon may be required to remove additional corneal tissue. Thus, in one embodiment, the surgeon may use a laser to peel away additional layers of the cornea 12 to provide a pocket that will accommodate the mask 34. Application of the mask 34 to the cornea 12 of the eye 10 of a patient is described in greater detail in connection with FIGS. 53A-54C.
  • Removal of the mask 34 may be achieved by simply making an additional incision in the cornea 12, lifting the flap and removing the mask 34. Alternatively, ablation techniques may be used to completely remove the mask 34.
  • FIGS. 41 and 42 illustrate another embodiment, of a mask 34 y that includes a coiled strand 80 of a fibrous or other material. Strand 80 is coiled over itself to form the mask 34 y, which may therefore be described as a spiral-like mask. This arrangement provides a pinhole or aperture 38 y substantially in the center of the mask 34 y. The mask 34 y can be removed by a technician or surgeon who grasps the strand 80 with tweezers 82 through an opening made in a flap of the corneal 12. FIG. 42 shows this removal technique.
  • Further mask details are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,976,732, issued Dec. 11, 1990 and in U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/473,824, filed May 28, 2003, both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
  • III. Methods of Applying Pinhole Aperture Devices
  • The various masks discussed herein can be used to improve the vision of a presbyopic patient as well as patient's with other vision problems. The masks discussed herein can be deployed in combination with a LASIK procedure, to eliminate the effects of abrasions, aberrations, and divots in the cornea. It is also believed that the masks disclosed herein can be used to treat patients suffering from macular degeneration, e.g., by directing light rays to unaffected portions of retina, thereby improving the vision of the patient. Whatever treatment is contemplated, more precise the alignment of the central region of a mask with a pin-hole aperture with the visual axis of the patient is believed to provide greater clinical effect to the patient.
  • A. Alignment of the Pinhole Aperture with the Patient's Visual Axis
  • Alignment of the central region of the pinhole aperture 38, in particular, the optical axis 39, of the mask 34 with the visual axis of the eye 10 may be achieved in a variety of ways. As discussed more fully below, such alignment may be achieved by imaging two reference targets at different distances and effecting movement of the patient's eye to a position where the images of the first and second reference targets appear aligned as viewed by the patient's eye. When the patient views the targets as being aligned, the patient's visual axis is located.
  • FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view of the eye 10, similar to that shown in FIG. 1, indicating a first axis 1000 and a second axis 1004. The first axis 1000 represents the visual axis, or line of sight, of the patient and the second axis 1004 indicates the axis of symmetry of the eye 10. The visual axis 1000 is an axis that connects the fovea 20 and a target 1008. The visual axis 1000 also extends through the central point 28 of the entrance pupil 26. The target 1008 is sometimes referred to herein as a “fixation point.” The visual axis 1000 also corresponds to the chief ray of the bundle of rays emanating from the target 1008 that passes through the pupil 22 and reaches the fovea 20. The axis of symmetry 1004 is an axis passing through the central point 28 of the entrance pupil 26 and the center of rotation 30 of the eye 10. As described above, the cornea 12 is located at the front of the eye 10 and, along with the iris 22, admits light into the eye 10. Light entering the eye 10 is focused by the combined imaging properties of the cornea 12 and the intraocular lens 14 (see FIGS. 2-3).
  • In a normal eye, the image of the target 1008 is formed at the retina 16. The fovea 20 (the region of the retina 16 with particularly high resolution) is slightly off-set from the axis of symmetry 1004 of the eye 10. This visual axis 1000 is typically inclined at an angle θ of about six (6) degrees to the axis of symmetry 1004 of the eye 10 for an eye with a centered iris.
  • FIGS. 44A and 44B illustrate single-target fixation methods for aligning an eye with an optical axis of an instrument also referred to herein as an “instrument axis.” In FIG. 44A, the eye 10 is shown looking into an aperture of a projection lens 1012. The lens aperture is shown as the entire lens 1012. The projection lens 1012 reimages a reference target 1016 at an infinite distance, producing a collimated beam 1020.
  • The reference target 1016 in FIG. 44A is shown reimaged at an infinite distance, which is achieved by positioning the target object at a distance 1024 equal to the focal length f of the lens 1012, i.e. the reference target 1016 is at the lens focal point. To first-order approximation, the relationship between the object and the image distances for a lens of focal length f follows the Gaussian equation (1/A)=(1/f)+(1/B) where B and A are respectively the object and image distances measured from the lens center. Because the illuminated target appears at an infinite distance as viewed by the eye 10, individual light rays 1020 a to 1020 g are parallel to each other.
  • FIG. 44A shows the eye 10 fixated on the reference target 1016 along a ray 1020 c, which appears to come from the reference target 1016 as imaged by the projection lens 1012. The eye 10 is here decentered a distance 1028 from an optical axis 1032 of the instrument, i.e., the instrument axis, which may be the central axis of the lens 1012. This decentration of the eye 10 with respect to the optical axis 1032 of the instrument does not affect fixation to an infinitely distant image because all rays projected by the lens 1012 are parallel. As such, in an instrument that relies on fixation to a single target imaged at infinity, an eye can be fixated on the target but still be off-center of the optical axis of the instrument.
  • FIG. 44B is similar to FIG. 44A, except that a reference target 1016′ is located somewhat closer to the projection lens 1012 that is the reference target 1016 so that an image 1036 of the reference target 1016′ appears at a large but finite distance 1040 behind the lens 1012. As was the case in FIG. 44A, the eye 10 in FIG. 44B is fixated on the reference target 1016′ along a ray 1020 c′, which is decentered a distance 1028 from an optical axis 1032 of the instrument. However, the rays 1020 a′ to 1020 g′ projected by the lens 1012 shown in FIG. 44B are seen to diverge as if they originated at the image 1036 of the reference target 1016′, which is located on the optical axis 1032 of the lens 1012 at a finite distance 1040 from the lens 1012. If the decentration of the eye 10 (corresponding to the distance 1028) changes, the eye 10 must rotate somewhat about its center of rotation 30 in order to fixate on the image 1036. The eye 10 in FIG. 44B is shown rotated by some angle so as to align its visual axis 1000 with the direction of propagation of ray 1020 c′. Thus, in general, a decentered eye fixated on a finite-distance target is not merely off-center but is also angularly offset from the optical axis 1032 of the instrument.
  • FIG. 45A shows one embodiment of a projection lens 1012 used to create an optical image at infinite distance, as was schematically shown in FIG. 44A. The reference target 1016 typically is a back-illuminated pattern on a transparent glass reticle 1044. The reference target 1016 is located at a distance 1024 on the lens' optical axis 1032 at the lens' focal point, i.e. the reference target 1016 is located such that the distance 1024 is equal to the distance f. A diffusing plate 1048 and a condensing lens 1052 are used to ensure full illumination of the reference target 1016 throughout the aperture of the projection lens 1012. Light rays projected by the projection lens 1012 are substantially parallel depending upon the degree of imaging perfection achieved in the optical system. Assuming a well-corrected lens with small aberrations, the image as observed through the aperture of the projection lens 1012 will appear to be at infinity.
  • FIG. 45B shows a somewhat different optical system in which a target 1016′ is projected so that an image 1036 appears at a large but finite distance 1040 behind the lens 1012, as was shown schematically in FIG. 44B. The diffusing plate 1048 and the condensing lens 1052 again are used to ensure that full illumination of the target reference 112′ is achieved throughout the aperture of the projection lens 1012. In the system of FIG. 45B, the reference target 1016′ is located at an object distance 1024′, which is inside the focal point in accordance with the aforementioned Gaussian equation. Thus, the object distance 1024′ is a distance that is less than the focal length f of the lens 1012′. The path of a typical light ray 1056 from the center of the reference target 1016′ is shown. If the eye 10 is aligned with this ray 1056, the reference target 1016 is observed as if it were located at the location of the image 1036, i.e. at a finite distance. The ray 1056 would then be similar to ray 1020 c′ of FIG. 44B, and fixation of the eye 10 could be established as appropriate for the given degree of decentration from the optical axis 1032.
  • FIG. 46 illustrates a fixation method whereby the single-target fixation methods shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B are both used simultaneously in a dual-target fixation system. With two fixation targets 1016 and 1016′ at different distances, the eye 10 will see angular disparity (parallax) between the target images (i.e., they will not appear to be superimposed) if the eye is decentered. The rays 1020 a to 1020 g of the infinite-distance target 1016 are parallel to one another, while the rays 1020 a′ to 1020 g′ of the finite distance target 1016′ diverge. The only rays of the targets that coincide are rays 1020 d and 10204 d′, which are collinear along the optical axis 1032 of the instrument. Thus, the eye 10 can be simultaneously fixated on both targets if the visual axis, represented by the first axis 1000 of the eye 10, is centered on the optical axis of the instrument, i.e. along the ray 1020 d (which is the same as 1020 d′). Thus, when the visual axis of the eye 10 lies on the optical axis 1032 of the apparatus, both images are fixated.
  • FIG. 47 shows schematically an apparatus with which two reticle patterns could be projected simultaneously by the same projection lens to provide fixation targets 1016 and 1016′ at a large distance 1024 (such as infinity) and a shorter (finite) distance 1024′. It is preferable that both fixation targets are at relatively large distances so that only slight focus accommodation of the eye 10 is required to compensate for these different distances. By instructing the patient to move his or her eye transversely with respect to the instrument axis until a visual event occurs, e.g., angular displacement (parallax) between the images is minimized, alignment of the eye 10 with the optical axis 1032 of the apparatus is facilitated. Providing two fixation targets at different apparent distances will simplify accurate alignment of the sighted eye with an ophthalmic apparatus in the surgical procedures disclosed herein and in other similar surgical procedures.
  • FIG. 48 shows another embodiment of an apparatus for combining two fixation targets 1016 and 1016′ to project them simultaneously at different axial distances. A beamsplitter plate or cube 1060 is inserted between the patterns and the projection lens 1012 so each pattern can be illuminated independently. In the embodiments of FIGS. 46 and 47, the targets 1016, 1016′ can be opaque lines seen against a light background, bright lines seen against a dark background, or a combination of these forms.
  • FIG. 49A shows an example of a typical dual pattern as viewed by the patient when the patterns are aligned, i.e. when the patient's eye is aligned with the optical axis of the apparatus. The dual pattern set in this embodiment comprises an opaque fine-line cross 1064 seen against a broader bright cross 1068. FIG. 49B shows the same dual pattern set as shown in FIG. 49A, except the patterns are offset, indicating that the eye 10 is decentered with respect to the optical axis of the associated optical instrument.
  • FIG. 50A shows an example of another dual pattern as viewed by the patient when the patterns are aligned, i.e. when the patient's eye is aligned with the optical axis of the ophthalmic instrument. The dual pattern set in this embodiment comprises an opaque circle 1072 seen against a bright circle 1076. The circle 1072 has a diameter that is greater than the diameter of the circle 1076. FIG. 50B shows the same dual pattern set as shown in FIG. 50A, except the patterns are offset, indicating that the eye 10 is decentered with respect the optical axis of the associated optical instrument. It is not necessary that the targets appear as crosses or circles; patterns such as dots, squares, and other shapes and patterns also can suffice.
  • In another embodiment, color is used to indicate when the patient's eye is aligned with the optical axis of the apparatus. For example, a dual color set can be provided. The dual color set may comprise a first region of a first color and a second region of a second color. As discussed above in connection with the dual pattern sets, the patient visual axis is located when the first color and the second color are in a particular position relative to each other. This may cause a desired visual effect to the patient's eye, e.g., when the first region of the first color is aligned with the second region of the second color, the patient may observe a region of a third color. For example, if the first region is colored blue and the second region is colored yellow, the patient will see a region of green. Additional details concerning locating a patient's visual axis or line of sight are contained in U.S. Pat. No. 5,474,548, issued Dec. 12, 1995, incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • FIG. 51 shows one embodiment of an ophthalmic instrument 1200 that can be used in connection with various methods described herein to locate the visual axis of a patient. The instrument 1200 includes an optics housing 1202 and a patient locating fixture 1204 that is coupled with the optics housing 1202. The optics housing 1202 includes an optical system 1206 that is configured to project two reticle patterns simultaneously to provide fixation targets at a large distance, e.g., infinity, and a shorter, finite distance.
  • In the illustrated embodiment, the optical system 1206 of the instrument includes a first reference target 1208, a second reference target 1210, and a projection lens 1212. The first and second reference targets 1208, 1210 are imaged by the projection lens 1212 along an instrument axis 1213 of the ophthalmic instrument 1200. In one embodiment, the first reference target 1208 is formed on a first glass reticle 1214 located a first distance 1216 from the lens 1212 and the second target 1210 is formed on a second glass reticle 1218 located a second distance 1220 from the lens 1212. Preferably, the second distance 1220 is equal to the focal length f of the lens 1212, as was discussed in connection with FIG. 44A. As discussed above, positioning the second target 1210 at the focal length f of the lens 1212 causes the second target 1210 to be imaged at an infinite distance from the lens 1212. The first distance 1216 preferably is less than the second distance 1220. As discussed above, the first reference target 1208 is thereby imaged at a large but finite distance from the lens 1212. By positioning the first and second reference targets 1208, 1210 in this manner, the method set forth above for aligning the eye 10 of the patient may be implemented with the ophthalmic instrument 1200.
  • The optical system 1206 preferably also includes a light source 1222 that marks the visual axis of the patient after the visual axis has been located in the manner described above. In the illustrated embodiment, the light source 1222 is positioned separately from the first and second reference targets 1208, 1210. In one embodiment, the light source 1222 is positioned at a ninety degree angle to the instrument axis 1213 and is configured to direct light toward the axis 1213. In the illustrated embodiment, a beamsplitter plate or cube 1224 is provided between the first and second reference targets 1208, 1210 and the patient to route light rays emitted by the light source 1222 to the eye of the patient. The beamsplitter 1224 is an optical component that reflects light rays from the direction of the light source 1222, but permits the light rays to pass through the beamsplitter along the instrument axis 1213. Thus, light rays form the first and second reference targets 1208, 1210 and from the light source 1222 may be propagated toward the eye of the patient. Other embodiments are also possible. For example, the beamsplitter 1224 could be replaced with a mirror that is movable into and out of the instrument axis 1213 to alternately reflect light from the light source 1222 to the eye or to permit light from the first and second reference targets 1208, 1210 to reach the eye.
  • The patient locating fixture 1204 includes an elongate spacer 1232 and a contoured locating pad 1234. The contoured locating pad 1234 defines an aperture through which the patient may look along the instrument axis 213. The spacer 1232 is coupled with the optics housing 1202 and extends a distance 1236 between the housing 1202 and the contoured locating pad 1234. In one embodiment, the spacer 1232 defines a lumen 1238 that extends between the contoured locating pads 1234 and the optics housing 1202. In some embodiments, the magnitude of the distance 1236 may be selected to increase the certainty of the location of the patient's visual axis. In some embodiments, it is sufficient that the distance 1236 be a relatively fixed distance.
  • When the alignment apparatus 1200 is used, the patient's head is brought into contact with the contoured locating pad 1234, which locates the patients eye 10 in the aperture at a fixed distance from the first and second reference targets 1208, 1210. Once the patient's head is positioned in the contoured locating pad 1234, the patient may move the eye 10 as discussed above, to locate the visual axis. After locating the visual axis, the light source 1222 is engaged to emit light toward the eye 10, e.g., as reflected by the beamsplitter 1224.
  • In the illustrated embodiment, at least some of the light emitted by the light source 1222 is reflected by the beamsplitter 1224 along the instrument axis 1213 toward the patient's eye 10. Because the visual axis of the eye 10 was previously aligned with the instrument axis 1213, the light from the light source 1222 reflected by the beamsplitter 1224 is also aligned with the visual axis of the eye 10.
  • The reflected light provides a visual marker of the location of the patient's visual axis. The marking function of the light source 1222 is particularly useful in connection with the methods, described below, of applying a mask. Additional embodiments of ophthalmic instruments embodying this technique are described below in connection with FIGS. 55-59.
  • B. Methods of Applying a Mask
  • Having described a method for properly locating the visual axis of the eye 10 a patient and for visually marking the visual axis, various methods for applying a mask to the eye will be discussed.
  • FIG. 52 shows an exemplary process for screening a patient interested in increasing his or her depth of focus. The process begins at step 1300, in which the patient is fitted with soft contact lenses, i.e., a soft contact lens in placed in each of the patient's eyes. If needed, the soft contact lenses may include vision correction. Next, at step 1310, the visual axis of each of the patient's eyes is located as described above. At a step 1320, a mask, such as any of those described above, is placed on the soft contact lenses such that the optical axis of the aperture of the mask is aligned with the visual axis of the eye. In this position, the mask will be located generally concentric with the patient's pupil. In addition, the curvature of the mask should parallel the curvature of the patient's cornea. The process continues at a step 1330, in which the patient is fitted with a second set of soft contact lenses, i.e., a second soft contact lens is placed over the mask in each of the patient's eyes. The second contact lens holds the mask in a substantially constant position. Last, at step 1340, the patient's vision is tested. During testing, it is advisable to check the positioning of the mask to ensure that the optical axis of the aperture of the mask is substantially collinear with the visual axis of the eye. Further details of testing are set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 6,554,424, issued Apr. 29, 2003, incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • In accordance with a still further embodiment of the invention, a mask is surgically implanted into the eye of a patient interested in increasing his or her depth of focus. For example, a patient may suffer from presbyopia, as discussed above. The mask may be a mask as described herein, similar to those described in the prior art, or a mask combining one or more of these properties. Further, the mask may be configured to correct visual aberrations. To aid the surgeon surgically implanting a mask into a patient's eye, the mask may be pre-rolled or folded for ease of implantation.
  • The mask may be implanted in several locations. For example, the mask may be implanted underneath the cornea's epithelium sheet, beneath the cornea's Bowman membrane, in the top layer of the cornea's stroma, or in the cornea's stroma. When the mask is placed underneath the cornea's epithelium sheet, removal of the mask requires little more than removal of the cornea's epithelium sheet.
  • FIGS. 53 a through 53 c show a mask 1400 inserted underneath an epithelium sheet 1410. In this embodiment, the surgeon first removes the epithelium sheet 1410. For example, as shown in FIG. 53 a, the epithelium sheet 1410 may be rolled back. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 b, the surgeon creates a depression 1415 in a Bowman's membrane 420 corresponding to the visual axis of the eye. The visual axis of the eye may be located as described above and may be marked by use of the alignment apparatus 1200 or other similar apparatus. The depression 1415 should be of sufficient depth and width to both expose the top layer 1430 of the stroma 1440 and to accommodate the mask 1400. The mask 1400 is then placed in the depression 1415. Because the depression 1415 is located in a position to correspond to the visual axis of the patient's eye, the central axis of the pinhole aperture of the mask 1400 will be substantially collinear with the visual axis of the eye. This will provide the greatest improvement in vision possible with the mask 1400. Last, the epithelium sheet 1410 is placed over the mask 1400. Over time, as shown in FIG. 53 c, the epithelium sheet 1410 will grow and adhere to the top layer 1430 of the stroma 1440, as well as the mask 1400 depending, of course, on the composition of the mask 1400. As needed, a contact lens may be placed over the incised cornea to protect the mask.
  • FIGS. 54 a through 54 c show a mask 1500 inserted beneath a Bowman's membrane 1520 of an eye. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 a, the surgeon first hinges open the Bowman's membrane 1520. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 b, the surgeon creates a depression 1515 in a top layer 1530 of a stroma 1540 corresponding to the visual axis of the eye. The visual axis of the eye may be located as described above and may be marked by using the alignment apparatus 1200 or other similar apparatus. The depression 1515 should be of sufficient depth and width to accommodate the mask 1500. Then, the mask 1500 is placed in the depression 1515. Because the depression 1515 is located in a position to correspond to the visual axis of the patient's eye, the central axis of the pinhole aperture of the mask 1500 will be substantially collinear with the visual axis of the eye. This will provide the greatest improvement in vision possible with the mask 1500. Last, the Bowman's membrane 1520 is placed over the mask 1500. Over time, as shown in FIG. 54 c, the epithelium sheet 1510 will grow over the incised area of the Bowman's membrane 1520. As needed, a contact lens may be placed over the incised cornea to protect the mask.
  • In another embodiment, a mask of sufficient thinness, i.e., less than substantially 20 microns, may be placed underneath epithelium sheet 1410. In another embodiment, an optic mark having a thickness less than about 20 microns may be placed beneath Bowman's membrane 1520 without creating a depression in the top layer of the stroma.
  • In an alternate method for surgically implanting a mask in the eye of a patient, the mask may be threaded into a channel created in the top layer of the stroma. In this method, a curved channeling tool creates a channel in the top layer of the stroma, the channel being in a plane parallel to the surface of the cornea. The channel is formed in a position corresponding to the visual axis of the eye. The channeling tool either pierces the surface of the cornea or, in the alternative, is inserted via a small superficial radial incision. In the alternative, a laser focusing an ablative beam may create the channel in the top layer of the stroma. In this embodiment, the mask may be a single segment with a break, or it may be two or more segments. In any event, the mask in this embodiment is positioned in the channel and is thereby located so that the central axis of the pinhole aperture formed by the mask is substantially collinear with the patient's visual axis to provide the greatest improvement in the patient's depth of focus.
  • In another alternate method for surgically implanting a mask in the eye of a patient, the mask may be injected into the top layer of the stroma. In this embodiment, an injection tool with a stop penetrates the surface of the cornea to the specified depth. For example, the injection tool may be a ring of needles capable of producing a mask with a single injection. In the alternative, a channel may first be created in the top layer of the stroma in a position corresponding to the visual axis of the patient. Then, the injector tool may inject the mask into the channel. In this embodiment, the mask may be a pigment, or it may be pieces of pigmented material suspended in a bio-compatible medium. The pigment material may be made of a polymer or, in the alternative, made of a suture material. In any event, the mask injected into the channel is thereby positioned so that the central axis of the pinhole aperture formed by the pigment material is substantially collinear with the visual axis of the patient.
  • In another method for surgically implanting a mask in the eye of a patient, the mask may be placed beneath the corneal flap created during keratectomy, when the outermost 20% of the cornea is hinged open. As with the implantation methods discussed above, a mask placed beneath the corneal flap created during keratectomy should be substantially aligned with the patient's visual axis, as discussed above, for greatest effect.
  • In another method for surgically implanting a mask in the eye of a patient, the mask may be aligned with the patient's visual axis and placed in a pocket created in the cornea's stroma.
  • Further details concerning alignment apparatuses are disclosed in U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/479,129, filed Jun. 17, 2003, incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • IV. Further Surgical Systems for Aligning a Pinhole Aperture with a Patient's Eye
  • FIG. 55 shows a surgical system 2000 that employs dual target fixation in a manner similar to that discussed above in connection with FIGS. 43-51. The surgical system 2000 enables the identification of a unique feature of a patient's eye in connection with a surgical procedure. The surgical system 2000 is similar to the ophthalmic instrument 1200 except as set forth below. As discussed below, in one arrangement, the surgical system 2000 is configured to align an axis of the patient's eye, e.g., the patient's line of sight (sometimes referred to herein as the “visual axis”), with an axis of the system 2000. The axis of the system 2000 may be a viewing axis along which the patient may direct an eye. As discussed above, such alignment is particularly useful in many surgical procedures, including those that benefit from precise knowledge of the location of one or more structures or features of the eye on which the procedures is being performed.
  • In one embodiment, the surgical system 2000 includes a surgical viewing device 2004 and an alignment device 2008. In one embodiment, the surgical viewing device 2004 includes a surgical microscope. The surgical viewing device 2004 may be any device or combination of devices that enables a surgeon to visualize the surgical site with sufficient clarity or that enhances the surgeon's visualization of the surgical site. A surgeon also may elect to use the alignment device 2004 without a viewing device. As discussed more fully below in connection another embodiment of a surgical system shown in FIG. 56, the surgical system 2000 preferably also includes a fixture configured to conveniently mount one or more components to the surgical viewing device 2004.
  • In one embodiment, the alignment device 2008 includes an alignment module 2020, a marking module 2024, and an image capture module 2028. As discussed below, in another embodiment, the marking module 2024 is eliminated. Where the marking module 2024 is eliminated, one or more of its functions may be performed by the image capture module 2028. In another embodiment, the image capture module 2028 is eliminated. The alignment device 2004 preferably also has a control device 2032 that directs one or more components of the alignment device 2004. As discussed more fully below, the control device 2032 includes a computer 2036 and signal lines 2040 a, 2040 b, and a trigger 2042 in one embodiment.
  • The alignment module 2020 includes components that enable a patient to align a feature related to the patient's eye, vision, or sense of sight with an instrument axis, e.g., an axis of the alignment device 2008. In one embodiment, the alignment module 2020 includes a plurality of targets (e.g., two targets) that are located on the instrument axis. In the illustrated embodiment, the alignment module 2020 includes a first target 2056 and a second target 2060. The alignment module 2020 may be employed to align the patient's line-of-sight with an axis 2052 that extends perpendicular to the faces of the targets 2056, 2060.
  • Although the alignment device 2008 could be configured such that the patient is positioned relative thereto so that the eye is positioned along the axis 2052, it may be more convenient to position the patient such that an eye 2064 of the patient is not on the axis 2052. For example, as shown in FIG. 55, the patient may be positioned a distance 2068 from the axis 2052. FIG. 55 shows that the gaze of the patient's eye 2064 is directed generally along a patient viewing axis 2072.
  • In this arrangement, the alignment device 2008 is configured such that the patient viewing axis 2072 is at about a ninety degree angle with respect to the instrument axis 2052. In this embodiment, a path 2076 optically connecting the targets 2056, 2060 with the patient's eye 2064 extends partially along the axis 2052 and partially along the patient viewing axis 2072. The optical path 2076 defines the path along which the images of the targets 2056, 2060 are cast when the alignment device 2008 is configured such that the patient's eye 2064 is not on the axis 2052.
  • Positioning the patient off of the axis 2052, may be facilitated by one or more components that redirect light traveling along or parallel to the axis 2052. In one embodiment, the alignment device 2008 includes a beamsplitter 2080 located on the axis 2052 to direct along the patient viewing axis 2072 light rays coming toward the beamsplitter 2080 from the direction of the targets 2056, 2060. In this embodiment, at least a portion of the optical path 2076 is defined from the patient's eye 2064 to the beamsplitter 2080 and from the beamsplitter 2080 to the first and second targets 2056, 2060. Although the alignment device 2008 is configured to enable the patient viewing axis 2072 to be at about a ninety degree angle with respect to the axis 2052, other angles are possible and may be employed as desired. The arrangement of FIG. 55 is convenient because it enables a surgeon to be directly above and relatively close to the patient if the patient is positioned on his or her back on an operating table.
  • In one embodiment, the first target 2056 is on the axis 2052 and on the optical path 2076 between the second target 2060 and the patient's eye 2064. More particularly, light rays that are directed from the second target 2060 intersect the first target 2056 and are thereafter directed toward the beamsplitter 2080. As discussed more fully below, the first and second targets 2056, 2060 are configured to project a suitable pattern toward the patient's eye 2064. The patient interacts with the projected images of the first and second targets 2056, 2060 to align the line-of-sight (or other unique anatomical feature) of the patient's eye 2064 or of the patient's sense of vision with an axis of the instrument, such as the axis 2052, the viewing axis 2072, or the optical path 2076.
  • The first and second targets 2056, 2060 may take any suitable form. The targets 2056, 2060 may be similar to those hereinbefore described. The targets 2056, 2060 may be formed on separate reticles or as part of a single alignment target. In one embodiment, at least one of the first and second targets 2056, 2060 includes a glass reticle with a pattern formed thereon. The pattern on the first target 2056 and the pattern on the second target 2060 may be linear patterns that are combined to form a third linear pattern when the patient's line-of-sight is aligned with the axis 2052 or optical path 2076.
  • Although shown as separate elements, the first and second targets 2056, 2060 may be formed on a alignment target. FIGS. 55A-55C shows one embodiment of an alignment target 2081. The alignment target 2081 can be formed of glass or another substantially transparent medium. The alignment target 2081 includes a first surface 2082 and a second surface 2083. The first and second surfaces 2082, 2083 are separated by a distance 2084. The distance 2084 is selected to provide sufficient separation between the first and second surfaces 2082, 2083 to facilitate alignment by the patient by any of the methods described herein. In one embodiment, the alignment target 2081 includes a first pattern 2085 that may comprise a linear pattern formed on the first surface 2082 and a second pattern 2086 that may comprise a linear pattern formed on the second surface 2083. The first and second patterns 2085, 2086 are selected so that when the patient's line-of-sight is properly aligned with an axis of the alignment device 2008, the first and second patterns 2085, 2086 form a selected pattern (as in FIG. 55B) but when the patient's line-of-sight is properly aligned with an axis of the alignment device 2008, the first and second patterns 2085, 2086 do not form the selected pattern (as in FIG. 55C). In the illustrated embodiment, the first and second pattern 2085, 2086 each are generally L-shaped. When aligned, the first and second patterns 2085, 2086 form a cross. When not aligned, a gap is formed between the patterns and they appear as an L and an inverted L. This arrangement advantageously exploits vernier acuity, which is the ability of the eye to keenly detect misalignment of displaced lines. Any other combination of non-linear or linear patterns (e.g., other linear patterns that exploit vernier acuity) can be used as targets, as discussed above.
  • The first and second targets 2056, 2060 (or the first and second patterns 2085, 2086) may be made visible to the patient's eye 2064 in any suitable manner. For example, a target illuminator 2090 may be provided to make the targets 2056, 2060 visible to the eye 2064. In one embodiment, the target illuminator 2090 is a source of radiant energy, such as a light source. The light source can be any suitable light source, such as an incandescent light, a fluorescent light, one or more light emitting diodes, or any other source of light to illuminate the targets 2056, 2060.
  • As discussed more fully below, the alignment module 2020 also may include one or more optic elements, such as lenses, that relatively sharply focus the images projected from the first and second targets 2056, 2060 to present sharp images to the patient's eye 2064. In such arrangements, the focal length of the optic element or system of optical elements may be located at any suitable location, e.g., at the first or second targets 2056, 2060, between the first and second targets 2056, 2060 in front of the first target 2056, or behind the second target 2060. The focal length is the distance from a location (e.g., the location of an optic element) to the plane at which the optic element focuses the target images projected from the first and second target 2056, 2060.
  • FIG. 55 shows a series of arrows that indicate the projection of the images of the first and second targets 2056, 2060 to the patient's eye 2064. In particular, an arrow 2094 indicates the direction of light cast by the target illuminator 2090 along the axis 2052 toward the first and second targets 2056, 2060. The light strikes the first and second targets 2056, 2060 and is absorbed by or passed through the targets to cast an image of the targets 2056, 2060 along the axis 2052 in a direction indicated by an arrow 2098. In the embodiment of FIG. 55, the image of the first and second targets 2056, 2060 intersects a beamsplitter 2102 that forms a part of the marking module 2024 and the image capture module 2028. The beamsplitter 2102 is configured to transmit the majority of the light conveying the images of the first and second targets 2056, 2060 toward the beamsplitter 2080 as indicated by an arrow 2106. The beamsplitter 2102 will be discussed in greater detail below. The light is thereafter reflected by the beamsplitter 2080 along the patient viewing axis 2072 and toward the patient's eye 2064. As discussed more fully below, in some embodiments, the beamsplitter 2080 transmits some of the incident light beyond the beamsplitter 2080 along the axis 2050. In one embodiment, 70 percent of the light incident on the beamsplitter 2080 is reflected toward the patient's eye 2064 and 30 percent is transmitter. One skilled in the art will recognize that the beamsplitter 2080 can be configured to transmit and reflect in any suitable fraction.
  • While the target illuminator 2090 and the first and second targets 2056, 2060 project the images of the targets to the patient's eye 2064, the patient may interact with those images to align a feature of the patient's eye 2064 with an axis of the alignment device 2008. In the embodiment illustrated by FIG. 55, the patient aligns the line-of-sight of the eye 2064 with the patient viewing axis 2072 of the alignment device 2008.
  • Techniques for aligning the line of sight of the patient's eye 2064 with the instrument axis have been discussed above. In the context of the embodiment of FIG. 55, the patient is positioned such that the optical path 2076 intersects the patient's eye 2064. In one method, the patient is instructed to focus on the first target 2056. Motion is provided between the patient's eye 2064 and the optical path 2076 (and therefore between the patient's eye 2064 and the targets 2056, 2060). The relative motion between the patient's eye 2064 and the targets 2056, 2060 may be provided by the patient moving his or her head with respect to the patient viewing axis 2072. Alternatively, the patient may be enabled to move all or a portion of the surgical system 2000 while the patient remains stationary. As discussed above, when the first and second targets 2056, 2060 appear aligned (e.g., the L patterns 2085, 2086 merge to form a cross), the line-of-sight of the patient is aligned with the patient viewing axis 2072, the optical path 2076, and the axis 2052 of the alignment module 2020.
  • Although aligning the eye may be sufficient to provide relatively precise placement of the masks described herein, one or both of the marking module 2024 and the image capture module 2028 may be included to assist the surgeon in placing a mask after the eye 2064 has been aligned. At least one of the marking module 2024 and the image capture module 2028 may be used to correlate the line-of-sight of the patient's eye 2064, which is not otherwise visible, with a visual cue, such as a visible physical feature of the patient's eye, a marker projected onto the eye or an image of the eye, or a virtual image of a marker visible to the surgeon, or any combination of the foregoing. As is discussed in more detail below, the virtual image may be an image that is directed toward the surgeon's eye that appears from the surgeon's point of view to be on the eye 2064 at a pre-selected location.
  • In one embodiment, the marking module 2024 is configured to produce an image, sometimes referred to herein as a “marking image”, that is visible to the surgeon and that is assists the surgeon in placing a mask or performing another surgical procedure after the line of sight of the eye 2064 has been located. The marking module 2024 of the alignment device 2008 shown includes a marking target 2120 and a marking target illuminator 2124. The marking target illuminator 2124 preferably is a source of light, such as any of those discussed above in connection with the target illuminator 2090.
  • FIG. 55 shows that in one embodiment, the marking target 2120 is a structure configured to produce a marking image when light is projected onto the marking target 2120. The marking target 2120 may be similar to the targets 2056, 2060. In some embodiments, the marking target 2120 is a glass reticle with a suitable geometrical pattern formed thereon. The pattern formed on the marking target 2120 may be a clear two dimensional shape that is surrounded by one or more opaque regions. For example, a clear annulus of selected width surrounded by opaque regions could be provided. In another embodiment, the marking target 2120 may be a glass reticle with an opaque two dimensional shape surrounded by substantially clear regions. As discussed below, in other embodiments, the marking target 2120 need not be made of glass and need not have a fixed pattern. The marking target 2120 may be located in any suitable location with respect to the beamsplitter 2080 or the alignment device 2008 as discussed below.
  • FIG. 55 shows that in one embodiment, the marking image is generated in a manner similar to the manner in which the images of the first and second targets 2056, 2060 are generated. In particular, the marking target 2124 and the marking target illuminator 2124 cooperate to produce, generate, or project the marking image along a marking image axis 2128. The marking image is conveyed by light along the axis 2128. The marking target illuminator 2124 casts light toward the marking target 2120 in a direction indicated by an arrow 2132. The marking target 2120 interacts with the light cast by the marking target illuminator 2124, e.g., by at least one of transmitting, absorbing, filtering, and attenuating at least a portion of the light. An arrow 2136 indicates the direction along which the marking image generated by the interaction of the marking target illuminator 2124 and the marking target 2120 is conveyed. The marking image preferably is conveyed along the marking axis 2128. In the illustrated embodiment, the marking target 2120 is located off of the axis 2052 and the image of the marking target initially is cast in a direction generally perpendicular to the axis 2052.
  • A beamsplitter 2140, to be discussed below in connection with the image capture module 2028, is positioned on the marking axis 2128 in the embodiment of FIG. 55. However, the beamsplitter 2140 is configured to be substantially transparent to light being transmitted along the marking axis 2128 from the direction of the marking target 2120. Thus, the light conveying the marking image is substantially entirely transmitted beyond the beamsplitter 2140 along the marking axis 2128 toward the axis 2052 as indicated by an arrow 2144. Thus, the beamsplitter 2140 generally does not affect the marking image. A surface of the beamsplitter 2102 that faces the marking target 2120 is reflective to light. Thus, the light conveying the marking image is reflected and thereafter is conveyed along the axis 2052 as indicated by the arrow 2106. The surface of the beamsplitter 2080 that faces the beamsplitter 2102 also is reflective to at least some light (e.g., 70 percent of the incident light, as discussed above). Thus, the light conveying the marking image is reflected and thereafter is conveyed along the patient viewing axis 2072 toward the patient's eye 2064 as indicated by the arrow 2148. Thus, a marking image projected from the marking target 2120 may be projected onto the patient's eye 2064.
  • As discussed more fully below, projecting the marking image onto the patient's eye 2064 may assist the surgeon in accurately placing a mask. For example, the surgeon may be assisted in that the location of line-of-sight of the patient's eye (or some other generally invisible feature of the eye 2064) is correlated with a visible feature of the eye, such as the iris or other anatomical feature. In one technique, the marking image is a substantially circular ring that has a diameter that is greater than the size of the inner periphery of the iris under surgical conditions (e.g., the prevailing light and the state of dilation of the patient's eye 2064). In another technique, the marking image is a substantially circular ring that has a diameter that is less than the size of the outer periphery of the iris under surgical conditions (e.g., light and dilation of the eye 2064). In another technique, the marking image is a substantially circular ring that has a size that is correlated to another feature of the eye 2064, e.g., the limbus of the eye.
  • In one embodiment of the system 2000, a marking module is provided that includes a secondary marking module. The secondary marking module is not routed through the optics of associated with the alignment device 2008. Rather, the secondary marking module is coupled with the alignment device 2008. In one embodiment, the secondary marking module includes a source of radiant energy, e.g., a laser or light source similar to any of these discussed herein. The source of radiant energy is configured to direct a plurality of spots (e.g., two, three, four, or more than four spots) onto the patient's eye 2064. The spots preferably are small, bright spots. The spots indicate positions on the eye 2064 that correlate with a feature of a mask, such as an edge of a mask, when the mask is in the correct position with respect to the line-of-sight of the eye 2064. The spots can be aligned with the projected marking target such that they hit at a selected location on the projected marking target (e.g., circumferentially spaced locations on the inner edge, on the outer edge, or on both the inner and outer edges). Thus, the marking module may give a visual cue as to the proper positioning of a mask that is correlated to the location of the line-of-sight without passing through the optics of the alignment device. The visual cue of the secondary marking module may be coordinated with the marking image of the marking module 2024 in some embodiments.
  • In some techniques, it may be beneficial to increase the visibility of a visual cue generated for the benefit of the surgeon (e.g., the reflection of the image of the marking target 2120) on the eye 2064. In some cases, this is due to the generally poor reflection of marking images off of the cornea. Where reflection of the marking image off of the cornea is poor, the reflection of the image may be quite dim. In addition, the cornea is an off-center aspherical structure, so the corneal reflection (purkinje images) may be offset from the location of the intersection of the visual axis and the corneal surface as viewed by the surgeon.
  • One technique for increasing the visibility of a visual cue involves applying a substance to the eye that can react with the projected image of the marking target 2120. For example, a dye, such as fluorescein dye, can be applied to the surface of the eye. Then the marking target illuminator 2124 may be activated to cause an image of the marking target 2120 to be projected onto the eye, as discussed above. In one embodiment, the marking target illuminator 2124 is configured to project light from all or a discrete portion of the visible spectrum of electromagnetic radiant energy, e.g., the wavelengths corresponding to blue light, to project the image of the marking target 2120 onto the eye 2064. The projected image interacts with the dye and causes the image of the marking target 2120 to be illuminated on the surface of the cornea. The presence of the dye greatly increases the visibility of the image of the marking target. For example, where the marking target 2120 is a ring, a bright ring will be visible to the surgeon because the light causes the dye to fluoresce. This technique substantially eliminates errors in placement of a mask due to the presence of the purkinje images and may generally increase the brightness of the image of the marking target 2120.
  • Another technique for increasing the visibility of a visual cue on the eye involves applying a visual cue enhancing device to at least a portion of the anterior surface of the eye 2064. For example, in one technique, a drape is placed over the cornea. The drape may have any suitable configuration. For example, the drape may be a relatively thin structure that will substantially conform to the anterior structure of the eye. The drape may be formed in a manner similar to the formation of a conventional contact lens. In one technique, the drape is a contact lens. The visual cue enhancing device preferably has suitable reflecting properties. In one embodiment, the visual cue enhancing device diffusely reflects the light projecting the image of the marking target 2120 onto the cornea. In one embodiment, the visual cue enhancing device is configured to interact with a discrete portion of the visible spectrum of electromagnetic radiant energy, e.g., the wavelengths thereof corresponding to blue light.
  • As discussed above the alignment device 2008 shown in FIG. 55 also includes an image capture module 2028. Some variations do not include the image capture module 2028. The image capture module 2028 of the surgical system 2000 is capable of capturing one or more images of the patient's eye 2064 to assist the surgeon in performing surgical procedures on the eye 2064. The image capture module 2028 preferably includes a device to capture an image, such as a camera 2200 and a display device 2204 to display an image. The display device 2204 may be a liquid crystal display. The image capture module 2028 may be controlled in part by the control device 2032 of the surgical system 2000. For example, the computer 2036 may be employed to process images captured by the camera 2200 and to convey an image to the display device 2204 where it is made visible to the surgeon. The computer 2036 may also direct the operation of or be responsive to at least one of the camera 2200, the display device 2204, the trigger 2042, and any other component of the image capture module 2028.
  • The camera 2200 can be any suitable camera. One type of camera that can be used is a charge-coupled device camera, referred to herein as a CCD camera. One type of CCD camera incorporates a silicon chip, the surface of which includes light-sensitive pixels. When light, e.g., a photon or light particle, hits a pixel, an electric charge is registered at the pixels that can be detected. Images of sufficient resolution can be generated with a large array of sensitive pixels. As discussed more fully below, one advantageous embodiment provides precise alignment of a selected pixel (e.g., one in the exact geometric center of the display device 2204) with the axis 2052. When such alignment is provided, the marking module may not be needed to align a mask with the line-of-sight of the eye 2064.
  • As discussed above, an image captured by the camera 2200 aids the surgeon attempting to align a mask, such as any of the masks described herein, with the eye 2064. In one arrangement, the image capture module 2028 is configured to capture an image of one or more physical attributes of the eye 2064, the location of which may be adequately correlated to the line-of-sight of the eye 2064. For example, the image of the patient's iris may be directed along the patient viewing axis 2072 to the beamsplitter 2080 as indicated by the arrow 2148. As mentioned above, a side of the beamsplitter 2080 that faces the beamsplitter 2080 is reflective to light transmitted from the eye 2064. Thus, at least a substantial portion of the light conveying the image of the iris of the eye 2064 is reflected by the beamsplitter 2080 and is conveyed along the axis 2052 toward the beamsplitter 2102, as indicated by the arrow 2106. As discussed above, the surface of the beamsplitter 2102 facing the beamsplitter 2080 is reflective to light. Thus, substantially all of the light conveying the image of the iris is reflected by the beamsplitter 2102 and is conveyed along the marking axis 2128 toward the beamsplitter 2140, as indicated by the arrow 2144. The surface of the beamsplitter 2140 facing the beamsplitter 2102 and the camera 2200 is reflective to light. Thus, substantially all of the light conveying the image of the iris is reflected along an image capture axis 2212 that extends between the beamsplitter 2140 and the camera 2200. The light is conveyed along an image capture axis 2212 as indicated by an arrow 2216.
  • The image captured by the camera 2200 is conveyed to the computer 2036 by way of a signal line 2040 a. The computer 2036 processes the signal in a suitable manner and generates signals to be conveyed along a signal line 2040 b to the display device 2204. Any suitable signal line and computer or other signal processing device can be used to convey signals from the camera 2200 to the display device 2204. The signal lines 2040 a, 2040 b need not be physical lines. For example, any suitable wireless technology may be used in combination with or in place of physical lines or wires.
  • The capturing of the image by the camera 2200 may be triggered in any suitable way. For example, the trigger 2042 may be configured to be manually actuated. In one embodiment, the trigger 2042 is configured to be actuated by the patient when his or her eye 2064 is aligned (e.g., when the targets 2056, 2060 are aligned, as discussed above). By enabling the patient to trigger the capturing of the image of the eye 2064 by the image capture module 2028, the likelihood of the eye 2064 moving prior to the capturing of the image is greatly reduced. In another embodiment, another person participating in the procedure may be permitted to trigger the capturing of the image, e.g., on the patient's cue. In another embodiment, the control device 2032 may be configured to automatically capture the image of the patient's eye 2064 based on a predetermined criteria.
  • The display device 2204 is configured to be illuminated to direct an image along the axis 2052 toward the beamsplitter 2080 as indicated by an arrow 2208. The surface of the beamsplitter 2080 that faces the display device 2204 preferably is reflective to light directed from the location of the beamsplitter 2080. Thus, the image on the display 2052 is reflected by the beamsplitter 2080 toward an eye 2212 of the surgeon as indicated by an arrow 2216. The beamsplitter 2080 preferably is transparent from the perspective of the surgeon's eye 2212. Thus, the surgeon may simultaneously view the patient's eye 2064 and the image on the display device 2204 in one embodiment. In one embodiment where both the marking module 2024 and the image capture module 2028 are present, the marking image may be projected at the same time that an image is displayed on the display device 2204. The marking image and the image on the display will appear to both be on the patient's eye. In one arrangement, they have the same configuration (e.g., size and shape) and therefore overlap. This can reinforce the image from the perspective of the surgeon, further increasing the visibility of the visual cue provided by the marking image.
  • The display device 2204 is located at a distance 2220 from the beamsplitter 2080. The patient is located a distance 2224 from the axis 2052. Preferably the distance 2220 is about equal to the distance 2224. Thus, both the display device 2204 and the patient's eye 2064 are at the focal length of the surgical viewing device 2004. This assures that the image generated by the display device 2204 is in focus at the same time that the patient's eye is in focus.
  • In one embodiment, the system 2000 is configured to track movement of the patient's eye 2064 during the procedure. In one configuration, the trigger 2042 is actuated by the patient when the eye 2064 is aligned with an axis of the alignment device 2008. Although a mask is implanted shortly thereafter, the patient's eye is not constrained and may thereafter move to some extent. In order to correct for such movement, the image capture module 2028 may be configured to respond to such movements by moving the image formed on the display device 2204. For example, a ring may be formed on the display device 2204 that is similar to those discussed above in connection with the marking target 2120. The beamsplitter 2080 enables the surgeon to see the ring visually overlaid on the patient's eye 2064. The image capture module 2028 compares the real-time position of the patient's eye 2064 with the image of the eye captured when the trigger 2042 is actuated. Differences in the real-time position and the position captured by the camera 2200 are determined. The position of the ring is moved an amount corresponding to the differences in position. As a result, from the perspective of the surgeon, movements of the ring and the eye correspond and the ring continues to indicate the correct position to place a mask.
  • As discussed above, several variations of the system 2000 are contemplated. A first variation is substantially identical to the embodiment shown in FIG. 55, except as set forth below. In the first variation, the video capture module 2028 is eliminated. This embodiment is similar to that set forth above in connection with FIG. 51. In the arrangement of FIG. 55, the marking module 2024 is configured to project the marking target onto the surface of the patient's eye. This variation is advantageous in that it has a relatively simple construction. Also, this variation projects the marking image onto the surface of the cornea, proximate the surgical location.
  • In one implementation of the first variation, the marking module 2024 is configured to display the marking image to the surgeon's eye 2212 but not to the patient's eye 2064. This may be provided by positioning the marking target 2120 approximately in the location of the display device 2204. The marking image may be generated and presented to the surgeon in any suitable manner. For example, the marking target 2120 and marking target illuminator 2124 may be repositioned so that they project the image of the marking target 2120 as indicated by the arrows 2208, 2216. The marking target 2120 and the marking target illuminator 2124 may be replaced by a unitary display, such as an LCD display. This implementation of the first variation is advantageous in that the marking image is visible to the surgeon but is not visible to the patient. The patient is freed from having to respond to or being subject to the marking image. This can increase alignment performance by increasing patient comfort and decreasing distractions, thereby enabling the patient to remain still during the procedure.
  • In another implementation of the first variation, a dual marking image is presented to the eye 2212 of the surgeon. In one form, this implementation has a marking module 2024 similar to that shown in FIG. 55 and discussed above, except as set forth below. A virtual image is presented to the surgeon's eye 2212. In one form, a virtual image generation surface is positioned in substantially the same location as the display device 2204. The surface may be a mirror, another reflective surface, or a non-reflective surface. In one embodiment, the display device 2204 is a white card. A first fraction of the light conveying the marking image is reflected by the beamsplitter 2080 to the patient's eye 2064. The marking image is thus formed on the patient's eye. A second fraction of the light conveying the marking image is transmitted to the virtual image generation surface. The marking image is formed on or reflected by the virtual image generation surface. The marking target thus also is visible to the surgeon's eye 2212 in the form of a virtual image of the target. The virtual image and the marking image formed on the patient's eye are both visible to the surgeon. This implementation of the first variation is advantageous in that the virtual image and the marking image of the marking target are visible to the surgeon's eye 2212 and are reinforced each other making the marking image highly visible to the surgeon.
  • In a second variation, the marking module 2024 is eliminated. In this embodiment, the image capture module 2028 provides a visual cue for the surgeon to assist in the placement of a mask. In particular, an image can be displayed on the display device 2204, as discussed above. The image can be generated in response to the patient actuating the trigger 2042. In one technique, the patient actuates the trigger when the targets 2056, 2060 appear aligned, as discussed above. In this variation, care should be taken to determine the position of the display device 2204 in the alignment device because the image formed on the display device 2204 is to give the surgeon a visual cue indicating the location of the line-of-sight of the patient. In one embodiment, the display device 2204 is carefully coupled with the alignment module so that the axis 2052 extends through a known portion (e.g., a known pixel) thereof. Because the precise location of the axis 2052 on the display device 2204 is known, the relationship of the image formed thereon to the line-of-sight of the patient is known.
  • FIG. 56 shows a portion of a surgical system 2400 that is similar to the surgical system 2000 discussed above except as set forth below. The surgical system 2400 may be modified according to any of the variations and embodiments hereinbefore described.
  • The portion of the surgical system 2400 is shown from the surgeon's viewpoint in FIG. 56. The surgical system 2400 includes an alignment device 2404 and a fixture 2408. The alignment device 2404 is similar to the alignment device 2008 discussed above, except as set forth below. The surgical system 2400 is shown without a surgical microscope or other viewing device, but is configured to be coupled with one by way of the fixture 2408.
  • The fixture 2408 may take any suitable form. In the illustrated embodiment, the fixture 2408 includes a clamp 2412, an elevation adjustment mechanism 2416, and suitable members to interconnect the clamp 2408 and the mechanism 2416. In the embodiment of FIG. 56, the clamp 2412 is a ring clamp that includes a first side portion 2420, a second side portion 2424, and a clamping mechanism 2426 to actuate the first and second side portion 2420, 2424 with respect to each other. The first side portion 2420 has a first arcuate inner surface 2428 and the second side portion 2424 has a second arcuate inner surface 2432 that faces the first arcuate inner surface 2428. The clamping mechanism 2426 is coupled with each of the first and second side portions 2420, 2424 to cause the first and second arcuate inner surfaces 2428, 2432 to move toward or away from each other. As the first and second arcuate inner surfaces 2428, 2432 move toward each other they apply a force to a structure, such as a portion of a surgical microscope, placed between the first and second arcuate inner surfaces 2428, 2432. In one embodiment, the force applied by the first and second arcuate inner surfaces 2428, 2432 is sufficient to clamp the alignment device 2404 with respect to a surgical viewing aid. In one embodiment, the clamp 2412 is configured to couple with any one of (or more than one of) the currently commercially available surgical microscopes.
  • The fixture 2408 preferably also is configured to suspend the alignment device 2404 at an elevation below the clamp 2412. In the illustrated embodiment, a bracket 2440 is coupled with the clamp 2412, which is an L-shaped bracket in the illustrated embodiment with a portion of the L extending downward from the clamp 2412. FIG. 56 shows the L-shaped bracket spaced laterally from the clamp 2412 by a spacer 2444. In one embodiment, the bracket 2440 is pivotably coupled with the spacer 2444 so that the alignment device 2404 can be easily rotated out of the field of view of the surgical microscope or viewing aid, which is visible through the spaced defined between the surfaces 2428, 2432.
  • Preferably the fixture 2408 is also configured to enable the alignment device 2404 to be positioned at a selected elevation within a range of elevations beneath the clamp 2412. The elevation of the alignment device 2404 may be easily and quickly adjusted by manipulating a suitable mechanism. For example, manual actuation may be employed by providing a knob 2460 coupled with a rack-and-pinion gear coupling 2464. Of course the rack-and-pinion gear coupling 2464 can be actuated by another manual device that is more remote, such as by a foot pedal or trigger or by an automated device.
  • FIGS. 57-59 show further details of the alignment device 2404. The alignment device 2404 is operatively coupled with an illuminator control device 2500 and includes an alignment module 2504, a marking module 2508, and an image routing module 2512. As discussed below, the illuminator control device 2500 controls light or energy sources associated with the alignment control device 2404. In some embodiments, the illuminator control device 2500 forms a part of a computer or other signal processing device, similar to the computer 2036 discussed above.
  • The alignment module 2504 is similar to the alignment module 2020 except as set forth below. The alignment module 2504 includes a housing 2520 that extends between a first end 2524 and a second end 2528. The first end 2524 of the housing 2520 is coupled with the image routing module 2512 and interacts with the image routing module 2512 in a manner described below. The housing 2520 includes a rigid body 2532 that preferably is hollow. An axis 2536 extends within the hollow portion of the housing 2520 between the first and second ends 2524, 2528. In the illustrated embodiment, the second end 2528 of the housing 2520 is enclosed by an end plate 2540.
  • The housing 2520 is configured to protect a variety of components that are positioned in the hollow spaced defined therein. In one embodiment, a target illuminator 2560 is positioned inside the housing 2520 near the second end 2528 thereof. A power cable 2564 (or other electrical conveyance) that extends from the end plate 2540 electrically connects the target illuminator 2560 to a power source. The target illuminator 2560 could also be triggered and powered by a wireless connection. In one arrangement, the power source forms a portion of the illuminator control device 2500 to which the power cable 2564 is connected. Power may be from any suitable power source, e.g., from a battery or electrical outlet of suitable voltage.
  • As discussed above, the illuminator control device 2500 enables the surgeon (or other person assisting in a procedure) to control the amount of energy supplied to the target illuminator 2560 in the alignment module 2504. In one embodiment, the illuminator control device 2500 has a brightness control so that the brightness of the target illumination 2560 can be adjusted. The brightness control may be actuated in a suitable manner, such as by a brightness control knob 2568. The brightness control may take any other suitable form to provide manual analog (e.g., continuous) adjustment of the amount of energy applied to the target illuminator 2560 or to provide manual digital (e.g., discrete) adjustment of the amount of energy applied to the target illuminator 2560. In some embodiments, the brightness control may be adjustable automatically, e.g., under computer control. The illuminator control device 2500 may also have an on-off switch 2572 configured to selectively apply and cut off power to the target illuminator 2560. The on-off switch 2572 may be operated manually, automatically, or in a partially manual and partially automatic mode. The brightness control and on-off switch could be controlled wirelessly in another embodiment.
  • Also located in the housing 2520 are a first target 2592, a second target 2596, and a lens 2600. As discussed above, the first and second targets 2592, 2596 are configured to present a composite image to the patient's eye such that the patient may align the line-of-sight of the eye with an axis (e.g., the axis 2536) of the alignment module 2504. The first and second targets 2592, 2596 are similar to the targets discussed above. In particular, the alignment target 2081, which includes two targets on opposite ends of a single component, may be positioned within the housing 2520.
  • The lens 2600 may be any suitable lens. Preferably the lens 2600 is configured to sharply focus one or both of the images of the first and second targets 2592, 2596 in a manner similar to the focus of the targets 2056, 2060, discussed above.
  • In one embodiment, the alignment module 2504 is configured such that the position of the first and second targets 2592, 2596 within the housing 2520 can be adjusted. The adjustability of the first and second targets 2592, 2596 may be provided with any suitable arrangement. FIGS. 57-58 shows that in one embodiment the alignment module 2504 includes a target adjustment device 2612 to provide rapid gross adjustment and fine adjustment of the positions of the targets 2592, 2596 within the housing 2520.
  • In one embodiment, the target adjustment device 2612 includes a support member 2616 that extends along at least a portion of the housing 2520 between the first end 2524 and the second end 2528. In one embodiment, the support member 2616 is coupled with the end plate 2540 and with the image routing module 2512. In one embodiment, the target adjustment device 2612 includes a lens fixture 2620 that is coupled with the lens 2600 and a target fixture 2624 that is coupled with the first and second targets 2592, 2596. In another embodiment, each of the first and second targets 2592, 2596 is coupled with a separate target fixture so that the targets may be individually positioned and adjusted. The lens 2600 may be adjustable as shown, or in a fixed position. Movement of the lens and the targets 2592, 2596 enable the patterns on the targets 2592, 2596 to be brought into focus from the patient's point of view.
  • In one arrangement, the support member 2616 is a threaded rod and each of the first and second target fixtures 2620, 2624 has a corresponding threaded through hole to receive the threaded support member 2616. Preferably an adjustment device, such as a knob 2628 is coupled with the threaded support member 2616 so that the support member 2616 may be rotated. The knob 2628 may be knurled to make it easier to grasp and rotate. Rotation of the support member 2616 causes the first and second target fixtures 2620, 2624 to translate on the support member 2616 along the outside of the housing 2520. The movement of the first and second target fixtures 2620, 2624 provides a corresponding movement of the first and second targets 2592, 2596 within the housing 2520.
  • In one embodiment a quick release mechanism 2640 is provided to enable the first and second target fixtures 2620, 2624 selectively to clamp and to release the support member 2616. The quick release mechanism 2640 can be a spring loaded clamp that causes the through holes formed in the first and second target fixtures 2620, 2624 to open to create a gap through which the support member 2616 can pass. When the first and second target fixtures 2620, 2624 are removed from the support member 2616, the can be quickly moved to another position on the support member 2616. After rapid repositioning, fine positioning of the first and second target fixtures 2620, 2624 may be achieved with by turning the support member 2616.
  • As discussed above, the alignment device 2404 also includes a marking module 2508 that is similar to the marking module 2024 described above, except as set forth below. The marking module includes a housing 2642 that is generally rigid and that defines a hollow space within the housing. The housing 2642 includes a first end 2644 that is coupled with the image routing module 2512 and a second end 2648 that is closed by an end plate 2652. In one embodiment, the housing 2642 includes a first portion 2656 and a second portion 2660. The first and second portions 2656, 2660 preferably are configured to be disengaged from each other so that components located in the hollow space defined in the housing 2642 to be accessed. Such rapid access facilitates servicing and reconfiguring of the components located in the housing 2642. The first portion 2656 extends between the first end 2644 and a midpoint of the housing 2642. The second portion 2660 extends between the first portion 2656 and the second end 2648 of the housing 2642. In one embodiment, the first portion 2656 has a male member with external threads and the second portion 2660 has a female member with internal thread such that the first and second portions 2656, 2660 may be engaged with and disengaged from each other by way of the threads.
  • As discussed above, the housing 2642 provides a space in which one or more components may be positioned. In the illustrated embodiment, the housing 2642 encloses a marking target illuminator 2680 and a marking target 2684.
  • The marking target illuminator 2680 may be a suitable source of radiant energy, e.g., a light source, such as an incandescent light, a fluorescent light, a light-emitting diode, or other source of radiant energy. As with the target illuminators discussed above, the marking target illuminator 2680 may include or be coupled with suitable optical components to process the light generated thereby in a useful manner, e.g., by providing one or more filters to modify the light, e.g., by allowing a subset of the spectrum of light energy emitted by the light source (e.g., one or more bands of the electromagnetic spectrum) to be transmitted toward the marking target 2684.
  • In the illustrated embodiment, the marking target illuminator 2680 is located near the end plate 2652. A power cable 2688 (or other electrical conveyance) that extends from the end plate 2652 electrically connects the marking target illuminator 2680 to a power source. In one arrangement, the power source forms a portion of the illuminator control device 2500 to which the power cable 2688 is connected. Power may be from any suitable power source, e.g., from a battery or electrical outlet of suitable voltage.
  • As discussed above, the illuminator control device 2500 enables the surgeon (or other person assisting in a procedure) to control the amount of energy supplied to the target illuminator 2680 in the marking module 2508. The illuminator control device 2500 has a brightness control so that the brightness of the marking target illumination 2680 can be adjusted. The brightness control may be actuated in a suitable manner, such as by a brightness control knob 2692. The brightness control may be similar to that discussed above in connection with the brightness control of the target illuminator 2560. The illuminator control device 2500 may also have an on-off switch 2696 configured to selectively apply and cut off power to the marking target illuminator 2680. The on-off switch 2696 may be operated manually, automatically, or in a partially manual and partially automatic mode. Any of the power supply, the brightness control, and the on-off switch may be implemented wirelessly in various other embodiments.
  • In one embodiment, the marking target 2684 is a reticle, e.g., made of glass, with an annular shape formed thereon. For example, the annular shape formed on the marking target 2684 may be a substantially clear annulus surrounded by opaque regions. In this configuration, light directed toward the marking target 2684 interacts with the marking target 2684 to produce and annular image. In another embodiment, the marking target 2684 may be a substantially clear reticle with an opaque shape, such as an opaque annular shape. The annular image is directed into the image routing device 2684, as discussed further below. The marking target 2684 may be housed in a fixture 2718 that is removable, e.g., when the first portion 2656 and the second portion 2660 of the housing 2642 are decoupled. The first portion 2656 of the housing 2642 is configured to engage the fixture 2718 to relatively precisely position the marking target 2684 with respect to an axis of the housing 2642.
  • FIG. 59 shows the image routing module 2512 in greater detail. The image routing module 2512 is primarily useful for routing light that conveys the target and marking images to an eye of a patient. The image routing module 2512 provides flexibility in the positioning of the various components of the alignment device 2404. For example, the image routing module 2512 enables the housing 2520 and the housing 2556 to be generally in the same plane and positioned generally parallel to each other. This provides a relatively compact arrangement for the alignment device 2404, which is advantageous in the surgical setting because, as discussed above, it is desirable for the surgeon to be as close to the surgical site as possible. In addition, the compact arrangement of the alignment device 2404 minimizes or at least reduces the extent to which the alignment device 2404 interferes with free movement of the surgeon and others assisting the surgeon.
  • FIGS. 58 and 59 shows that the image routing module 2512 includes a housing 2720 that is coupled with the first end 2524 and the housing 2520 and with the first end 2644 of the housing 2642. A space defined within the housing 2720 houses a first optic device 2728 and a second optic device 2732. The first optic device 2728 has a reflective surface that faces the marking target 2684 and is configured to reflect light conveying an image of the marking target 2684 toward the second optic device 2732. The first optic device 2728 may be a mirror. The second optic device 2732 has a surface 2736 that faces the first optic device 2728 and is reflective to light from the first optic device 2728. The second optic device 2732 thus reflects light that is directed toward it by the first optic device 2728.
  • The image routing module 2512 also may include a third optic device 2740 and a frame 2744 coupled with the housing 2720. The frame 2744 is configured to position and orient the third optic device 2740 with respect to the housing 2720. In one embodiment, the third optic device 2740 is a beamsplitter and the frame 2744 holds the third optic device 2740 at about a forty-five degree angle with respect to the axis 2520. In this position, the third optic device 2740 interacts with light reflected by the first surface 2736 of the second optic device 2732. The third optic device 2740 may operate in a manner similar to the beamsplitter 2080 of FIG. 55.
  • The second optic device 2732 is configured to be transparent to substantially all of the light conveying an image along the axis 2536 such that the image conveyed along the axis 2536 may be directed to the third optic device 2740 and thereafter to an eye of a surgeon, as discussed about in connection with FIG. 55.
  • Although the image routing device is shown with first, second, and third optic devices 2728, 2732, 2740 to route light conveying images in a particular manner, one skilled in the art will recognize that the image routing device 2512 could have more or fewer optic devices that route the image, depending on the desired geometry and compactness of the alignment device 2404.
  • A variation of the alignment device 2404 provides a marking module with a secondary marking module not routed through the optics of the alignment device 2404. In one embodiment, the secondary marking module includes a source of radiant energy, e.g., a laser or other light source. The source of radiant energy is configured to direct a plurality of spots (e.g., three, four, or more than four spots) onto the patient's eye. The spots indicate positions on the eye that correlate with an edge of a mask when the mask is in the correct position with respect to the line-of-sight of the eye 2064. The spots can be aligned with the projected marking target such that they hit at a selected location on the projected marking target (e.g., circumferentially spaced locations on the inner edge, on the outer edge, or on both the inner and outer edges). At least a portion of the secondary marking module is coupled with the frame 2744 in one embodiment. A laser of the secondary marking module could be attached to the frame 2744 and suspended therefrom, oriented downward toward the patient's eye. As discussed above, this arrangement provides a secondary device for marking the proper location of a mask with respect to a patient's line of sight after the line of sight has been identified.
  • Although various exemplary embodiments of apparatuses and methods for aligning a patient's line-of-sight with an axis of an instrument in connection with the application of a mask have been discussed hereinabove, it should be apparent to those skilled in the art that various changes and modifications can be made which will achieve at least some of the advantages of the invention without departing from, the true scope of the invention. These and other obvious modifications are intended to be covered by the appended claims.
  • V. Masks Configured to Reduce the Visibility of Diffraction Patterns
  • Many of the foregoing masks can be used to improve the depth of focus of a patient. Various additional mask embodiments are discussed below. Some of the embodiments described below include nutrient transport structures that are configured to enhance or maintain nutrient flow between adjacent tissues by facilitating transport of nutrients across the mask. The nutrient transport structures of some of the embodiments described below are configured to at least substantially prevent nutrient depletion in adjacent tissues. The nutrient transport structures can decrease negative effects due to the presence of the mask in adjacent corneal layers when the mask is implanted in the cornea, increasing the longevity of the masks. The inventors have discovered that certain arrangements of nutrient transport structures generate diffraction patterns that interfere with the vision improving effect of the masks described herein. Accordingly, certain masks are described herein that include nutrient transport structures that do not generate diffraction patterns or otherwise interfere with the vision enhancing effects of the mask embodiments.
  • FIGS. 60-61 show one embodiment of a mask 3000 configured to increase depth of focus of an eye of a patient suffering from presbyopia. The mask 3000 is similar to the masks hereinbefore described, except as set forth below. The mask 3000 is configured to be applied to an eye of a patient, e.g., by being implanted in the cornea of the patient. The mask 3000 may be implanted within the cornea in any suitable manner, such as those discussed above in connection with FIGS. 53A-54C.
  • In one embodiment, the mask 3000 includes a body 3004 that has an anterior surface 3008 and a posterior surface 3012. In one embodiment, the body 3004 is capable of substantially maintaining natural nutrient flow between the first corneal layer and the second corneal layer. In one embodiment, the material is selected to maintain at least about ninety-six percent of the natural flow of at least one nutrient (e.g., glucose) between a first corneal layer (e.g., the layer 1410) and a second corneal layer (e.g., the layer 1430). The body 3004 may be formed of any suitable material, including at least one of an open cell foam material, an expanded solid material, and a substantially opaque material. In one embodiment, the material used to form the body 3004 has relatively high water content.
  • In one embodiment, the mask 3000 includes and a nutrient transport structure 3016. The nutrient transport structure 3016 may comprise a plurality of holes 3020. The holes 3020 are shown on only a portion of the mask 3000, but the holes 3020 preferably are located throughout the body 3004 in one embodiment. In one embodiment, the holes 3020 are arranged in a hex pattern, which is illustrated by a plurality of locations 3020′ in FIG. 62A. As discussed below, a plurality of locations may be defined and later used in the later formation of a plurality of holes 3020 on the mask 3000. The mask 3000 has an outer periphery 3024 that defines an outer edge of the body 3004. In some embodiments, the mask 3000 includes an aperture 3028 at least partially surrounded by the outer periphery 3024 and a non-transmissive portion 3032 located between the outer periphery 3024 and the aperture 3028.
  • Preferably the mask 3000 is symmetrical, e.g., symmetrical about a mask axis 3036. In one embodiment, the outer periphery 3024 of the mask 3000 is circular and has a diameter of less than about 6 mm in one embodiment. In another embodiment, the mask is circular and has a diameter in the range of 4 to 6 mm. In another embodiment, the mask 3000 is circular and has a diameter of less than 4 mm. The outer periphery 3024 has a diameter of about 3.8 mm in another embodiment. In some embodiments, masks that are asymmetrical or that are not symmetrical about a mask axis provide benefits, such as enabling a mask to be located or maintained in a selected position with respect to the anatomy of the eye.
  • The body 3004 of the mask 3000 may be configured to coupled with a particular anatomical region of the eye. The body 3004 of the mask 3000 may be configured to conform to the native anatomy of the region of the eye in which it is to be applied. For example, where the mask 3000 is to be coupled with an ocular structure that has curvature, the body 3004 may be provided with an amount of curvature along the mask axis 3036 that corresponds to the anatomical curvature. For example, one environment in which the mask 3000 may be deployed is within the cornea of the eye of a patient. The cornea has an amount of curvature that varies from person to person about a substantially constant mean value within an identifiable group, e.g., adults. When applying the mask 3000 within the cornea, at least one of the anterior and posterior surfaces 3008, 3012 of the mask 3000 may be provided with an amount of curvature corresponding to that of the layers of the cornea between which the mask 3000 is applied.
  • In some embodiments, the mask 3000 has a desired amount of optical power. Optical power may be provided by configuring the at least one of the anterior and posterior surfaces 3008, 3012 with curvature. In one embodiment, the anterior and posterior surfaces 3008, 3012 are provided with different amounts of curvature. In this embodiment, the mask 3000 has varying thickness from the outer periphery 3024 to the aperture 3028.
  • In one embodiment, one of the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012 of the body 3004 is substantially planar. In one planar embodiment, very little or no uniform curvature can be measured across the planar surface. In another embodiment, both of the anterior and posterior surfaces 3008, 3012 are substantially planar. In one embodiment, the body 3004 of the mask 3000 has a thickness 3038 of between about 5 micron and about 10 micron. In one embodiment, the thickness 3038 of the mask 3000 is about 5 micron. In another embodiment, the thickness 3038 of the mask 3000 is about 8 micron. In another embodiment, the thickness 3038 of the mask 3000 is about 10 micron.
  • Thinner masks generally are more suitable for applications wherein the mask 3000 is implanted at a relatively shallow location in (e.g., close to the anterior surface of) the cornea. In thinner masks, the body 3004 may be sufficiently flexible such that it can take on the curvature of the structures with which it is coupled without negatively affecting the optical performance of the mask 3000. In one application, the mask 3000 is configured to be implanted about 5 um beneath the anterior surface of the cornea. In another application, the mask 3000 is configured to be implanted about 65 um beneath the anterior surface of the cornea. In another application, the mask 3000 is configured to be implanted about 125 um beneath the anterior surface of the cornea. Further details regarding implanting the mask 3000 in the cornea are discussed above in connection with FIGS. 53A-54C.
  • A substantially planar mask has several advantages over a non-planar mask. For example, a substantially planar mask can be fabricated more easily than one that has to be formed to a particular curvature. In particular, the process steps involved in inducing curvature in the mask 3000 can be eliminated. Also, a substantially planar mask may be more amenable to use on a wider distribution of the patient population (or among different sub-groups of a broader patient population) because the substantially planar mask uses the curvature of each patient's cornea to induce the appropriate amount of curvature in the body 3004.
  • In some embodiments, the mask 3000 is configured specifically for the manner and location of coupling with the eye. In particular, the mask 3000 may be larger if applied over the eye as a contact lens or may be smaller if applied within the eye posterior of the cornea, e.g., proximate a surface of the lens of the eye. As discussed above, the thickness 3038 of the body 3004 of the mask 3000 may be varied based on where the mask 3000 is implanted. For implantation at deeper levels within the cornea, a thicker mask may be advantageous. Thicker masks are advantageous in some applications. For example, they are generally easier to handle, and therefore are easier to fabricate and to implant. Thicker masks may benefit more from having a preformed curvature than thinner masks. A thicker mask could be configured to have little or no curvature prior to implantation if it is configured to conform to the curvature of the native anatomy when applied.
  • The aperture 3028 is configured to transmit substantially all incident light along the mask axis 3036. The non-transmissive portion 3032 surrounds at least a portion of the aperture 3028 and substantially prevents transmission of incident light thereon. As discussed in connection with the above masks, the aperture 3028 may be a through-hole in the body 3004 or a substantially light transmissive (e.g., transparent) portion thereof. The aperture 3028 of the mask 3000 generally is defined within the outer periphery 3024 of the mask 3000. The aperture 3028 may take any of suitable configurations, such as those described above in connection with FIGS. 6-42.
  • In one embodiment, the aperture 3028 is substantially circular and is substantially centered in the mask 3000. The size of the aperture 3028 may be any size that is effective to increase the depth of focus of an eye of a patient suffering from presbyopia. For example, the aperture 3028 can be circular, having a diameter of less than about 2.2 mm in one embodiment. In another embodiment, the diameter of the aperture is between about 1.8 mm and about 2.2 mm. In another embodiment, the aperture 3028 is circular and has a diameter of about 1.8 mm or less.
  • The non-transmissive portion 3032 is configured to prevent transmission of radiant energy through the mask 3000. For example, in one embodiment, the non-transmissive portion 3032 prevents transmission of substantially all of at least a portion of the spectrum of the incident radiant energy. In one embodiment, the non-transmissive portion 3032 is configured to prevent transmission of substantially all visible light, e.g., radiant energy in the electromagnetic spectrum that is visible to the human eye. The non-transmissive portion 3032 may substantially prevent transmission of radiant energy outside the range visible to humans in some embodiments.
  • As discussed above in connection with FIG. 3, preventing transmission of light through the non-transmissive portion 3032 decreases the amount of light that reaches the retina and the fovea that would not converge at the retina and fovea to form a sharp image. As discussed above in connection with FIG. 4, the size of the aperture 3028 is such that the light transmitted therethrough generally converges at the retina or fovea. Accordingly, a much sharper image is presented to the eye than would otherwise be the case without the mask 3000.
  • In one embodiment, the non-transmissive portion 3032 prevents transmission of about 90 percent of incident light. In another embodiment, the non-transmissive portion 3032 prevents transmission of about 92 percent of all incident light. The non-transmissive portion 3032 of the mask 3000 may be configured to be opaque to prevent the transmission of light. As used herein the term “opaque” is intended to be a broad term meaning capable of preventing the transmission of radiant energy, e.g., light energy, and also covers structures and arrangements that absorb or otherwise block all or less than all or at least a substantial portion of the light. In one embodiment, at least a portion of the body 3004 is configured to be opaque to more than 99 percent of the light incident thereon.
  • As discussed above, the non-transmissive portion 3032 may be configured to prevent transmission of light without absorbing the incident light. For example, the mask 3000 could be made reflective or could be made to interact with the light in a more complex manner, as discussed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,554,424, issued Apr. 29, 2003, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • As discussed above, the mask 3000 also has a nutrient transport structure that in some embodiments comprises the plurality of holes 3020. The presence of the plurality of holes 3020 (or other transport structure) may affect the transmission of light through the non-transmissive portion 3032 by potentially allowing more light to pass through the mask 3000. In one embodiment, the non-transmissive portion 3032 is configured to absorb about 99 percent or more of the incident light from passing through the mask 3000 without holes 3020 being present. The presence of the plurality of holes 3020 allows more light to pass through the non-transmissive portion 3032 such that only about 92 percent of the light incident on the non-transmissive portion 3032 is prevented from passing through the non-transmissive portion 3032. The holes 3020 may reduce the benefit of the aperture 3028 on the depth of focus of the eye by allowing more light to pass through the non-transmissive portion to the retina.
  • Reduction in the depth of focus benefit of the aperture 3028 due to the holes 3020 is balanced by the nutrient transmission benefits of the holes 3020. In one embodiment, the transport structure 3016 (e.g., the holes 3020) is capable of substantially maintaining natural nutrient flow from a first corneal layer (i.e., one that is adjacent to the anterior surface 3008 of the mask 3000) to the second corneal layer (i.e., one that is adjacent to the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000). The plurality of holes 3020 are configured to enable nutrients to pass through the mask 3000 between the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012. As discussed above, the holes 3020 of the mask 3000 shown in FIG. 60 may be located anywhere on the mask 3000. Other mask embodiments described hereinbelow locate substantially all of the nutrient transport structure in one or more regions of a mask.
  • The holes 3020 of FIG. 60 extends at least partially between the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000. In one embodiment, each of the holes 3020 includes a hole entrance 3060 and a hole exit 3064. The hole entrance 3060 is located adjacent to the anterior surface 3008 of the mask 3000. The hole exit 3064 is located adjacent to the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000. In one embodiment, each of the holes 3020 extends the entire distance between the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000.
  • The transport structure 3016 is configured to maintain the transport of one or more nutrients across the mask 3000. The transport structure 3016 of the mask 3000 provides sufficient flow of one or more nutrients across the mask 3000 to prevent depletion of nutrients at least at one of the first and second corneal layers (e.g., the layers 1410 and 1430). One nutrient of particular importance to the viability of the adjacent corneal layers is glucose. The transport structure 3016 of the mask 3000 provides sufficient flow of glucose across the mask 3000 between the first and second corneal layers to prevent glucose depletion that would harm the adjacent corneal tissue. Thus, the mask 3000 is capable of substantially maintaining nutrient flow (e.g., glucose flow) between adjacent corneal layers. In one embodiment, the nutrient transport structure 3016 is configured to prevent depletion of more than about 4 percent of glucose (or other biological substance) in adjacent tissue of at least one of the first corneal layer and the second corneal layer.
  • The holes 3020 may be configured to maintain the transport of nutrients across the mask 3000. In one embodiment, the holes 3020 are formed with a diameter of about 0.015 mm or more. In another embodiment, the holes have a diameter of about 0.020 mm. In another embodiment, the holes have a diameter of about 0.025 mm. In another embodiment, the holes 3020 have a diameter in the range of about 0.020 mm to about 0.029 mm. The number of holes in the plurality of holes 3020 is selected such that the sum of the surface areas of the hole entrances 3060 of all the holes 3000 comprises about 5 percent or more of surface area of the anterior surface 3008 of the mask 3000. In another embodiment, the number of holes 3020 is selected such that the sum of the surface areas of the hole exits 3064 of all the holes 3020 comprises about 5 percent or more of surface area of the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3000. In another embodiment, the number of holes 3020 is selected such that the sum of the surface areas of the hole exits 3064 of all the holes 3020 comprises about 5 percent or more of surface area of the posterior surface 3012 of the mask 3012 and the sum of the surface areas of the hole entrances 3060 of all the holes 3020 comprises about 5 percent or more of surface area of the anterior surface 3008 of the mask 3000.
  • Each of the holes 3020 may have a relatively constant cross-sectional area. In one embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of each of the holes 3020 is substantially circular. Each of the holes 3020 may comprise a cylinder extending between the anterior surface 3008 and the posterior surface 3012.
  • The relative position of the holes 3020 is of interest in some embodiments. As discussed above, the holes 3020 of the mask 3000 are hex-packed, e.g., arranged in a hex pattern. In particular, in this embodiment, each of the holes 3020 is separated from the adjacent holes 3020 by a substantially constant distance, sometimes referred to herein as a hole pitch 3072. In one embodiment, the hole pitch 3072 is about 0.062 mm.
  • The embodiment of FIG. 60 advantageously enables nutrients to flow from the first corneal layer to the second corneal layer. The inventors have discovered that negative visual effects can arise due to the presence of the transport structure 3016. For example, in some cases, a hex packed arrangement of the holes 3020 can generate diffraction patterns visible to the patient. For example, patients might observe a plurality of spots, e.g., six spots, surrounding a central light with holes 3020 having a hex patterned.
  • The inventors have discovered a variety of techniques that produce advantageous arrangements of a transport structure such that diffraction patterns and other deleterious visual effects do not substantially inhibit other visual benefits of a mask. In one embodiment, where diffraction effects would be observable, the nutrient transport structure is arranged to spread the diffracted light out uniformly across the image to eliminate observable spots. In another embodiment, the nutrient transport structure employs a pattern that substantially eliminates diffraction patterns or pushes the patterns to the periphery of the image.
  • FIG. 62B-62C show two embodiments of patterns of holes 4020 that may be applied to a mask that is otherwise substantially similar to the mask 3000. The holes 4020 of the hole patterns of FIGS. 62A-62B are spaced from each other by a random hole spacing or hole pitch. In other embodiments discussed below, holes are spaced from each other by a non-uniform amount, e.g., not a random amount. In one embodiment, the holes 4020 have a substantially uniform shape (cylindrical shafts having a substantially constant cross-sectional area). FIG. 62C illustrates a plurality of holes 4020 separated by a random spacing, wherein the density of the holes is greater than that of FIG. 62B. Generally, the higher the percentage of the mask body that has holes the more the mask will transport nutrients in a manner similar to the native tissue. One way to provide a higher percentage of hole area is to increase the density of the holes. Increase hole density can also permit smaller holes to achieve the same nutrient transport as is achieved by less dense, larger holes.
  • FIG. 63A shows a portion of another mask 4000 a that is substantially similar to the mask 3000, except as set forth below. The mask 4000 a has a plurality of holes 4020 a. A substantial number of the holes 4020 a have a non-uniform size. The holes 4020 a may be uniform in cross-sectional shape. The cross-sectional shape of the holes 4020 a is substantially circular in one embodiment. The holes 4020 a may be circular in shape and have the same diameter from a hole entrance to a hole exit, but are otherwise non-uniform in at least one aspect, e.g., in size. It may be preferable to vary the size of a substantial number of the holes by a random amount. In another embodiment, the holes 4020 a are non-uniform (e.g., random) in size and are separated by a non-uniform (e.g., a random) spacing.
  • FIG. 63B illustrates another embodiment of a mask 4000 b that is substantially similar to the mask 3000, except as set forth below. The mask 4000 b includes a body 4004 b. The mask 4000 b has a transport structure 4016 b that includes a plurality of holes 4020 b with a non-uniform facet orientation. In particular, each of the holes 4020 b has a hole entrance 4060 b that may be located at an anterior surface 4008 b of the mask 4000 b. A facet 4062 b of the hole entrance 4060 b is defined by a portion of the body 4004 b of the mask 4000 b surrounding the hole entrance 4060 b. The facet 4062 b is the shape of the hole entrance 4060 b at the anterior surface 4008 b. In one embodiment, most or all the facets 4062 b have an elongate shape, e.g., an oblong shape, with a long axis and a short axis that is perpendicular to the long axis. The facets 4062 b may be substantially uniform in shape. In one embodiment, the orientation of facets 4062 b is not uniform. For example, a substantial number of the facets 4062 may have a non-uniform orientation. In one arrangement, a substantial number of the facets 4062 have a random orientation. In some embodiments, the facets 4062 b are non-uniform (e.g., random) in shape and are non-uniform (e.g., random) in orientation.
  • Other embodiments may be provided that vary at least one aspect, including one or more of the foregoing aspects, of a plurality of holes to reduce the tendency of the holes to produce visible diffraction patterns or patterns that otherwise reduce the vision improvement that may be provided by a mask with an aperture, such as any of those described above. For example, in one embodiment, the hole size, shape, and orientation of at least a substantial number of the holes may be varied randomly or may be otherwise non-uniform.
  • FIG. 64 shows another embodiment of a mask 4200 that is substantially similar to any of the masks hereinbefore described, except as set forth below. The mask 4200 includes a body 4204. The body 4204 has an outer peripheral region 4205, an inner peripheral region 4206, and a hole region 4207. The hole region 4207 is located between the outer peripheral region 4205 and the outer peripheral region 4206. The body 4204 may also include an aperture region, where the aperture (discussed below) is not a through hole. The mask 4200 also includes a nutrient transport structure 4216. In one embodiment, the nutrient transport structure includes a plurality of holes 4220. At least a substantial portion of the holes 4220 (e.g., all of the holes) are located in the hole region 4207. As above, only a portion of the nutrient structure 4216 is shown for simplicity. But it should be understood that the hole 4220 may be located through the hole region 4207.
  • The outer peripheral region 4205 may extend from an outer periphery 4224 of the mask 4200 to a selected outer circumference 4226 of the mask 4200. The selected outer circumference 4225 of the mask 4200 is located a selected radial distance from the outer periphery 4224 of the mask 4200. In one embodiment, the selected outer circumference 4225 of the mask 4200 is located about 0.05 mm from the outer periphery 4224 of the mask 4200.
  • The inner peripheral region 4206 may extend from an inner location, e.g., an inner periphery 4226 adjacent an aperture 4228 of the mask 4200 to a selected inner circumference 4227 of the mask 4200. The selected inner circumference 4227 of the mask 4200 is located a selected radial distance from the inner periphery 4226 of the mask 4200. In one embodiment, the selected inner circumference 4227 of the mask 4200 is located about 0.05 mm from the inner periphery 4226.
  • The mask 4200 may be the product of a process that involves random selection of a plurality of locations and formation of holes on the mask 4200 corresponding to the locations. As discussed further below, the method can also involve determining whether the selected locations satisfy one or more criteria. For example, one criterion prohibits all, at least a majority, or at least a substantial portion of the holes from being formed at locations that correspond to the inner or outer peripheral regions 4205, 4206. Another criterion prohibits all, at least a majority, or at least a substantial portion of the holes 4220 from being formed too close to each other. For example, such a criterion could be used to assure that a wall thickness, e.g., the shortest distance between adjacent holes, is not less than a predetermined amount. In one embodiment, the wall thickness is prevented from being less than about 20 microns.
  • In a variation of the embodiment of FIG. 64, the outer peripheral region 4205 is eliminated and the hole region 4207 extends from the inner peripheral region 4206 to an outer periphery 4224. In another variation of the embodiment of FIG. 64, the inner peripheral region 4206 is eliminated and the hole region 4207 extends from the outer peripheral region 4205 to an inner periphery 4226.
  • FIG. 61B shows a mask 4300 that is similar to the mask 3000 except as set forth below. The mask 4300 includes a body 4304 that has an anterior surface 4308 and a posterior surface 4312. The mask 4300 also includes a nutrient transport structure 4316 that, in one embodiment, includes a plurality of holes 4320. The holes 4320 are formed in the body 4304 so that nutrient transport is provided but transmission of radiant energy (e.g., light) to the retinal locations adjacent the fovea through the holes 4304 is substantially prevented. In particular, the holes 4304 are formed such that when the eye with which the mask 4300 is coupled is directed at an object to be viewed, light conveying the image of that object that enters the holes 4320 cannot exit the holes along a path ending near the fovea.
  • In one embodiment, each of the holes 4320 has a hole entrance 4360 and a hole exit 4364. Each of the holes 4320 extends along a transport axis 4366. The transport axis 4366 is formed to substantially prevent propagation of light from the anterior surface 4308 to the posterior surface 4312 through the holes 4320. In one embodiment, at least a substantial number of the holes 4320 have a size to the transport axis 4366 that is less than a thickness of the mask 4300. In another embodiment, at least a substantial number of the holes 4320 have a longest dimension of a perimeter at least at one of the anterior or posterior surfaces 4308, 4312 (e.g., a facet) that is less than a thickness of the mask 4300. In some embodiments, the transport axis 4366 is formed at an angle with respect to a mask axis 4336 that substantially prevents propagation of light from the anterior surface 4308 to the posterior surface 4312 through the hole 4320. In another embodiment, the transport axis 4366 of one or more holes 4320 is formed at an angle with respect to the mask axis 4336 that is large enough to prevent the projection of most of the hole entrance 4360 from overlapping the hole exit 4364.
  • In one embodiment, the hole 4320 is circular in cross-section and has a diameter between about 0.5 micron and about 8 micron and the transport axis 4366 is between 5 and 85 degrees. The length of each of the holes 4320 (e.g., the distance between the anterior surface 4308 and the posterior surface 4312) is between about 8 and about 92 micron. In another embodiment, the diameter of the holes 4320 is about 5 micron and the transport angle is about 40 degrees or more. As the length of the holes 4320 increases it may be desirable to include additional holes 4320. In some cases, additional holes 4320 counteract the tendency of longer holes to reduce the amount of nutrient flow through the mask 4300.
  • FIG. 61C shows another embodiment of a mask 4400 similar to the mask 3000, except as set forth below. The mask 4400 includes a body 4404 that has an anterior surface 4408, a first mask layer 4410 adjacent the anterior surface 44008, a posterior surface 4412, a second mask layer 4414 adjacent the posterior surface 4412, and a third layer 4415 located between the first mask layer 4410 and the second mask layer 4414. The mask 4400 also includes a nutrient transport structure 4416 that, in one embodiment, includes a plurality of holes 4420. The holes 4420 are formed in the body 4404 so that nutrient are transported across the mask, as discussed above, but transmission of radiant energy (e.g., light) to retinal locations adjacent the fovea through the holes 4404 is substantially prevented. In particular, the holes 4404 are formed such that when the eye with which the mask 4400 is coupled is directed at an object to be viewed, light conveying the image of that object that enters the holes 4420 cannot exit the holes along a path ending near the fovea.
  • In one embodiment, at least one of the holes 4420 extends along a non-linear path that substantially prevents propagation of light from the anterior surface to the posterior surface through the at least one hole. In one embodiment, the mask 4400 includes a first hole portion 4420 a that extends along a first transport axis 4466 a, the second mask layer 4414 includes a second hole portion 4420 b extending along a second transport axis 4466 b, and the third mask layer 4415 includes a third hole portion 4420 c extending along a third transport axis 4466 c. The first, second, and third transport axes 4466 a, 4466 b, 4466 c preferably are not collinear. In one embodiment, the first and second transport axes 4466 a, 4466 b are parallel but are off-set by a first selected amount. In one embodiment, the second and third transport axes 4466 b, 4466 c are parallel but are off-set by a second selected amount. In the illustrated embodiment, each of the transport axes 44466 a, 4466 b, 4466 c are off-set by one-half of the width of the hole portions 4420 a, 4420 b, 4420 c. Thus, the inner-most edge of the hole portion 4420 a is spaced from the axis 4336 by a distance that is equal to or greater than the distance of the outer-most edge of the hole portion 4420 b from the axis 4336. This spacing substantially prevents light from passing through the holes 4420 from the anterior surface 4408 to the posterior surface 4412.
  • In one embodiment, the first and second amounts are selected to substantially prevent the transmission of light therethrough. The first and second amounts of off-set may be achieved in any suitable fashion. One technique for forming the hole portions 4420 a, 4420 b, 4420 c with the desired off-set is to provide a layered structure. As discussed above, the mask 4400 may include the first layer 4410, the second layer 4414, and the third layer 4415. FIG. 61C shows that the mask 4400 can be formed with three layers. In another embodiment, the mask 4400 is formed of more than three layers. Providing more layers may advantageously further decrease the tendency of light to be transmitted through the holes 4420 onto the retina. This has the benefit of reducing the likelihood that a patient will observe or otherwise perceive a patter that will detract from the vision benefits of the mask 4400. A further benefit is that less light will pass through the mask 4400, thereby enhancing the depth of focus increase due to the pin-hole sized aperture formed therein.
  • In any of the foregoing mask embodiments, the body of the mask may be formed of a material selected to provide adequate nutrient transport and to substantially prevent negative optic effects, such as diffraction, as discussed above. In various embodiments, the masks are formed of an open cell foam material. In another embodiment, the masks are formed of an expanded solid material.
  • As discussed above in connection with FIGS. 62B and 62C, various random patterns of holes may advantageously be provided for nutrient transport. In some embodiment, it may be sufficient to provide regular patterns that are non-uniform in some aspect. Non-uniform aspects to the holes may be provided by any suitable technique.
  • In a first step of one technique, a plurality of locations 4020′ is generated. The locations 4020′ are a series of coordinates that may comprise a non-uniform pattern or a regular pattern. The locations 4020′ may be randomly generated or may be related by a mathematical relationship (e.g., separated by a fixed spacing or by an amount that can be mathematically defined). In one embodiment, the locations are selected to be separated by a constant pitch or spacing and may be hex packed.
  • In a second step, a subset of the locations among the plurality of locations 4020′ is modified to maintain a performance characteristic of the mask. The performance characteristic may be any performance characteristic of the mask. For example, the performance characteristic may relate to the structural integrity of the mask. Where the plurality of locations 4020′ is selected at random, the process of modifying the subset of locations may make the resulting pattern of holes in the mask a “pseudo-random” pattern.
  • Where a hex packed pattern of locations (such as the locations 3020′ of FIG. 62A) is selected in the first step, the subset of locations may be moved with respect to their initial positions as selected in the first step. In one embodiment, each of the locations in the subset of locations is moved by an amount equal to a fraction of the hole spacing. For example, each of the locations in the subset of locations may be moved by an amount equal to one-quarter of the hole spacing. Where the subset of locations is moved by a constant amount, the locations that are moved preferably are randomly or pseudo-randomly selected. In another embodiment, the subset of location is moved by a random or a pseudo-random amount.
  • In one technique, an outer peripheral region is defined that extends between the outer periphery of the mask and a selected radial distance of about 0.05 mm from the outer periphery. In another embodiment, an inner peripheral region is defined that extends between an aperture of the mask and a selected radial distance of about 0.05 mm from the aperture. In another embodiment, an outer peripheral region is defined that extends between the outer periphery of the mask and a selected radial distance and an inner peripheral region is defined that extends between the aperture of the mask and a selected radial distance from the aperture. In one technique, the subset of location is modified by excluding those locations that would correspond to holes formed in the inner peripheral region or the outer peripheral region. By excluding locations in at least one of the outer peripheral region and the inner peripheral region, the strength of the mask in these regions is increased. Several benefits are provided by stronger inner and outer peripheral regions. For example, the mask may be easier to handle during manufacturing or when being applied to a patient without causing damage to the mask.
  • In another embodiment, the subset of locations is modified by comparing the separation of the holes with minimum and or maximum limits. For example, it may be desirable to assure that no two locations are closer than a minimum value. In some embodiments this is important to assure that the wall thickness, which corresponds to the separation between adjacent holes, is no less than a minimum amount. As discussed above, the minimum value of separation is about 20 microns in one embodiment, thereby providing a wall thickness of no less than about 20 microns.
  • In another embodiment, the subset of locations is modified and/or the pattern of location is augmented to maintain an optical characteristic of the mask. For example, the optical characteristic may be opacity and the subset of locations may be modified to maintain the opacity of a non-transmissive portion of a mask. In another embodiment, the subset of locations may be modified by equalizing the density of holes in a first region of the body compared with the density of holes in a second region of the body. For example, the locations corresponding to the first and second regions of the non-transmissive portion of the mask may be identified. In one embodiment, the first region and the second region are arcuate regions (e.g., wedges) of substantially equal area. A first areal density of locations (e.g., locations per square inch) is calculated for the locations corresponding to the first region and a second areal density of locations is calculated for the locations corresponding to the second region. In one embodiment, at least one location is added to either the first or the second region based on the comparison of the first and second areal densities. In another embodiment, at least one location is removed based on the comparison of the first and second areal densities.
  • The subset of locations may be modified to maintain nutrient transport of the mask. In one embodiment, the subset of location is modified to maintain glucose transport.
  • In a third step, a hole is formed in a body of a mask at locations corresponding to the pattern of locations as modified, augmented, or modified and augmented. The holes are configured to substantially maintain natural nutrient flow from the first layer to the second layer without producing visible diffraction patterns.
  • VI. Further Methods of Treating a Patient
  • As discussed above in, various techniques are particularly suited for treating a patient by applying masks such as those disclosed herein to an eye. For example, in some embodiments, the surgical system 2000 of FIG. 55 employs a marking module 2024 that provides a visual cue in the form of a projected image for a surgeon during a procedure for applying a mask. In addition, some techniques for treating a patient involve positioning an implant with the aid of a marked reference point. These methods are illustrated by FIGS. 65-66B.
  • In one method, a patient is treated by placing an implant 5000 in a cornea 5004. A corneal flap 5008 is lifted to expose a surface in the cornea 5004 (e.g., an intracorneal surface). Any suitable tool or technique may be used to lift the corneal flap 5008 to expose a surface in the cornea 5004. For example, a blade (e.g., a microkeratome), a laser or an electrosurgical tool could be used to form a corneal flap. A reference point 5012 on the cornea 5004 is identified. The reference point 5012 thereafter is marked in one technique, as discussed further below. The implant 5000 is positioned on the intracorneal surface. In one embodiment, the flap 5008 is then closed to cover at least a portion of the implant 5000.
  • The surface of the cornea that is exposed is a stromal surface in one technique. The stromal surface may be on the corneal flap 5008 or on an exposed surface from which the corneal flap 5008 is removed.
  • The reference point 5012 may be identified in any suitable manner. For example, the alignment devices and methods described above may be used to identify the reference point 5012. In one technique, identifying the reference point 5012 involves illuminating a light spot (e.g., a spot of light formed by all or a discrete portion of radiant energy corresponding to visible light, e.g., red light). As discussed above, the identifying of a reference point may further include placing liquid (e.g., a fluorescein dye or other dye) on the intracorneal surface. Preferably, identifying the reference point 5012 involves alignment using any of the techniques described herein.
  • As discussed above, various techniques may be used to mark an identified reference point. In one technique the reference point is marked by applying a dye to the cornea or otherwise spreading a material with known reflective properties onto the cornea. As discussed above, the dye may be a substance that interacts with radiant energy to increase the visibility of a marking target or other visual cue. The reference point may be marked by a dye with any suitable tool. The tool is configured so that it bites into a corneal layer, e.g., an anterior layer of the epithelium, and delivers a thin ink line into the corneal layer in one embodiment. The tool may be made sharp to bite into the epithelium. In one application, the tool is configured to deliver the dye as discussed above upon being lightly pressed against the eye. This arrangement is advantageous in that it does not form a larger impression in the eye. In another technique, the reference point may be marked by making an impression (e.g., a physical depression) on a surface of the cornea with or without additional delivery of a dye. In another technique, the reference point may be marked by illuminating a light or other source of radiant energy, e.g., a marking target illuminator and projecting that light onto the cornea (e.g., by projecting a marking target).
  • Any of the foregoing techniques for marking a reference point may be combined with techniques that make a mark that indicates the location of an axis of the eye, e.g., the visual axis or line-of-sight of the eye. In one technique, a mark indicates the approximate intersection of the visual axis and a surface of the cornea. In another technique, a mark is made approximately radially symmetrically disposed about the intersection of the visual axis and a surface of the cornea.
  • As discussed above, some techniques involve making a mark on an intracorneal surface. The mark may be made by any suitable technique. In one technique a mark is made by pressing an implement against the instracorneal surface. The implement may form a depression that has a size and shape that facilitate placement of a mask. For example, in one form the implement is configured to form a circular ring (e.g., a thin line of dye, or a physical depression, or both) with a diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of a mask to be implanted. The circular ring can be formed to have a diameter between about 4 mm and about 5 mm. The intracorneal surface is on the corneal flap 5008 in one technique. In another technique, the intracorneal surface is on an exposed surface of the cornea from which the flap was removed. This exposed surface is sometimes referred to as a tissue bed.
  • In another technique, the corneal flap 5008 is lifted and thereafter is laid on an adjacent surface 5016 of the cornea 5004. In another technique, the corneal flap 5008 is laid on a removable support 5020, such as a sponge. In one technique, the removable support has a surface 5024 that is configured to maintain the native curvature of the corneal flap 5008.
  • FIG. 65 shows that the marked reference point 5012 is helpful in positioning an implant on an intracorneal surface. In particular, the marked reference point 5012 enables the implant to be positioned with respect to the visual axis of the eye. In the illustrated embodiment, the implant 5000 is positioned so that a centerline of the implant, indicated as MCL, extends through the marked reference point 5012.
  • FIG. 65A illustrates another technique wherein a reference 5012′ is a ring or other two dimensional mark. In such a case, the implant 5000 may be placed so that an outer edge of the implant and the ring correspond, e.g., such that the ring and the implant 5000 share the same or substantially the same center. Preferably, the ring and the implant 5000 are aligned so that the centerline of the implant MCL is on the line of sight of the eye, as discussed above. The ring is shown in dashed lines because in the illustrated technique, it is formed on the anterior surface of the corneal flap 5008.
  • In one technique, the corneal flap 5008 is closed by returning the corneal flap 5008 to the cornea 5004 with the implant 5000 on the corneal flap 5008. In another technique, the corneal flap 5008 is closed by returning the corneal flap 5008 to the cornea 5004 over the implant 5000, which previously was placed on the tissue bed (the exposed intracorneal surface).
  • When the intracorneal surface is a stromal surface, the implant 5000 is placed on the stromal surface. At least a portion of the implant 5000 is covered. In some techniques, the implant 5000 is covered by returning a flap with the implant 5000 thereon to the cornea 5004 to cover the stromal surface. In one technique, the stromal surface is exposed by lifting an epithelial layer to expose stroma. In another technique, the stromal surface is exposed by removing an epithelial layer to expose stroma. In some techniques, an additional step of replacing the epithelial layer to at least partially cover the implant 5000 is performed.
  • After the flap 5008 is closed to cover at least a portion of the implant 5000, the implant 5000 may be repositioned to some extent in some applications. In one technique, pressure is applied to the implant 5000 to move the implant into alignment with the reference point 5012. The pressure may be applied to the anterior surface of the cornea 5004 proximate an edge of the implant 5000 (e.g., directly above, above and outside a projection of the outer periphery of the implant 5000, or above and inside a projection of the outer periphery of the implant 5000). This may cause the implant to move slightly away from the edge proximate which pressure is applied. In another technique, pressure is applied directly to the implant. The implant 5000 may be repositioned in this manner if the reference point 5012 was marked on the flap 5008 or if the reference point 5012 was marked on the tissue bed.
  • FIG. 66 shows that a patient may also be treated by a method that positions an implant 5100 in a cornea 5104, e.g., in a corneal pocket 5108. Any suitable tool or technique may be used to create or form the corneal pocket 5108. For example, a blade (e.g., a microkeratome), a laser, or an electrosurgical tool could be used to create or form a pocket in the cornea 5104. A reference point 5112 is identified on the cornea 5104. The reference point may be identified by any suitable technique, such as those discussed herein. The reference point 5112 is marked by any suitable technique, such as those discussed herein. The corneal pocket 5108 is created to expose an intracorneal surface 5116. The corneal pocket 5108 may be created at any suitable depth, for example at a depth within a range of from about 50 microns to about 300 microns from the anterior surface of the cornea 5104. The implant 5100 is positioned on the intracorneal surface 5116. The marked reference point 5112 is helpful in positioning the implant 5100 on the intracorneal surface 5116. The marked reference point 5112 enables the implant 5100 to be positioned with respect to the visual axis of the eye, as discussed above. In the illustrated embodiment, the implant 5100 is positioned so that a centerline MCL of the implant 5100 extends through or adjacent to the marked reference point 5112.
  • FIG. 66A illustrates another technique wherein a reference 5112′ is a ring or other two dimensional mark. In such case, the implant 5100 may be placed so that an outer edge of the implant and the ring correspond, e.g., such that the ring and the implant 5100 share the same or substantially the same center. Preferably, the ring and the implant 5100 are aligned so that the centerline of the implant MCL is on the line of sight of the eye, as discussed above. The ring is shown in solid lines because in the illustrated embodiment, it is formed on the anterior surface of the cornea 5104 above the pocket 5108.
  • After the implant 5100 is positioned in the pocket 5108, the implant 5100 may be repositioned to some extent in some applications. In one technique, pressure is applied to the implant 5100 to move the implant into alignment with the reference point 5112. The pressure may be applied to the anterior surface of the cornea 5104 proximate an edge of the implant 5100 (e.g., directly above, above and outside a projection of the outer periphery of the implant 5100, or above and inside a projection of the outer periphery of the implant 5100). This may cause the implant 5100 to move slightly away from the edge at which pressure is applied. In another technique, pressure is applied directly to the implant 5100.
  • Although this invention has been disclosed in the context of certain preferred embodiments and examples, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that the present invention extends beyond the specifically disclosed embodiments to other alternative embodiments and/or uses of the invention and obvious modifications and equivalents thereof. In addition, while a number of variations of the invention have been shown and described in detail, other modifications, which are within the scope of this invention, will be readily apparent to those of skill in the art based upon this disclosure. It is also contemplated that various combinations or sub-combinations of the specific features and aspects of the embodiments may be made and still fall within the scope of the invention. Accordingly, it should be understood that various features and aspects of the disclosed embodiments can be combine with or substituted for one another in order to form varying modes of the disclosed invention. Thus, it is intended that the scope of the present invention herein disclosed should not be limited by the particular disclosed embodiments described above, but should be determined only by a fair reading of the claims that follow.

Claims (17)

1. A method of treating a vision defect of a patient, comprising:
configuring a mask to be implanted in a cornea of a patient, the mask comprising an anterior surface extending from an outer periphery, a posterior surface extending from the outer periphery, an aperture located within the outer periphery, and a non-transmissive portion disposed about the aperture, the non-transmissive portion preventing transmission of between about 85 and about 100 percent of incident light;
configuring the non-transmissive portion of the mask with a plurality of nutrient flow paths that reduce nutrient depletion due to the presence of the mask in the cornea; and
inserting the mask into a cornea of the patient.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein inserting the mask further comprises:
accessing a first corneal layer of an eye of the patient;
placing the posterior surface of the mask adjacent to the first corneal layer; and
placing a second corneal layer adjacent to the anterior surface of the mask.
3. The method of claim 1, further comprising configuring the non-transmissive portion to prevent transmission of about 92 percent of incident light.
4. The method of claim 1, further comprising configuring the non-transmissive portion to be substantially opaque.
5. The method of claim 1, further comprising providing the non-transmissive portion with a pigmentation agent.
6. The method of claim 5, wherein the pigmentation agent comprises a dye.
7. The method of claim 5, wherein the pigmentation agent comprises gold.
8. The method of claim 5, wherein the pigmentation agent comprises carbon.
9. The method of claim 1, further comprising locating a pigmentation agent on at least one of the anterior surface and the posterior surface of the mask.
10. The method of claim 1, further comprising locating a pigmentation agent in an interior region of the mask.
11. The method of claim 1, further comprising configuring the non-transmissive portion with areas of varying light transmissivity.
12. The method of claim 11, further comprising providing a gradual increase in opacity of the mask toward the outer periphery or an inner periphery thereof.
13. The method of claim 11, further comprising altering the location of at least some of the nutrient flow paths in the mask to vary light transmissivity.
14. The method of claim 1, further comprising configuring the nutrient flow paths to maintain at least about ninety-six percent of the natural flow of at least one biological substance from a first corneal layer to a second corneal layer.
15. The method of claim 14, wherein the at least one biological substance includes glucose.
16. The method of claim 1, further comprising locating the aperture centrally within the outer periphery and extending the aperture through the anterior and posterior surfaces.
17. The method of claim 1, further comprising providing a lens body having an optical power for vision correction.
US11/417,902 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns Abandoned US20060271182A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/417,902 US20060271182A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US47382403P 2003-05-28 2003-05-28
US47912903P 2003-06-17 2003-06-17
US10/854,033 US7628810B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2004-05-26 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/417,902 US20060271182A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/854,033 Continuation US7628810B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2004-05-26 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20060271182A1 true US20060271182A1 (en) 2006-11-30

Family

ID=33493365

Family Applications (18)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/854,033 Expired - Fee Related US7628810B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2004-05-26 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/290,189 Abandoned US20060079959A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2005-11-30 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/290,201 Active 2030-02-28 US8460374B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2005-11-30 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/417,667 Active 2027-10-31 US9138142B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Masked intraocular devices
US11/417,524 Abandoned US20060274265A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/418,545 Abandoned US20060268228A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/417,902 Abandoned US20060271182A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/417,654 Abandoned US20060268226A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/417,645 Abandoned US20060271178A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/417,497 Active 2028-02-18 US8858624B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Method for increasing the depth of focus of a patient
US11/417,501 Abandoned US20060274264A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/417,890 Abandoned US20060271180A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/417,895 Abandoned US20060271181A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/417,665 Abandoned US20060271179A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/418,548 Abandoned US20060271183A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/417,878 Abandoned US20060268227A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US14/841,249 Active 2024-08-09 US10869752B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2015-08-31 Mask for increasing depth of focus
US16/950,712 Pending US20210154002A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2020-11-17 Mask for increasing depth of focus

Family Applications Before (6)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/854,033 Expired - Fee Related US7628810B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2004-05-26 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/290,189 Abandoned US20060079959A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2005-11-30 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/290,201 Active 2030-02-28 US8460374B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2005-11-30 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/417,667 Active 2027-10-31 US9138142B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Masked intraocular devices
US11/417,524 Abandoned US20060274265A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/418,545 Abandoned US20060268228A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns

Family Applications After (11)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/417,654 Abandoned US20060268226A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/417,645 Abandoned US20060271178A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/417,497 Active 2028-02-18 US8858624B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Method for increasing the depth of focus of a patient
US11/417,501 Abandoned US20060274264A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/417,890 Abandoned US20060271180A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/417,895 Abandoned US20060271181A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/417,665 Abandoned US20060271179A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/418,548 Abandoned US20060271183A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US11/417,878 Abandoned US20060268227A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2006-05-03 Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US14/841,249 Active 2024-08-09 US10869752B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2015-08-31 Mask for increasing depth of focus
US16/950,712 Pending US20210154002A1 (en) 2003-05-28 2020-11-17 Mask for increasing depth of focus

Country Status (6)

Country Link
US (18) US7628810B2 (en)
EP (2) EP1635739B1 (en)
JP (2) JP4689615B2 (en)
AT (1) ATE524137T1 (en)
ES (1) ES2380540T3 (en)
WO (1) WO2004105588A2 (en)

Cited By (16)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7802883B2 (en) 2007-12-20 2010-09-28 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Cosmetic contact lenses having a sparkle effect
US7976577B2 (en) 2005-04-14 2011-07-12 Acufocus, Inc. Corneal optic formed of degradation resistant polymer
US8079706B2 (en) 2003-06-17 2011-12-20 Acufocus, Inc. Method and apparatus for aligning a mask with the visual axis of an eye
USD656526S1 (en) 2009-11-10 2012-03-27 Acufocus, Inc. Ocular mask
US8343215B2 (en) 1999-03-01 2013-01-01 Acufocus, Inc. System and method for increasing the depth of focus of the human eye
US8460374B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2013-06-11 Acufocus, Inc. Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US9005281B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2015-04-14 Acufocus, Inc. Masked intraocular implants and lenses
US9204962B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2015-12-08 Acufocus, Inc. In situ adjustable optical mask
US9427311B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2016-08-30 Acufocus, Inc. Corneal inlay with nutrient transport structures
US9427922B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2016-08-30 Acufocus, Inc. Process for manufacturing an intraocular lens with an embedded mask
US9545303B2 (en) 2011-12-02 2017-01-17 Acufocus, Inc. Ocular mask having selective spectral transmission
US9943403B2 (en) 2014-11-19 2018-04-17 Acufocus, Inc. Fracturable mask for treating presbyopia
US10004593B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2018-06-26 Acufocus, Inc. Intraocular lens with elastic mask
US10687935B2 (en) 2015-10-05 2020-06-23 Acufocus, Inc. Methods of molding intraocular lenses
US11364110B2 (en) 2018-05-09 2022-06-21 Acufocus, Inc. Intraocular implant with removable optic
US11464625B2 (en) 2015-11-24 2022-10-11 Acufocus, Inc. Toric small aperture intraocular lens with extended depth of focus

Families Citing this family (77)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2006047534A1 (en) * 2004-10-22 2006-05-04 Acufocus System and method for aligning an optic with an axis of an eye
US20060113054A1 (en) * 2004-12-01 2006-06-01 Silvestrini Thomas A Method of making an ocular implant
WO2007058966A1 (en) * 2005-11-11 2007-05-24 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Controlled needle-free eye injector
JP2009527312A (en) * 2006-02-21 2009-07-30 ビオヴィジョン アーゲー Method for forming a corneal pocket
WO2008072092A2 (en) * 2006-03-09 2008-06-19 Biovision Ag Laser mask for creating a corneal pocket
WO2008014419A2 (en) 2006-07-26 2008-01-31 Lai Shui T Intrastromal surgery correcting low order and high order aberrations of the eye
WO2008036695A2 (en) * 2006-09-18 2008-03-27 Lai Shui T Customized contact lenses for reducing aberrations of the eye
RU2318438C1 (en) * 2006-11-28 2008-03-10 Дмитрий Евгеньевич Антонов Device for getting image of iris
US7641337B2 (en) 2006-12-22 2010-01-05 Bausch & Lomb Incorporated Ophthalmic lens including photochromic material
US8608799B2 (en) * 2007-01-24 2013-12-17 Tekia, Inc. Umbrella-shaped accommodating artificial ocular lens (AAOL) device
US8026189B1 (en) * 2007-04-05 2011-09-27 American Felt and Filter Company, LLC. High-temperature and fire-resistant fabric and a method of manufacturing thereof
WO2008129541A2 (en) * 2007-04-19 2008-10-30 Ramot At Tel-Aviv University Ltd Optical imaging system with an extended depth-of-field and method for designing an optical imaging system
US8529559B2 (en) 2007-10-29 2013-09-10 Junzhong Liang Methods and devices for refractive treatments of presbyopia
US8355782B2 (en) * 2008-01-28 2013-01-15 St. Jude Medical Ab Implantable heart stimulator for measuring dyssynchrony using impedance
KR101683042B1 (en) 2008-04-04 2016-12-06 포사이트 비젼4, 인크. Therapeutic device for pain management and vision
WO2010002784A2 (en) * 2008-07-01 2010-01-07 The University Of Utah Research Foundation Lens actuator
WO2010059214A2 (en) 2008-11-20 2010-05-27 Insight Innovations, Llc Biocompatible biodegradable intraocular implant system
US8551167B2 (en) * 2008-11-20 2013-10-08 Insight Innovations, Llc Intraocular implant cell migration inhibition system
US9943402B2 (en) 2008-11-20 2018-04-17 Insight Innovations, Llc Micropatterned intraocular implant
US20120232649A1 (en) 2008-11-20 2012-09-13 Insight Innovations, Llc Intraocular Lens Cell Migration Inhibition System
WO2010064278A1 (en) * 2008-12-03 2010-06-10 Kashiwagi Toyohiko Ophthalmic lens design method, ophthalmic lens, and refraction correcting operation device
US9492344B2 (en) * 2009-08-03 2016-11-15 Nike, Inc. Unified vision testing and/or training
ES2634212T3 (en) 2009-10-20 2017-09-27 Universal View Co., Ltd. Soft contact lens
WO2011050327A1 (en) 2009-10-23 2011-04-28 Forsight Labs Llc Corneal denervation for treatment of ocular pain
WO2011050365A1 (en) 2009-10-23 2011-04-28 Forsight Labs, Llc Conformable therapeutic shield for vision and pain
US8591025B1 (en) 2012-09-11 2013-11-26 Nexisvision, Inc. Eye covering and refractive correction methods for LASIK and other applications
WO2011088107A2 (en) 2010-01-12 2011-07-21 Acufocus, Inc. Ocular inlay delivery system and method of use
US9298019B2 (en) 2010-05-04 2016-03-29 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Surface enhanced ophthalmic lens
US9452015B2 (en) 2010-06-15 2016-09-27 Avenu Medical, Inc. Intravascular arterial to venous anastomosis and tissue welding catheter
US20120022408A1 (en) * 2010-06-18 2012-01-26 Vantage Surgical Systems, Inc. Surgical Procedures Using Visual Images Overlaid with Visual Representations of Selected Three-Dimensional Data
KR20130107321A (en) 2010-10-25 2013-10-01 넥시스비젼, 인코포레이티드 Methods and apparatus to identify eye coverings for vision
US8678584B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2014-03-25 Nexisvision, Inc. Contact lenses for refractive correction
US9423632B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2016-08-23 Nexisvision, Inc. Contact lenses for refractive correction
CA2834295A1 (en) 2011-04-28 2012-11-01 Nexisvision, Inc. Eye covering and refractive correction methods and apparatus having improved tear flow, comfort, and/or applicability
US10307292B2 (en) 2011-07-18 2019-06-04 Mor Research Applications Ltd Device for adjusting the intraocular pressure
EP2548533A1 (en) * 2011-07-22 2013-01-23 Icon Lab GmbH Intraocular lens implant
US10591749B2 (en) * 2011-08-17 2020-03-17 Toray Industries, Inc. Medical device, combination of coating solutions, and method for producing medical device
TWI586612B (en) 2011-11-18 2017-06-11 康寧公司 Apparatus and method for trimming a moving glass ribbon
JP6182545B2 (en) 2012-02-08 2017-08-16 アベヌ メディカル インコーポレイテッドAvenu Medical,Inc. Intravascular arteriovenous anastomosis and tissue junction catheter
DE112013001018T5 (en) 2012-02-16 2014-10-30 Acufocus, Inc. A mask having ocular device for implantation next to an intraocular lens
JP6093508B2 (en) * 2012-03-30 2017-03-08 尚樹 井村 contact lens
US9465233B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2016-10-11 Nexisvision, Inc. Bimodular contact lenses
US20140131905A1 (en) 2012-11-09 2014-05-15 Acufocus, Inc. Process for manufacturing an intraocular lens
JP6190133B2 (en) * 2013-03-25 2017-08-30 Hoya株式会社 Ophthalmic lens design method and ophthalmic lens manufacturing method
EP3014345A2 (en) 2013-06-26 2016-05-04 Nexisvision, Inc. Contact lenses for refractive correction
DE102013219788A1 (en) 2013-09-30 2015-04-16 Carl Zeiss Meditec Ag Intra-corneal ring
US9341864B2 (en) 2013-11-15 2016-05-17 Nexisvision, Inc. Contact lenses having a reinforcing scaffold
WO2015108211A1 (en) * 2014-01-16 2015-07-23 (주)고려아이텍 Soft contact lens for presbyopia and manufacturing method therefor
WO2015116559A1 (en) 2014-01-29 2015-08-06 Nexisvision, Inc. Multifocal bimodulus contact lenses
KR20190025765A (en) * 2014-08-07 2019-03-11 샤크렛 테크놀러지스, 아이엔씨. Patterns for flow control and bioadhesion control
WO2016035108A1 (en) * 2014-09-03 2016-03-10 オリンパス株式会社 Image pickup device
USD755870S1 (en) * 2015-02-11 2016-05-10 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Contact lens
USD755869S1 (en) * 2015-02-11 2016-05-10 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Contact lens
USD755871S1 (en) * 2015-02-11 2016-05-10 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Contact lens
USD755868S1 (en) * 2015-02-11 2016-05-10 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Contact lens
USD756432S1 (en) * 2015-02-11 2016-05-17 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Contact lens
US11547554B2 (en) 2015-04-14 2023-01-10 Z Optics, Inc. High definition and extended depth of field intraocular lens
US11696823B2 (en) 2015-04-14 2023-07-11 Z Optics, Inc. High definition and extended depth of field intraocular lens
USD765751S1 (en) * 2015-04-15 2016-09-06 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Contact lens
USD756434S1 (en) * 2015-04-15 2016-05-17 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Contact lens
USD755872S1 (en) * 2015-04-15 2016-05-10 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Contact lens
USD757145S1 (en) * 2015-04-15 2016-05-24 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Contact lens
USD756433S1 (en) * 2015-04-15 2016-05-17 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Contact lens
US11045086B2 (en) * 2015-11-06 2021-06-29 William F. WILEY Device and method for marking the cornea
US11083566B2 (en) 2016-02-29 2021-08-10 Alcon Inc. Ophthalmic lens having an extended depth of focus
EP3423873A4 (en) 2016-03-01 2019-10-09 Mor Research Applications Ltd. External eye-contact device having opaque and decentered light-transmissive portions
US9933633B1 (en) 2016-11-08 2018-04-03 Paul Douglas Becherer Bifocal contact lenses providing reduced glare and blurriness in dim lighting
US10095051B2 (en) * 2017-02-03 2018-10-09 Spy Eye, Llc Oxygen permeable contact lens structures with thick payloads
US11058890B2 (en) 2017-02-15 2021-07-13 Iridex Corporation Method and apparatus for cyclo-scanner using surface emitting lasers or LEDs
US11020612B2 (en) * 2017-02-15 2021-06-01 Iridex Corporation Method and eye mask apparatus for treating an eye using a broad area light source
CN110430840B (en) * 2017-03-01 2023-06-23 莫尔研究应用有限公司 Ophthalmic device having opaque and eccentric light transmitting portions for alleviating symptoms associated with ophthalmic disorders
EP3378439A1 (en) * 2017-03-24 2018-09-26 Kejako Sa Intracorneal implant
US20200170786A1 (en) 2018-12-02 2020-06-04 EyeYon Medical Ltd. Corneal implant with peripheral skirt
US11745024B2 (en) 2018-12-27 2023-09-05 Iridex Corporation Electrical methods and devices for ophthalmic treatment
WO2020205860A1 (en) 2019-04-01 2020-10-08 Intelligent Diagnostics, Llc Corneal topography system and methods
RU2737350C1 (en) * 2020-03-02 2020-11-27 Валерий Анатольевич Панченко Contact lens for sighting and device for installation thereof
US20230058505A1 (en) 2021-08-18 2023-02-23 Michael Snyder Ophthalmic pinhole prosthetic with surface modifications and method of fabrication

Citations (91)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3507566A (en) * 1968-04-29 1970-04-21 Arthur A Knapp Contact lens and spectacle lens structure
US3726587A (en) * 1971-03-09 1973-04-10 C Kendall Bifocal corneal contact lens and method of making same
US3794414A (en) * 1972-05-12 1974-02-26 Jessen Inc Wesley Multiple focal contact lens
US4010496A (en) * 1975-10-01 1977-03-08 Neefe Charles W Bifocal lens which positions within the anterior chamber
US4073015A (en) * 1976-05-07 1978-02-14 Peyman Gholam A Artificial intraocular lens attachment
US4138191A (en) * 1977-04-04 1979-02-06 Peyman Gholam A Operating microscope with two pairs of stereo eye-piece lenses
US4191195A (en) * 1978-09-07 1980-03-04 Hewlett-Packard Company Coupling circuit with driven guard
US4312575A (en) * 1979-09-18 1982-01-26 Peyman Gholam A Soft corneal contact lens with tightly cross-linked polymer coating and method of making same
US4367949A (en) * 1980-06-02 1983-01-11 Lavering Gordon R Aiming method and means
US4575915A (en) * 1983-09-06 1986-03-18 Continental Packaging Company, Inc. Method of forming a composite container
US4633866A (en) * 1981-11-23 1987-01-06 Gholam Peyman Ophthalmic laser surgical method
US4636212A (en) * 1982-05-10 1987-01-13 Optical Radiation Corporation Ultraviolet radiation absorbing intraocular lens
US4636049A (en) * 1983-09-20 1987-01-13 University Optical Products Co. Concentric bifocal contact lens
US4636211A (en) * 1984-03-13 1987-01-13 Nielsen J Mchenry Bifocal intra-ocular lens
US4637697A (en) * 1982-10-27 1987-01-20 Pilkington P.E. Limited Multifocal contact lenses utilizing diffraction and refraction
US4639105A (en) * 1982-09-13 1987-01-27 Neefe Charles W Spin cast ocular cosmetic device with color separation
US4641934A (en) * 1982-09-29 1987-02-10 Pilkington P.E. Limited Ophthalmic lens with diffractive power
US4642112A (en) * 1981-04-29 1987-02-10 Pilkington P.E. Limited Artificial eye lenses
US4646720A (en) * 1985-03-12 1987-03-03 Peyman Gholam A Optical assembly permanently attached to the cornea
US4655774A (en) * 1986-01-03 1987-04-07 Choyce D Peter Intra-corneal implant for correction of aniridia
US4729373A (en) * 1986-12-18 1988-03-08 Peyman Gholam A Laser-powered surgical device with a vibrating crystalline tip
US4799931A (en) * 1986-05-14 1989-01-24 Lindstrom Richard L Intracorneal lens
US4808181A (en) * 1987-08-07 1989-02-28 Kelman Charles D Intraocular lens having roughened surface area
US4814050A (en) * 1986-10-06 1989-03-21 Aluminum Company Of America Estimation and control of alumina concentration in hall cells
US4813955A (en) * 1983-09-07 1989-03-21 Manfred Achatz Multifocal, especially bifocal, intraocular, artificial ophthalmic lens
US4891043A (en) * 1987-05-28 1990-01-02 Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois System for selective release of liposome encapsulated material via laser radiation
US4890913A (en) * 1982-10-13 1990-01-02 Carle John T De Zoned multi-focal contact lens
US4898461A (en) * 1987-06-01 1990-02-06 Valdemar Portney Multifocal ophthalmic lens
US4983181A (en) * 1986-10-16 1991-01-08 Cbs Lens, Collagen hydrogel for promoting epithelial cell growth and artificial lens using the same
US4985559A (en) * 1987-10-15 1991-01-15 University Of Florida UV Absorbing vinyl monomers
US4990165A (en) * 1987-07-31 1991-02-05 Union Carbide Industrial Gases Technology Corporation Permeable membranes for enhanced gas separation
US4994080A (en) * 1988-07-15 1991-02-19 Shepard Dennis D Optical lens having at least one stenopaeic opening located in the central area thereof
US4997268A (en) * 1989-07-24 1991-03-05 Dauvergne Hector A Corrective lens configuration
US5002571A (en) * 1989-02-06 1991-03-26 Donnell Jr Francis E O Intraocular lens implant and method of locating and adhering within the posterior chamber
US5089022A (en) * 1989-04-26 1992-02-18 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Rectified intraocular lens
US5089024A (en) * 1988-04-19 1992-02-18 Storz Instrument Company Multi-focal intraocular lens
US5104957A (en) * 1990-02-28 1992-04-14 Autogenesis Technologies, Inc. Biologically compatible collagenous reaction product and articles useful as medical implants produced therefrom
US5108428A (en) * 1988-03-02 1992-04-28 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Corneal implants and manufacture and use thereof
US5185152A (en) * 1990-01-10 1993-02-09 Peyman Gholam A Method and apparatus for controlled release drug delivery to the cornea and anterior chamber of the eye
US5192318A (en) * 1986-06-05 1993-03-09 Schneider Richard T One-piece bifocal intraocular lens construction
US5192316A (en) * 1988-02-16 1993-03-09 Allergan, Inc. Ocular device
US5196026A (en) * 1991-09-16 1993-03-23 Chiron Ophthalmics, Inc. Method of implanting corneal inlay lenses smaller than the optic zone
US5296881A (en) * 1990-04-17 1994-03-22 Pilkington Diffractive Lenses Limited Method and contact lenses for treating presbyopia
US5300116A (en) * 1992-08-05 1994-04-05 Lions Eye Institute Of Western Australia Keratoprosthesis
US5391201A (en) * 1992-10-02 1995-02-21 Chiron Intraoptics, Inc. Method of using a corneal ring inlay
US5401508A (en) * 1992-01-15 1995-03-28 Allergan, Inc. Hydrogel compositions and structures made from same
US5480427A (en) * 1990-02-28 1996-01-02 Darby & Darby Biologically compatible collagenous reaction product and articles useful as medical implants produced therefrom
US5599537A (en) * 1990-12-18 1997-02-04 The General Hospital Corporation Salmonella virulence genes
US5608471A (en) * 1995-07-03 1997-03-04 Westcon Contact Lens Co., Inc. Soft, bifocal contact lens
US5610719A (en) * 1995-07-10 1997-03-11 Qc Optics, Inc. Displacement detection system
US5713957A (en) * 1993-11-19 1998-02-03 Ciba Vision Corporation Corneal onlays
US5713844A (en) * 1997-01-10 1998-02-03 Peyman; Gholam A. Device and method for regulating intraocular pressure
US5719656A (en) * 1995-05-19 1998-02-17 Bowling; Patricia J. Contact lens utilizing stiles-crawford effect
US5722971A (en) * 1995-10-20 1998-03-03 Peyman; Gholam A. Intrastromal corneal modification
US5731862A (en) * 1994-07-08 1998-03-24 Eschenbach Optik Gmbh + Co. Hyperocular lens assembly attachable to an eyeglass lens
US5733760A (en) * 1994-08-05 1998-03-31 Virus Research Institute Salmonella vectors encoding truncated pag fusion protein, method of making, and uses thereof
US5855605A (en) * 1994-12-08 1999-01-05 Herrick Family Limited Partnership, A Calif Ltd Part. Multifocal lens system having eccentic axes and method
US5858980A (en) * 1990-03-30 1999-01-12 Autoimmune, Inc. Peptide fragments of myelin basic protein
US5861486A (en) * 1992-09-09 1999-01-19 Devore; Dale P. Collagen modulators for use in photoablation eximer laser keratectomy
US5864378A (en) * 1996-05-21 1999-01-26 Allergan Enhanced monofocal IOL or contact lens
US5863537A (en) * 1992-02-19 1999-01-26 Schering Corporation Humanized monoclonal antibodies against human interleukin-4
US5864128A (en) * 1991-10-15 1999-01-26 Geo Labs, Inc. Lens with variable focal length
US5874537A (en) * 1991-01-29 1999-02-23 C. R. Bard, Inc. Method for sealing tissues with collagen-based sealants
US6176878B1 (en) * 1998-12-17 2001-01-23 Allergan Sales, Inc. Accommodating intraocular lens
US6183498B1 (en) * 1999-09-20 2001-02-06 Devore Dale P. Methods and products for sealing a fluid leak in a tissue
US6197934B1 (en) * 1998-05-22 2001-03-06 Collagenesis, Inc. Compound delivery using rapidly dissolving collagen film
US6197019B1 (en) * 1994-04-25 2001-03-06 Gholam A. Peyman Universal implant blank for modifying corneal curvature and methods of modifying corneal curvature therewith
US6203538B1 (en) * 1995-11-03 2001-03-20 Gholam A. Peyman Intrastromal corneal modification
US6335006B1 (en) * 1999-03-22 2002-01-01 Boston Innovative Optics, Inc. Methods of using agents that act on the epithelial sheet of a human eye
US20020010510A1 (en) * 1998-11-04 2002-01-24 Thomas A. Silvestrini Variable modulus corneal implant and fabrication methods
US20020028330A1 (en) * 2000-09-06 2002-03-07 Alcon Universal Ltd. Switchable tackiness coating compositions for ophthalmic implants
US6358280B1 (en) * 1994-12-08 2002-03-19 Herrick Family Limited Partnership A California Limited Partnership Artificial lens including a lens system having eccentric axes for use in an eye having an enlarged pupil
US6357875B1 (en) * 1994-12-08 2002-03-19 Herrick Family Limited Partnership Artificial lens including a lens system having eccentric axes for use in an eye having an enlarged pupil and method
US6361560B1 (en) * 1998-12-23 2002-03-26 Anamed, Inc. Corneal implant and method of manufacture
US20030002994A1 (en) * 2001-03-07 2003-01-02 Johnson A. David Thin film shape memory alloy actuated flow controller
US6503276B2 (en) * 1998-11-10 2003-01-07 Advanced Medical Optics Accommodating multifocal intraocular lens
US20030014042A1 (en) * 2001-07-13 2003-01-16 Tibor Juhasz Method of creating stromal pockets for corneal implants
US20030014107A1 (en) * 2001-06-28 2003-01-16 Michael Reynard Multifocal phakic intraocular lens
US20030033013A1 (en) * 1997-08-20 2003-02-13 Callahan Wayne B. Method of using a small incision lens
US6527389B2 (en) * 1987-06-01 2003-03-04 Advanced Medical Optics, Inc. Multifocal ophthalmic lens
US20030045930A1 (en) * 2001-08-30 2003-03-06 Allergan Sales, Inc. Apparatus and methods for packaging intrcorneal implants and facilitating placement thereof
US6533905B2 (en) * 2000-01-24 2003-03-18 Tini Alloy Company Method for sputtering tini shape-memory alloys
US20030055497A1 (en) * 1999-07-28 2003-03-20 The Lions Instutute Of Western Australia Incorporated Method of insertion of keratoprostheses
US6536899B1 (en) * 1999-07-14 2003-03-25 Bifocon Optics Gmbh Multifocal lens exhibiting diffractive and refractive powers
US20040014253A1 (en) * 2002-07-17 2004-01-22 Vikas Gupta Three dimensional thin film devices and methods of fabrication
US20040015234A1 (en) * 2002-07-19 2004-01-22 Peyman Gholam A. Gradual correction of corneal refractive error using multiple inlays
US20040019379A1 (en) * 2002-07-25 2004-01-29 Advanced Medical Optics, Inc. Intracorneal lens with flow enhancement area for increased nutrient transport
US20040047014A1 (en) * 1996-11-15 2004-03-11 Parker William P. In-line holographic mask for micromachining
US6849090B2 (en) * 2001-11-07 2005-02-01 Alok Nigam Myopic corneal ring with central accommodating portion
US20050033420A1 (en) * 2003-05-28 2005-02-10 Bruce A. Christie Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US20050046794A1 (en) * 2003-06-17 2005-03-03 Silvestrini Thomas A. Method and apparatus for aligning a mask with the visual axis of an eye

Family Cites Families (594)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US552888A (en) * 1896-01-14 branth
US564518A (en) 1896-07-21 Franz heilborn
FR369993A (en) 1906-09-25 1907-01-25 Emile Recordon Glassless glasses for use by motorists, cyclists, etc.
US1206132A (en) 1916-03-03 1916-11-28 Otho M Otte Goggles.
US1959915A (en) 1932-09-22 1934-05-22 Charles C Guthrie Lensless spectacles
US2129305A (en) 1936-08-21 1938-09-06 Feinbloom William Contact lens
US2350421A (en) 1941-01-22 1944-06-06 William P Schoder Method of producing inlaid jewels
US2470927A (en) 1947-01-10 1949-05-24 South Chester Corp Fastening means
US2510438A (en) * 1948-02-28 1950-06-06 Solex Lab Inc Contact lens
US2714721A (en) 1953-01-23 1955-08-09 Jr William Stone Artificial corneal implants
US3034403A (en) 1959-04-03 1962-05-15 Neefe Hamilton Res Company Contact lens of apparent variable light absorption
US3339997A (en) 1962-07-30 1967-09-05 Plastic Contact Lens Company Bifocal ophthalmic lens having different color distance and near vision zones
GB1026839A (en) 1964-04-15 1966-04-20 Evan Evans Teush Lensless spectacles for correction of simple conditions of sight failure of the human eye
US3458870A (en) 1964-05-25 1969-08-05 William Stone Jr Artificial corneal implants having a removable lens member
US3270099A (en) 1964-12-07 1966-08-30 Richard N Camp A method for making multi-focal length contact lenses
GB1276003A (en) 1969-03-10 1972-06-01 Frank Auld Corneal contact device
US3600098A (en) 1969-12-29 1971-08-17 Bausch & Lomb Optical alignment method and apparatus
US3578850A (en) 1970-02-11 1971-05-18 Alan H Grant Anti-flare contact lens
US3852032A (en) 1971-06-07 1974-12-03 Uroptics Int Inc Process for sterilizing hydrophilic gelatin lenses having ultraviolet stabilizers
US3776230A (en) 1973-04-18 1973-12-04 C Neefe Method of rapidly reshaping the cornea to eliminate refractive errors
US3877502A (en) 1973-08-29 1975-04-15 Hunckler Products Inc Nut locking means and method for muffler clamps
US3996627A (en) 1975-09-22 1976-12-14 American Optical Corporation Artificial intraocular lens
US4104338A (en) 1976-04-30 1978-08-01 Guerrieri Salvatore A Bubble cap tray
US4099529A (en) 1976-09-20 1978-07-11 Peyman Gholam A Wide-angle cutter vitrophage
US4116439A (en) 1976-09-30 1978-09-26 C.F.F. Inc. Pool ball
DE2727410C3 (en) * 1977-06-18 1980-03-06 Friedrichsfeld Gmbh Steinzeug- Und Kunststoffwerke, 6800 Mannheim Keratoprosthesis
US4210391A (en) 1977-09-14 1980-07-01 Cohen Allen L Multifocal zone plate
SE411686B (en) 1978-05-31 1980-01-28 Bergkvist Lars A DEVICE FOR INDICATING AN ANGLE OR DIRECTION OF PIPELINE OR CORRESPONDING
US4340283A (en) 1978-12-18 1982-07-20 Cohen Allen L Phase shift multifocal zone plate
US4767647A (en) 1979-12-17 1988-08-30 The D. L. Auld Company Decorative emblem
US4435050A (en) 1980-02-26 1984-03-06 Stanley Poler Contact lens assembly with haptic and method for making the same
JPS56161436A (en) * 1980-04-10 1981-12-11 Tokyo Contact Lens Kenkyusho:Kk Preparation of polymer having fine through-hole
US4298996A (en) 1980-07-23 1981-11-10 Barnet Ronald W Magnetic retention system for intraocular lens
EP0046338B1 (en) 1980-08-05 1985-04-10 David Peter Choyce Intraocular lens
US4402681A (en) 1980-08-23 1983-09-06 Haas Joseph S Artificial implant valve for the regulation of intraocular pressure
US4674503A (en) 1981-03-05 1987-06-23 Peyman Gholam A Controlled depth penetrant apparatus and method
FR2501937B1 (en) 1981-03-13 1985-06-07 Thomson Csf DEVICE FOR SWITCHING DATA TRANSMISSION CHANNELS
US4450593A (en) 1981-11-09 1984-05-29 Lynell Medical Technology Inc. Intraocular and contact lens construction
US4402579A (en) 1981-07-29 1983-09-06 Lynell Medical Technology Inc. Contact-lens construction
US4536240A (en) 1981-12-02 1985-08-20 Advanced Semiconductor Products, Inc. Method of forming thin optical membranes
JPS58137391A (en) * 1982-02-10 1983-08-15 Fujitsu Ltd Time switch circuit
SU1380743A1 (en) 1982-02-15 1988-03-15 Московский научно-исследовательский институт микрохирургии глаза Artificial eye lens
US4423728A (en) 1982-02-26 1984-01-03 Lieberman David M Cam-guided trephine
US4470159A (en) * 1982-03-03 1984-09-11 Peyman Gholam A Keratoprosthesis
US4612012A (en) 1982-07-28 1986-09-16 White Thomas C Corneal implant
US4485499A (en) 1982-09-02 1984-12-04 Castleman Lawrence D Intraocular posterior chamber lens
US4547914A (en) 1982-09-02 1985-10-22 Castleman Lawrence D Intraocular posterior chamber lens
JPS5954527A (en) 1982-09-22 1984-03-29 Hashimoto Forming Co Ltd Production of molding for vehicle
US4547915A (en) 1982-09-22 1985-10-22 Margaret L. Roszkowski Intraocular posterior chamber lens
US4505855A (en) 1982-09-30 1985-03-19 Massachusetts General Hospital Transparent non-fibrilized collagen material by ultracentrifugation
GB2129155B (en) 1982-10-13 1987-05-20 Ng Trustees & Nominees Ltd Bifocal contact lenses
US4710003A (en) 1982-10-21 1987-12-01 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Cornea shape measuring apparatus
US4701038A (en) 1983-01-31 1987-10-20 Bausch & Lomb Incorporated Cosmetic contact lens
US4563565A (en) 1983-03-02 1986-01-07 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Method for forming a peripheral edge on contact lenses
JPS59139916U (en) 1983-03-08 1984-09-19 トヨタ自動車株式会社 Dayma passing switch device
US4617023A (en) 1983-05-02 1986-10-14 Peyman Gholam A Intraocular lenses with openable haptic loops
US4512039A (en) 1983-05-24 1985-04-23 Lieberman David M Method of offsetting postoperative astigmatism with an intraocular lens
US4528311A (en) 1983-07-11 1985-07-09 Iolab Corporation Ultraviolet absorbing polymers comprising 2-hydroxy-5-acrylyloxyphenyl-2H-benzotriazoles
MA20257A1 (en) 1983-10-28 1985-07-01 Binh Paul Universal vision corrector.
US4665913A (en) 1983-11-17 1987-05-19 Lri L.P. Method for ophthalmological surgery
JPS60102780U (en) 1983-12-20 1985-07-13 ソニー株式会社 tape cassette
US4596578A (en) 1984-01-30 1986-06-24 Kelman Charles D Intraocular lens with miniature optic
US4799973A (en) * 1984-04-02 1989-01-24 Olin Corporation Process for treating copper-nickel alloys for use in brazed assemblies and product
US5041133A (en) 1984-04-11 1991-08-20 Pharmacia Ab Intraocular implant
JPS642644Y2 (en) 1984-09-10 1989-01-23
US4605409A (en) 1984-05-21 1986-08-12 Kelman Charles D Intraocular lens with miniature optic having expandable and contractible glare-reducing means
US4576453A (en) * 1984-08-03 1986-03-18 Richard Borowsky Light-occluding contact lens
US4615702A (en) 1984-09-10 1986-10-07 Koziol Jeffrey E Intraocular lens and method of forming the lens
US4702865A (en) 1984-09-10 1987-10-27 Koziol Jeffrey E Method of forming an intraocular lens
US4976732A (en) 1984-09-12 1990-12-11 International Financial Associates Holdings, Inc. Optical lens for the human eye
JPH027954Y2 (en) 1984-09-18 1990-02-26
US4624669A (en) 1984-09-26 1986-11-25 Surgidev Corporation Corneal inlay with holes
US4575373A (en) 1984-11-02 1986-03-11 Johnson Don R Laser adjustable intraocular lens and method of altering lens power
US4669466A (en) 1985-01-16 1987-06-02 Lri L.P. Method and apparatus for analysis and correction of abnormal refractive errors of the eye
US4753654A (en) 1985-03-18 1988-06-28 Optical Radiation Corporation Ultraviolet radiation absorbing intraocular lens
US4669834A (en) 1985-04-30 1987-06-02 Richter Judy C Light reflective contact lens
US6264648B1 (en) 1985-07-29 2001-07-24 Bausch & Lomb Incorporated Corneal curvature modification via internal ablation
US5239066A (en) 1985-07-31 1993-08-24 The Board Of Trustees Of Leland Stanford Jr. University Yersinia ail nucleic acids
US5662908A (en) 1985-07-31 1997-09-02 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Jr. University Invasive microorganisms
US5310654A (en) 1985-07-31 1994-05-10 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Method for determining virulence of Yersinia
US4676791A (en) 1985-08-01 1987-06-30 Surgidev Corporation Intraocular lens and method for making same
US4713446A (en) 1985-09-06 1987-12-15 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Viscoelastic collagen solution for ophthalmic use and method of preparation
US4676790A (en) 1985-09-25 1987-06-30 Kern Seymour P Method of manufacture and implantation of corneal inlays
US4678422A (en) 1985-11-12 1987-07-07 York Kenneth K Systems and methods for precise, accurate formation of products by photoablation
JPS62167343A (en) 1986-01-20 1987-07-23 Toagosei Chem Ind Co Ltd Polyvinylidene fluoride composition
DE3610833A1 (en) 1986-04-01 1987-10-08 Inprohold Ets INTRAOCULAR IMPLANTATION LENS
JPS62237454A (en) 1986-04-09 1987-10-17 Hitachi Ltd Method for correcting white spot defects of photomask with ion beams
US4666446A (en) 1986-05-06 1987-05-19 Koziol Jeffrey E Intraocular lens with converging and diverging optical portions
US5030230A (en) 1986-05-16 1991-07-09 Great Plains Eye Clinic, Ltd. Corneal implant
US5269812A (en) 1986-05-16 1993-12-14 White Thomas C Methods and devices employed in replacement of the corneal endothelium
FR2599156B1 (en) 1986-05-20 1988-08-12 Guyot Bernard FIXED IRIS CORRECTING THE SIGHT OF MYOPIA AND HYPERMETROPE
US4807623A (en) 1986-05-30 1989-02-28 David M. Lieberman Device for simultaneously forming two incisions along a path on an eye
US4923297A (en) 1986-06-23 1990-05-08 Eyedentify, Inc. Optical alignment system
US4799784A (en) 1986-06-23 1989-01-24 Aran Safir Visual vertex finder
US4685922A (en) 1986-06-25 1987-08-11 Peyman Gholam A Alterable refractive power intraocular lenses
US4715858A (en) 1986-07-25 1987-12-29 Lindstrom Richard L Epicorneal lens
US4838266A (en) 1986-09-08 1989-06-13 Koziol Jeffrey E Lens shaping device using a laser attenuator
US4785796A (en) 1986-09-12 1988-11-22 Mattson Philip D Otoscope and flexible, disposable curette for use therewith
US4842782A (en) 1986-10-14 1989-06-27 Allergan, Inc. Manufacture of ophthalmic lenses by excimer laser
US5112350A (en) 1986-10-16 1992-05-12 Cbs Lens, A California General Partnership Method for locating on a cornea an artificial lens fabricated from a collagen-hydrogel for promoting epithelial cell growth and regeneration of the stroma
US5114627A (en) 1986-10-16 1992-05-19 Cbs Lens Method for producing a collagen hydrogel
US4842599A (en) 1986-10-28 1989-06-27 Ann M. Bronstein Prosthetic cornea and method of implantation therefor
US4779973A (en) 1986-11-06 1988-10-25 David Miller Photokeratometric device
US4840175A (en) 1986-12-24 1989-06-20 Peyman Gholam A Method for modifying corneal curvature
JPS63199908A (en) 1987-02-10 1988-08-18 金沢 秀樹 Fixing structure
AU594233B2 (en) 1987-04-10 1990-03-01 University Of Florida Improved ocular implants and methods for their manufacture
US6387379B1 (en) 1987-04-10 2002-05-14 University Of Florida Biofunctional surface modified ocular implants, surgical instruments, medical devices, prostheses, contact lenses and the like
US4806382A (en) 1987-04-10 1989-02-21 University Of Florida Ocular implants and methods for their manufacture
US5166712A (en) 1987-06-01 1992-11-24 Valdemar Portney Multifocal ophthalmic lens
US5225858A (en) 1987-06-01 1993-07-06 Valdemar Portney Multifocal ophthalmic lens
US4865601A (en) 1987-07-07 1989-09-12 Caldwell Delmar R Intraocular prostheses
US4881954A (en) 1987-07-31 1989-11-21 Union Carbide Corporation Permeable membranes for enhanced gas separation
US4798608A (en) 1987-08-24 1989-01-17 Grendahl Dennis T Laminated zone of focus artificial lens
US4795462A (en) 1987-08-24 1989-01-03 Grendahl Dennis T Cylindrically segmented zone of focus artificial lens
EP0308077A3 (en) 1987-09-14 1990-05-30 Nestle S.A. Synthetic intracorneal lens
US4817789A (en) 1987-09-23 1989-04-04 Allergan, Inc. Lens container assembly
US5171318A (en) 1987-11-09 1992-12-15 Chiron Ophthalmics, Inc. Treated corneal prosthetic device
US4830855A (en) 1987-11-13 1989-05-16 Landec Labs, Inc. Temperature-controlled active agent dispenser
US4869587A (en) 1987-12-16 1989-09-26 Breger Joseph L Presbyopic contact lens
US4851003A (en) 1988-01-05 1989-07-25 Lindstrom Richard L Corneal implant lens with fixation holes
US5026393A (en) 1988-01-20 1991-06-25 Mackool Richard J Method of implanting an intraocular lens in a human eye and intraocular lens for same
US5112328A (en) 1988-01-25 1992-05-12 Refractive Laser Research & Development Program, Ltd. Method and apparatus for laser surgery
US4815690A (en) 1988-02-09 1989-03-28 Shepherd Thomas H Apparatus for the production of monolithic intraocular implants
US4969912A (en) 1988-02-18 1990-11-13 Kelman Charles D Human collagen processing and autoimplant use
US5067961A (en) 1988-02-18 1991-11-26 Autogenesis Technologies, Inc. Non-biodegradable two phase corneal implant and method for preparing same
JPH027954A (en) 1988-03-04 1990-01-11 Alcon Surgical Inc Manufacture of lens with colored periphery
US4907586A (en) 1988-03-31 1990-03-13 Intelligent Surgical Lasers Method for reshaping the eye
US5116111A (en) 1988-04-01 1992-05-26 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Multi-focal diffractive ophthalmic lenses
US5076684A (en) 1988-04-01 1991-12-31 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Multi-focal diffractive ophthalmic lenses
US4932970A (en) 1988-05-17 1990-06-12 Allergan, Inc. Ophthalmic lens
US5133745A (en) 1988-05-26 1992-07-28 Alcon Laboratories, Inc. Ultraviolet absorbing hydrogels
US4878910A (en) 1988-06-13 1989-11-07 Koziol Jeffrey E Intraocular lens assembly
US5034166A (en) 1988-07-21 1991-07-23 Allergan, Inc. Method of molding a colored contact lens
US5120121A (en) 1988-07-21 1992-06-09 Allergan, Inc. Colored lens
US5245738A (en) 1988-09-19 1993-09-21 Tini Alloy Company Method for securing together and non-explosively separating multiple components
US5119555A (en) 1988-09-19 1992-06-09 Tini Alloy Company Non-explosive separation device
US5092880A (en) 1988-10-21 1992-03-03 Genjiro Ohmi Method of determining the astigmatic power and the power for an intraocular lens, for a toric intraocular lens
US5185107A (en) 1988-10-26 1993-02-09 Iovision, Inc. Fabrication of an intraocular lens
JPH02145338A (en) 1988-11-26 1990-06-04 Honda Motor Co Ltd Interior material for vehicle and manufacture thereof
US4903695C1 (en) 1988-11-30 2001-09-11 Lri L P Method and apparatus for performing a keratomileusis or the like operation
GB8900616D0 (en) 1989-01-12 1989-03-08 Galley Geoffrey H Methods of manufacturing contact lenses
US5098443A (en) 1989-03-23 1992-03-24 University Of Miami Method of implanting intraocular and intraorbital implantable devices for the controlled release of pharmacological agents
US5358520A (en) 1989-04-28 1994-10-25 Nestle S.A. Supplementary intraocular lens system
US5055602A (en) 1989-05-02 1991-10-08 Bausch & Lomb Incorporated Polymerizable dye
US5013319A (en) 1989-06-05 1991-05-07 Mount Sinai School Of Medicine Of The City University Of New York Apparatus and method for cornea marking
US5061914A (en) 1989-06-27 1991-10-29 Tini Alloy Company Shape-memory alloy micro-actuator
FR2649605B1 (en) 1989-07-13 1995-07-21 France Chirurgie Instr CORNEAN IMPLANT
US4965545A (en) 1989-08-09 1990-10-23 Tini Alloy Company Shape memory alloy rotary actuator
US4955904A (en) 1989-08-21 1990-09-11 The Beth Israel Hospital Association Masked intraocular lens and method for treating a patient with cataracts
US5019097A (en) 1989-11-22 1991-05-28 Allergan, Inc. Corneal onlay lenses and methods for attaching same
US4971432A (en) 1989-12-07 1990-11-20 Koeniger Erich A Bifocal contact lens
US5133726A (en) 1990-02-14 1992-07-28 Ruiz Luis A Automatic corneal shaper
US5098444A (en) * 1990-03-16 1992-03-24 Feaster Fred T Epiphakic intraocular lens and process of implantation
FR2660859B1 (en) 1990-04-12 1992-07-10 Hanna Khalil KERATOTOME FOR THE MAKING OF ARCIFORM INCISIONS.
US5096285A (en) 1990-05-14 1992-03-17 Iolab Corporation Multifocal multizone diffractive ophthalmic lenses
CA2086014A1 (en) 1990-07-03 1992-01-04 CHARLES D. kELMAN Collagen-based viscoelastic solution for visco-surgery
US5607437A (en) 1990-07-12 1997-03-04 University Of Miami Instruments for use in performing gel injection adjustable keratoplasty
US5090955A (en) 1990-07-12 1992-02-25 University Of Miami Gel injection adjustable keratoplasty
US5372580A (en) 1990-07-12 1994-12-13 University Of Miami Gel injection adjustable keratoplasty
US5547468A (en) 1990-07-12 1996-08-20 University Of Miami Instruments for use in performing gel injection adjustable keratoplasty
US5120120A (en) 1990-07-27 1992-06-09 Cohen Allen L Multifocal optical device with spurious order suppression and method for manufacture of same
IL95381A0 (en) 1990-08-06 1991-06-30 Wolman Michael Rimless molded eyeglasses
US5165897A (en) 1990-08-10 1992-11-24 Tini Alloy Company Programmable tactile stimulator array system and method of operation
US5266302A (en) 1990-10-03 1993-11-30 Peyman Gholam A Method of performing angiography
EP0551383A4 (en) 1990-10-05 1993-11-03 University Of Florida Improved ocular implants and methods for their manufacture
US5314961A (en) 1990-10-11 1994-05-24 Permeable Technologies, Inc. Silicone-containing polymers, compositions and improved oxygen permeable hydrophilic contact lenses
DE4134320C2 (en) 1990-10-22 1993-10-28 Gerhard M Krahmer Artificial hair
US5260727A (en) 1990-10-22 1993-11-09 Oksman Henry C Wide depth of focus intraocular and contact lenses
JPH04158859A (en) 1990-10-23 1992-06-01 Seiko Epson Corp Artificial cornea
US5137441A (en) 1990-10-30 1992-08-11 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Mold assembly for making an ocular lens blank
US5160463A (en) * 1990-10-30 1992-11-03 Pilkington Visioncare, Inc. Method of manufacturing a contact lens
US5288436A (en) 1990-11-06 1994-02-22 Colloptics, Inc. Methods of fabricating a collagen lenticule precursor for modifying the cornea
US5094521A (en) 1990-11-07 1992-03-10 Vision Research Laboratories Apparatus for evaluating eye alignment
US5290892A (en) 1990-11-07 1994-03-01 Nestle S.A. Flexible intraocular lenses made from high refractive index polymers
US5695983A (en) 1990-12-18 1997-12-09 The General Hospital Corporation Salmonella vaccines
JPH04223425A (en) 1990-12-26 1992-08-13 Hoya Corp Contact lens and its production
US5219844A (en) 1991-01-02 1993-06-15 Peyman Gholam A Combination of perfluorocarbon liquid and silicone and method of treating disorders of an eye with the combination
US5108427A (en) 1991-01-07 1992-04-28 Majercik Stephen M Active pupillary prosthesis
US5108169A (en) 1991-02-22 1992-04-28 Mandell Robert B Contact lens bifocal with switch
US5526178A (en) 1991-02-22 1996-06-11 Front-Row Products Inc. Binocular
DE4108936A1 (en) 1991-03-19 1992-09-24 Kannegiesser H Gmbh Co DEVICE FOR GLUING TEXTILE SURFACES
US5315344A (en) 1991-03-29 1994-05-24 Polaroid Corporation Microscope camera
US5149331A (en) 1991-05-03 1992-09-22 Ariel Ferdman Method and device for wound closure
US5152789A (en) 1991-05-14 1992-10-06 Allergan, Inc. Fixation member for an intraocular lens
US5605938A (en) 1991-05-31 1997-02-25 Gliatech, Inc. Methods and compositions for inhibition of cell invasion and fibrosis using dextran sulfate
US5269795A (en) 1991-07-03 1993-12-14 Arnott Eric J Trephine device for removing anterior epithelial cells from corneal surfaces
US5147395A (en) 1991-07-16 1992-09-15 Allergan Inc. Small incision endocapsulator IOL
US5213749A (en) 1991-07-31 1993-05-25 Westinghouse Air Brake Company Method of forming a rubber seal having a metallic insert
WO1993002639A1 (en) 1991-08-06 1993-02-18 Autogenesis Technologies, Inc. Injectable collagen-based compositions for making intraocular lens
US5652014A (en) 1991-08-16 1997-07-29 Galin; Miles A. Medicament coated refractive anterior chamber ocular implant
JP3092233B2 (en) 1991-09-04 2000-09-25 三菱化学株式会社 Liquid crystalline polyesteramide
US5647865A (en) 1991-11-01 1997-07-15 Swinger; Casimir A. Corneal surgery using laser, donor corneal tissue and synthetic material
JPH0539527U (en) 1991-11-05 1993-05-28 株式会社メニコン Corneal host marker
RU94030810A (en) 1991-11-06 1996-06-20 Т.Лай Шуй Pulse laser apparatus, method of providing smooth ablation of matter, laser apparatus and cornea surgery method
US5245367A (en) 1991-11-12 1993-09-14 David Miller Annular mask contact lenses
US5578080A (en) 1991-11-12 1996-11-26 Henry H. McDonald Plastic optical lens with reduced thickness light blocking segments, and anchoring means
US5786883A (en) 1991-11-12 1998-07-28 Pilkington Barnes Hind, Inc. Annular mask contact lenses
DE69330049T2 (en) 1992-01-14 2001-08-02 Keravision Inc IMPLANTS FOR VARIATING THE CORNIC CURVATURE
US5266241A (en) 1992-02-12 1993-11-30 Iolab Corporation Haptic attachment for soft intraocular lens
US5258412A (en) 1992-03-09 1993-11-02 Peyman Gholam A Vitreous replacement
US5188494A (en) 1992-04-21 1993-02-23 Itt Corporation Torque indicator device and method for use with a threaded fastener
US5312330A (en) 1992-05-20 1994-05-17 Summit Technology, Inc. Medical treatment of the eye involving removal of the epithelium
US5422424A (en) 1992-05-26 1995-06-06 The Regents Of The University Of California Antibiotic cryptdin peptides and methods of their use
US5292514A (en) 1992-06-24 1994-03-08 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Azlactone-functional substrates, corneal prostheses, and manufacture and use thereof
US5306297A (en) 1992-07-06 1994-04-26 Kabi Pharmacia Ophthalmics, Inc. Intraocular lens haptic with enlarged anchoring head
US5354331A (en) 1992-07-15 1994-10-11 Schachar Ronald A Treatment of presbyopia and other eye disorders
US5322649A (en) 1992-08-03 1994-06-21 Kabi Pharmacia Ophthalmics, Inc. Method of manufacturing surgical implants
US5405384A (en) * 1992-09-03 1995-04-11 Keravision, Inc. Astigmatic correcting intrastromal corneal ring
CN1095259A (en) 1992-09-03 1994-11-23 克拉维辛股份有限公司 Astigmatic gorrecting intrastromai corneai ring
US5300118A (en) 1992-09-21 1994-04-05 Keravision Adjustable devices for corneal curvature adjustment
US5323788A (en) 1992-09-21 1994-06-28 Keravision Overlapping split ring device for corneal curvature adjustment
US5288293A (en) 1992-09-24 1994-02-22 Donnell Jr Francis E O In vivo modification of refractive power of an intraocular lens implant
US5300115A (en) 1992-11-19 1994-04-05 Keratos, Inc. Intraocular prosthesis
US5312393A (en) 1992-12-31 1994-05-17 Douglas Mastel Ring lighting system for microsurgery
US5836313A (en) 1993-02-08 1998-11-17 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Methods for making composite hydrogels for corneal prostheses
US5437274A (en) 1993-02-25 1995-08-01 Gholam A. Peyman Method of visualizing submicron-size vesicles and particles in blood circulation
US6090141A (en) 1993-03-05 2000-07-18 Lindstrom; Richard L. Small intracorneal lens
US5771088A (en) 1993-03-27 1998-06-23 Pilkington Barnes Hind, Inc. Contact lens designed to accommodate and correct for the effects of presbyopia
GB9306424D0 (en) 1993-03-27 1993-05-19 Pilkington Visioncare Inc Contact lens designed to accommodate and correct for the effects of presbyopia
US5325880A (en) 1993-04-19 1994-07-05 Tini Alloy Company Shape memory alloy film actuated microvalve
US5507740A (en) 1993-05-03 1996-04-16 O'donnell, Jr.; Francis E. Corneal topography enhancement device
US5282971A (en) 1993-05-11 1994-02-01 Pall Corporation Positively charged polyvinylidene fluoride membrane
USD354566S (en) * 1993-05-14 1995-01-17 Dental Vision Direct, Inc., a Texas corporation Video imaging dental camera for viewing teeth
US5571177A (en) 1993-06-14 1996-11-05 Allergan IOL structured for post-operative re-positioning and method for post-operative IOL re-positioning
US5374272A (en) 1993-06-29 1994-12-20 Vitrophage, Inc. Apparatus and method for mechanically dilating the pupil of an eye
US5474548A (en) 1993-07-14 1995-12-12 Knopp; Carl F. Method of establishing a unique machine independent reference frame for the eye
US5870167A (en) 1993-07-14 1999-02-09 Knopp; Carl F. Apparatus and method for imaging anterior structures of the eye
CA2128938C (en) 1993-07-28 1999-09-14 Shiao H. Chang Intraocular lens with fracture resistant haptics
SG52643A1 (en) 1993-08-02 1998-09-28 Keravision Inc Segmented preformed intrastromal corneal insert
WO1995003747A1 (en) 1993-08-02 1995-02-09 Keravision, Inc. Segmented pliable intrastromal corneal insert
CA2169771C (en) 1993-08-18 2000-02-15 Gyorgy Abraham Method and optical means for improving or modifying color vision and method for making said optical means
JP2812860B2 (en) 1993-08-31 1998-10-22 株式会社メニコン Intraocular lens
US5603774A (en) 1993-09-27 1997-02-18 Alcon Laboratories, Inc. Method for reducing tackiness of soft acrylic polymers
US5434630A (en) 1993-09-27 1995-07-18 Bransome; Robert Corrective contact lens system
US5433745A (en) 1993-10-13 1995-07-18 Allergan, Inc. Corneal implants and methods for producing same
JP3439809B2 (en) 1993-12-24 2003-08-25 京セラ株式会社 Artificial cornea
ATE274837T1 (en) 1994-01-07 2004-09-15 Addition Technology Inc SYSTEM FOR INTRODUCING MATERIAL INTO THE CORNEAL STREAM
US5505723A (en) 1994-02-10 1996-04-09 Summit Technology, Inc. Photo-refractive keratectomy
US5516522A (en) 1994-03-14 1996-05-14 Board Of Supervisors Of Louisiana State University Biodegradable porous device for long-term drug delivery with constant rate release and method of making the same
JP3406677B2 (en) 1994-03-31 2003-05-12 京セラ株式会社 Artificial cornea
US20030060880A1 (en) 1994-04-08 2003-03-27 Vladimir Feingold Toric intraocular lens
US5837156A (en) 1994-04-21 1998-11-17 Cumming; J. Stuart Methods of fabricating intraocular lenses and lens molds
US5632773A (en) 1994-05-03 1997-05-27 Allergan, Inc. Biostable corneal implants
US5547473A (en) 1994-05-12 1996-08-20 Syntec, Inc. Pneumatic vitrectomy for retinal attachment
US5507806A (en) 1994-05-13 1996-04-16 Pharmacia Iovision, Inc. Multi-faceted intraocular lens
US6302877B1 (en) 1994-06-29 2001-10-16 Luis Antonio Ruiz Apparatus and method for performing presbyopia corrective surgery
US5910537A (en) 1994-07-22 1999-06-08 Staar Surgical Company Inc. Biocompatible, optically transparent, ultraviolet light absorbing, polymeric material based upon collagen and method of making
US5527356A (en) 1994-08-02 1996-06-18 Syntec, Inc. Retinal plug
US5697973A (en) 1994-09-19 1997-12-16 Peyman; Gholam A. Intraocular silicone lens
JP3640690B2 (en) * 1994-10-03 2005-04-20 株式会社ニデック Intraocular lens
WO1996010968A1 (en) 1994-10-06 1996-04-18 Vladimir Feingold Intraocular contact lens and method of implantation
US5579063A (en) 1994-10-11 1996-11-26 Magnante; Peter C. Methods and devices for the measurement of the degradation of image quality on the retina of the human eye due to cataract
JPH08164155A (en) 1994-12-14 1996-06-25 Nikon Corp Illuminator for ophthalmology
JP3625097B2 (en) 1995-02-07 2005-03-02 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Colored contact lens and manufacturing method thereof
JP2967093B2 (en) 1995-02-23 1999-10-25 ホーヤ株式会社 Flexible intraocular lens
US5653752A (en) 1995-02-28 1997-08-05 Keravision, Inc. Adjustable devices for corneal curvature adjustment
US5628795A (en) 1995-03-15 1997-05-13 Langerman David W Spare parts for use in ophthalmic surgical procedures
US6110166A (en) 1995-03-20 2000-08-29 Escalon Medical Corporation Method for corneal laser surgery
JPH08323192A (en) * 1995-03-24 1996-12-10 Tdk Corp Method for changing interface between substances
US5697923A (en) 1995-03-29 1997-12-16 Poler; Stanley Corneal drape for use in performing a photorefractory keratectomy procedure
US5652638A (en) 1995-05-04 1997-07-29 Johnson & Johnson Vision Products, Inc. Concentric annular ring lens designs for astigmatism
US5693094A (en) 1995-05-09 1997-12-02 Allergan IOL for reducing secondary opacification
US5672885A (en) 1995-07-10 1997-09-30 Qc Optics, Inc. Surface displacement detection and adjustment system
ES2110904B1 (en) * 1995-07-17 1998-10-01 Montserrat Gibernau Antonio PACKAGED FOOD PRODUCTS VENDING MACHINE.
US5752967A (en) 1995-07-27 1998-05-19 Kritzinger; Michiel S. Corneal surface marker and marking method for improving laser centration
US5623794A (en) * 1995-08-18 1997-04-29 Bohls; Glen Framing structure apparatus and method for earth sheltered, multi-level structure
USD375245S (en) 1995-08-18 1996-11-05 Irving Thomas W E Pistol lock
US5771742A (en) 1995-09-11 1998-06-30 Tini Alloy Company Release device for retaining pin
US20010027314A1 (en) 1995-10-20 2001-10-04 Peyman Gholam A. Intrastromal corneal modification via laser
US6221067B1 (en) 1995-10-20 2001-04-24 Gholam A. Peyman Corneal modification via implantation
US6280470B1 (en) 1995-10-20 2001-08-28 Gholam A. Peyman Intrastromal corneal modification
US5919185A (en) 1997-04-25 1999-07-06 Peyman; Gholam A. Universal implant blank for modifying corneal curvature and methods of modifying corneal curvature therewith
US6551307B2 (en) 2001-03-23 2003-04-22 Gholam A. Peyman Vision correction using intrastromal pocket and flap
US6989008B2 (en) 2001-03-23 2006-01-24 Minu Llc Adjustable ablatable inlay
US5964748A (en) 1995-10-20 1999-10-12 Peyman; Gholam A. Intrastromal corneal modification
US20050143717A1 (en) 2001-04-27 2005-06-30 Peyman Gholam A. Method of treatment of refractive errors using subepithelial or intrastromal corneal inlay with bonding coating
US20090069817A1 (en) 1995-10-20 2009-03-12 Acufocus, Inc. Intrastromal corneal modification
US5929968A (en) 1995-11-01 1999-07-27 Cotie; Robert L. Scleral-corneal contact lens
FR2743154B1 (en) 1995-12-29 1998-03-06 Essilor Int MULTIFOCAL ARTIFICIAL EYE LENS WITH ILLUMINATION TRANSPARENCY
ATE423568T1 (en) 1996-01-05 2009-03-15 Autoimmune Inc METHOD FOR PRODUCING TYPE-II COLLAGEN
US5702440A (en) 1996-01-26 1997-12-30 Allergan Multifocal ophthalmic lens for dim-lighting conditions
FR2744013B1 (en) 1996-01-30 1998-04-24 Corneal Ind KERATOPROTHESIS DEVICE
US5624456A (en) 1996-02-07 1997-04-29 Hellenkamp; Johann F. Automatic surgical device for cutting a cornea
JPH11503657A (en) 1996-02-09 1999-03-30 ケラ ビジョン,インコーポレイテッド Segmented intrastromal insert and method for altering corneal refractive properties
US5628794A (en) * 1996-03-08 1997-05-13 Lindstrom; Richard L. Multifocal corneal implant lens having a hydrogelo coating
US5800533A (en) 1996-03-18 1998-09-01 Harry C. Eggleston Adjustable intraocular lens implant with magnetic adjustment facilities
US5628798A (en) 1996-03-18 1997-05-13 Harry C. Eggleston Adjustable and removable intraocular lens implant
US20020128710A1 (en) 1996-03-18 2002-09-12 Eggleston Harry C. Modular intraocular implant
US6171336B1 (en) 1996-03-26 2001-01-09 Mark R. Sawusch Method, implant, and apparatus for refractive keratoplasty
US5693268A (en) 1996-04-01 1997-12-02 Johnson & Johnson Vision Products, Inc. Wedge demolding of cast lens mold assemblies
US5925294A (en) 1996-04-24 1999-07-20 Hoya Corporation Process for the production of an intraocular lens
US5991821A (en) * 1996-04-30 1999-11-23 International Business Machines Corporation Method for serializing actions of independent process groups
US5662706A (en) 1996-06-14 1997-09-02 Pbh, Inc. Variable transmissivity annular mask lens for the treatment of optical aberrations
US5905561A (en) 1996-06-14 1999-05-18 Pbh, Inc. Annular mask lens having diffraction reducing edges
US5746558A (en) 1996-07-24 1998-05-05 Lockheed Martin Corporation Locking apparatus for fastening system
US5769889A (en) 1996-09-05 1998-06-23 Kelman; Charles D. High myopia anterior chamber lens with anti-glare mask
US5846186A (en) 1996-09-24 1998-12-08 Mercury Enterprises, Inc. Endoscope system and coupling arrangement for use therewith
AU721065B2 (en) 1996-11-13 2000-06-22 Menicon Co., Ltd Artificial cornea
US20010041884A1 (en) 1996-11-25 2001-11-15 Frey Rudolph W. Method for determining and correcting vision
US5965330A (en) 1996-12-06 1999-10-12 Pbh, Inc. Methods for fabricating annular mask lens having diffraction-reducing edges
AU7533696A (en) 1996-12-13 1998-06-18 Ciba-Geigy Ag New materials
US5843186A (en) 1996-12-20 1998-12-01 Implemed, Inc. Intraocular lens with antimicrobial activity
CA2229093A1 (en) 1997-02-13 1998-08-13 Joseph J. Berto Handlebar device
US6228114B1 (en) 1997-04-01 2001-05-08 Joseph Y. Lee Adjustable corneal ring
AU7116998A (en) 1997-04-14 1998-11-11 Keravision, Inc. Radial pocket forming and insert positioning instruments, corneal marker, and method for using same
US20010034516A1 (en) 1997-04-25 2001-10-25 Peyman Gholam A. Universal implant blank for modifying corneal curvature and methods of modifying corneal curvature therewith
US6063073A (en) 1997-04-25 2000-05-16 Peyman; Gholam A. Universal implant blank for modifying corneal curvature and methods of modifying corneal curvature therewith
US5903099A (en) 1997-05-23 1999-05-11 Tini Alloy Company Fabrication system, method and apparatus for microelectromechanical devices
US5980040A (en) 1997-06-30 1999-11-09 Wesley Jessen Corporation Pinhole lens and contact lens
US5960812A (en) 1997-07-25 1999-10-05 Tini Alloy Company Fluid flow control valve
ES2190516T3 (en) 1997-08-06 2003-08-01 Sis Ltd Surgical Instr Systems MICROQUERATOMO TO PERFORM THE CORNEA SURGERY WITH LASER.
WO1999007309A1 (en) * 1997-08-07 1999-02-18 Alcon Laboratories, Inc. Intracorneal diffractive lens
US6488707B1 (en) 1997-08-20 2002-12-03 Thinoptx, Inc. Method of implanting a deformable intraocular corrective lens
US6096077A (en) 1997-08-20 2000-08-01 Thinoptx, Inc. Deformable intraocular corrective lens
JPH1184125A (en) 1997-09-12 1999-03-26 Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co Ltd Photopolymerizable composition for color filter and production of color filter
JPH1195852A (en) * 1997-09-22 1999-04-09 Kuroishi Tekko Kk Accelerator pad attaching structure for accelerator pedal
US5964776A (en) 1997-09-24 1999-10-12 Peyman; Gholam A. Internal keratome apparatus and method for using the same to form a pocket/flap between layers of a live cornea
MC2461A1 (en) 1997-09-26 1998-12-18 Exsymol Sa Ophthalmic and implantable devices covered with a coating and methods for producing the latter
RU2138837C1 (en) 1997-10-31 1999-09-27 Институт автоматики и электрометрии СО РАН Raster diffraction-aperture mask to correct defective eye sight
US20020055753A1 (en) 1997-12-18 2002-05-09 Thomas A. Silvestrini Corneal implant methods and pliable implant therefor
US5876442A (en) * 1998-01-15 1999-03-02 Visioncare Ltd. Intraocular lens implant with telescope support
US6161544A (en) 1998-01-28 2000-12-19 Keratoform, Inc. Methods for accelerated orthokeratology
US5946748A (en) 1998-02-17 1999-09-07 Wang; Yi-Lung Multipurpose body-turn-over apparatus
JP4564655B2 (en) 1998-04-21 2010-10-20 ユニバーシティ オブ コネチカット Free-form nano fabrication using multiphoton excitation
US6201036B1 (en) 1998-07-21 2001-03-13 Mezhoiraslevoi Nauchno-Tekhnichesky Komplex “Mikrokhirurgia Glaza” Light-curable polymer material, method for making an elastic intraocular lens, and an elastic intraocular lens
CN1110711C (en) 1998-07-24 2003-06-04 长春科利尔光学制品有限公司 Resin glasses able to correct colour vision by reduce concave reflection
JP2002522803A (en) 1998-08-06 2002-07-23 ジョン ビー ダブリュー レット Multifocal aspheric lens
US6083236A (en) 1998-08-12 2000-07-04 Feingold; Vladimir Keratome method and apparatus
US6599305B1 (en) 1998-08-12 2003-07-29 Vladimir Feingold Intracorneal lens placement method and apparatus
US20050049621A1 (en) 1998-08-12 2005-03-03 Vladimir Feingold Intracorneal lens placement method and apparatus
CA2338033C (en) 1998-08-12 2008-07-29 Novartis Ag Corneal onlay
MXPA01003343A (en) 1998-10-02 2003-06-24 Scient Optics Inc Method for diagnosing and improving vision.
US6178593B1 (en) 1998-10-23 2001-01-30 Robert J. Carlson Vertical pin automobile door hinge wear compensator
US6197057B1 (en) * 1998-10-27 2001-03-06 Gholam A. Peyman Lens conversion system for teledioptic or difractive configurations
US6228115B1 (en) 1998-11-05 2001-05-08 Bausch & Lomb Surgical, Inc. Intraocular lenses with improved axial stability
US6164777A (en) 1998-12-16 2000-12-26 Bausch & Lomb Incorporated Color-imparting contact lenses with interference coating and method for making the same
US6626941B2 (en) 1998-12-23 2003-09-30 Anamed, Inc. Corneal implant and method of manufacture
US6102946A (en) 1998-12-23 2000-08-15 Anamed, Inc. Corneal implant and method of manufacture
WO2000038593A1 (en) 1998-12-29 2000-07-06 Visioncare Ltd. Telescopic intraocular lens
FR2787991B1 (en) 1998-12-31 2001-05-25 Medicale De Prec S M P Sa Soc DEVICE FOR TREATING PRESBYGIA OR OTHER EYE CONDITION
US6164282A (en) 1999-01-27 2000-12-26 Allergan Sales, Inc. Methods for restoring and/or enhancing accommodation in pseudo phakia
US6210005B1 (en) 1999-02-04 2001-04-03 Valdemar Portney Multifocal ophthalmic lens with reduced halo size
US6165189A (en) 1999-02-10 2000-12-26 Sis, Ltd. Microkeratome for performing lasik surgery
US6554424B1 (en) 1999-03-01 2003-04-29 Boston Innovative Optices, Inc. System and method for increasing the depth of focus of the human eye
JP2000249890A (en) 1999-03-02 2000-09-14 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Diaphragm device
EP1169722A1 (en) 1999-03-18 2002-01-09 Cambridge Research & Instrumentation, Inc. High-efficiency multiple probe imaging system
US6997428B1 (en) 1999-03-31 2006-02-14 Novartis Ag Contact lens mold
US6406494B1 (en) 1999-04-30 2002-06-18 Allergan Sales, Inc. Moveable intraocular lens
US6138307A (en) 1999-05-06 2000-10-31 Surgical Concepts, Inc. Corneal intra-stromel prostheses
EP1176454B1 (en) 1999-05-12 2003-07-30 Menicon Co., Ltd. Ocular lens materials and process for producing the same
US6152959A (en) 1999-05-14 2000-11-28 Portney; Valdemar Iris fixated intraocular lens
US6469844B1 (en) 1999-06-02 2002-10-22 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Lens holding method and lens holder
US6461384B1 (en) 1999-06-17 2002-10-08 Bausch & Lomb Incorporated Intraocular lenses
US6423093B1 (en) 1999-09-14 2002-07-23 The Lions Eye Institute Of Western Australia Incorporated Method of insertion of keratoprostheses
US6352764B1 (en) 1999-08-09 2002-03-05 3M Innovative Properties Company Multi-layer articles including UV-absorbing polymeric compositions
US6217596B1 (en) 1999-09-01 2001-04-17 Samir G. Farah Corneal surface and pupillary cardinal axes marker
US7008396B1 (en) 1999-09-03 2006-03-07 Restorvision, Inc. Ophthalmic device and method of manufacture and use
US20020082288A1 (en) 1999-09-16 2002-06-27 Gerald Horn Ophthalmic formulations comprising an imidazoline
US6280471B1 (en) 1999-09-16 2001-08-28 Gholam A. Peyman Glare-free intraocular lens and method for using the same
US6277146B1 (en) 1999-09-16 2001-08-21 Gholam A. Peyman Glare-free intraocular lens and method for using the same
EP1214065A4 (en) 1999-09-16 2009-01-07 Ocularis Pharma Inc A method for optimizing pupil size using alpha antagonist
US6649722B2 (en) 1999-12-10 2003-11-18 Novartis Ag Contact lens
CA2295431A1 (en) 2000-01-06 2001-07-06 Scott Howard Phillips Ophthalmic apparatus
US6228113B1 (en) 2000-01-10 2001-05-08 Board Of Supervisors Of Louisiana State University And Agricultural And Mechanical College Intracorneal astigmatic onlay
US6391230B1 (en) 2000-02-18 2002-05-21 Bausch & Lomb Incorporated Intraocular lens manufacturing process
US6283595B1 (en) 2000-02-24 2001-09-04 Joseph L. Breger Pinhole presbyopic contact lenses
DE10010683A1 (en) 2000-03-04 2001-09-06 Morcher Gmbh Intraoccular lens with a transparent central region and a radially adjoining iris diaphragm for correction/cover of an aniridia is produced as a single unit
US6458141B1 (en) 2000-03-10 2002-10-01 Gholam A. Peyman Method and apparatus for creating a flap in the cornea and incisions or shrinkage under the flap to correct vision disorders
US6949093B1 (en) 2000-03-21 2005-09-27 Minu, L.L.C. Adjustable universal implant blank for modifying corneal curvature and methods of modifying corneal curvature therewith
US6436092B1 (en) 2000-03-21 2002-08-20 Gholam A. Peyman Adjustable universal implant blank for modifying corneal curvature and methods of modifying corneal curvature therewith
US6624730B2 (en) 2000-03-28 2003-09-23 Tini Alloy Company Thin film shape memory alloy actuated microrelay
US6755858B1 (en) 2000-04-07 2004-06-29 Thomas C. White Prosthetic corneal graft and method
US6470108B1 (en) 2000-04-26 2002-10-22 Tini Alloy Company Optical switching device and method
US7635388B1 (en) 2000-05-04 2009-12-22 Tyler Thomas D Device and method for incremental correction of sight disorders and occular diseases
US6588022B1 (en) 2000-05-09 2003-07-08 Bruce Anders Head dome and strap connection system
JP3073059U (en) 2000-05-09 2000-11-14 船井電機株式会社 Lens holder
US6425917B1 (en) 2000-05-12 2002-07-30 Tekia Phakic iol film frame
US6554860B2 (en) 2000-05-15 2003-04-29 Bausch & Lomb Incorporated Foldable iris fixated intraocular lenses
KR100335722B1 (en) 2000-05-17 2002-05-09 김쌍기 Clored Lens For Beauty And Manufacturing Thereof
US6663644B1 (en) 2000-06-02 2003-12-16 Med-Logics, Inc. Cutting blade assembly for a microkeratome
US20010050750A1 (en) 2000-06-08 2001-12-13 Breger Joseph L. Pinhole presbyopic contact lenses
JP2002014772A (en) 2000-06-30 2002-01-18 Minolta Co Ltd Touch panel, display panel, and display device
US6419697B1 (en) 2000-07-07 2002-07-16 Charles David Kelman Clip-on optic assembly
US6790298B2 (en) 2000-07-10 2004-09-14 Tini Alloy Company Method of fabrication of free standing shape memory alloy thin film
US6544286B1 (en) 2000-07-18 2003-04-08 Tissue Engineering Refraction, Inc. Pre-fabricated corneal tissue lens method of corneal overlay to correct vision
US7497866B2 (en) 2000-07-18 2009-03-03 Tissue Engineering Refraction Inc. Methods for producing epithelial flaps on the cornea and for placement of ocular devices and lenses beneath an epithelial flap or membrane, epithelial delaminating devices, and structures of epithelium and ocular devices and lenses
US7462194B1 (en) 2000-08-04 2008-12-09 Blake Larry W Two part “L”-shaped phakic IOL
AR030341A1 (en) 2000-08-14 2003-08-20 Novartis Ag MOLDED BIOMEDICAL ITEMS
US6543610B1 (en) 2000-09-12 2003-04-08 Alok Nigam System for packaging and handling an implant and method of use
JP3709335B2 (en) 2000-09-28 2005-10-26 株式会社ニデック Ophthalmic equipment
EP1337890A1 (en) * 2000-09-28 2003-08-27 Novartis Pharma GmbH Fenestrated lens for increased tear flow and method for making the same
US6614570B2 (en) 2000-09-29 2003-09-02 Tini Alloy Company Shutter for fiber optic systems
US6607527B1 (en) 2000-10-17 2003-08-19 Luis Antonio Ruiz Method and apparatus for precision laser surgery
US6335190B1 (en) 2000-10-20 2002-01-01 New England Biolabs, Inc. Method for cloning and producing the BsmI restriction endonuclease in E. coli
US6515006B2 (en) 2000-11-08 2003-02-04 Hmt Pharma, Inc. Ophthalmic formulation which modulates dilation
US6592621B1 (en) 2000-11-10 2003-07-15 Rudolph S. Domino Flexible intra-ocular lens of variable focus
US6811256B1 (en) 2000-12-08 2004-11-02 Paul Douglas Becherer Post-ophthalmologic procedure lenses and methods
US20020167640A1 (en) 2000-12-22 2002-11-14 Francis Charles Auxilium Contact lens with opaque iris pattern
DE10065380B4 (en) * 2000-12-27 2006-05-18 Infineon Technologies Ag Method for characterizing and simulating a chemical-mechanical polishing process
US20020173846A1 (en) 2001-02-01 2002-11-21 Larry Blake Two part "L"- or "S"-shaped phakic IOL
US20020120329A1 (en) 2001-02-28 2002-08-29 Allergan Sales, Inc. Moveable intraocular lenses and combinations of intraocular lenses
US6742761B2 (en) 2001-04-10 2004-06-01 Tini Alloy Company Miniature latching valve
US20050222679A1 (en) 2001-04-27 2005-10-06 Peyman Gholam A Bifocal implant and method for altering the refractive properties of the eye
US20050182488A1 (en) 2001-04-27 2005-08-18 Peyman Gholam A. Implant and method for altering the refractive properties of the eye
US7645299B2 (en) 2001-05-11 2010-01-12 Koziol Jeffrey E Intracorneal lens system having connected lenses
US6589280B1 (en) 2001-05-11 2003-07-08 Jeffrey E. Koziol Method for producing a multifocal corneal surface using intracorneal microscopic lenses
US6638305B2 (en) 2001-05-15 2003-10-28 Advanced Medical Optics, Inc. Monofocal intraocular lens convertible to multifocal intraocular lens
CA2455357C (en) 2001-06-15 2009-09-01 The University Of Houston System Thin film optical detectors for retinal implantation and methods for making and using same
US20020196409A1 (en) 2001-06-22 2002-12-26 Bausch & Lomb Incorporated Lens with colored portion
US6729599B2 (en) 2001-06-26 2004-05-04 Tini Alloy Company Liquid microvalve
US6497700B1 (en) 2001-06-28 2002-12-24 Lahaye Leon C. Multi-function surgical instrument for facilitating ophthalmic laser surgery
US6655804B2 (en) * 2001-06-29 2003-12-02 Daniel G. Streibig Colored contact lens and method of making same
US6638304B2 (en) 2001-07-20 2003-10-28 Massachusetts Eye & Ear Infirmary Vision prosthesis
US6533416B1 (en) 2001-07-20 2003-03-18 Ocular Sciences, Inc. Contact or intraocular lens and method for its preparation
US6702807B2 (en) 2001-09-10 2004-03-09 Minu, L.L.C. Ablatable intracorneal inlay with predetermined refractive properties
US20030071893A1 (en) 2001-10-05 2003-04-17 David Miller System and method of providing visual documentation during surgery
US6575573B2 (en) 2001-10-17 2003-06-10 Carl Zeiss Ophthalmic Systems, Inc. Method and apparatus for measuring a corneal profile of an eye
US6786926B2 (en) 2001-11-09 2004-09-07 Minu, L.L.C. Method and apparatus for alignment of intracorneal inlay
US7037338B2 (en) 2001-12-14 2006-05-02 Toshiyuki Nagamoto Intraocular ring assembly and artificial lens kit
WO2003059208A2 (en) 2002-01-14 2003-07-24 Advanced Medical Optics, Inc. Accommodating intraocular lens with integral capsular bag ring
US6620634B2 (en) 2002-01-17 2003-09-16 Tini Alloy Company Method of accurately measuring compositions of thin film shape memory alloys
US6669795B2 (en) 2002-01-17 2003-12-30 Tini Alloy Company Methods of fabricating high transition temperature SMA, and SMA materials made by the methods
US8048155B2 (en) 2002-02-02 2011-11-01 Powervision, Inc. Intraocular implant devices
WO2003079272A1 (en) 2002-03-15 2003-09-25 University Of Washington Materials and methods for simulating focal shifts in viewers using large depth of focus displays
US20030204258A1 (en) 2002-04-24 2003-10-30 Graham William M. Posterior chamber phakic lens
US20030216763A1 (en) 2002-05-14 2003-11-20 Patel Anilbhai S. Method of determining the visual axis of an eye
WO2003102498A1 (en) 2002-05-30 2003-12-11 Visx, Inc. “tracking torsional eye orientation and position”
WO2003105725A2 (en) 2002-06-18 2003-12-24 Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Artificial cornea
US6951556B2 (en) 2002-07-01 2005-10-04 Epstein Robert L Method and apparatus for correcting off-center laser ablations in refractive surgery
US7364674B1 (en) * 2002-07-23 2008-04-29 Advanced Optical Technologies, Inc. Corneal implants produced by irradiation of polymer films
EP1741457A1 (en) 2002-08-09 2007-01-10 Ottawa Health Research Institute Ocular implant
US20040106929A1 (en) 2002-08-20 2004-06-03 Samuel Masket Method and apparatus for performing an accurately sized and placed anterior capsulorhexis
JP2006508709A (en) * 2002-09-13 2006-03-16 オキュラー サイエンシス インコーポレイテッド Apparatus and method for improving visual acuity
US20040056371A1 (en) 2002-09-25 2004-03-25 Medennium, Inc. Method of manufacturing ophthalmic lenses made from hydrophobic acrylic polymers
US20040068317A1 (en) 2002-10-07 2004-04-08 Knight Patricia M. Anterior chamber intraocular lens with size and position indicators
US8172395B2 (en) 2002-12-03 2012-05-08 Novartis Ag Medical devices having antimicrobial coatings thereon
US7387759B2 (en) 2002-12-17 2008-06-17 Novartis Ag System and method for curing polymeric moldings having a masking collar
PL1620049T3 (en) 2003-05-02 2007-06-29 Albert Daxer Device for cutting the cornea of an eye
US20050288784A1 (en) 2004-06-23 2005-12-29 Peyman Gholam A Bifocal intraocular telescope for low vision correction
US6951391B2 (en) 2003-06-16 2005-10-04 Apollo Optical Systems Llc Bifocal multiorder diffractive lenses for vision correction
US7287852B2 (en) 2003-06-30 2007-10-30 Fiala Werner J Intra-ocular lens or contact lens exhibiting large depth of focus
JP4038454B2 (en) 2003-07-31 2008-01-23 株式会社ニデック Intraocular lens
DK1654002T4 (en) 2003-08-07 2014-02-17 Allergan Inc Compositions for applying therapeutic agents to the eyes
US20050033422A1 (en) 2003-08-08 2005-02-10 Advanced Medical Optics, Inc. Glare reducing rough surfaces
US20050056954A1 (en) 2003-09-12 2005-03-17 Devlin Brian Gerrard Method for making contact lenses
US20050137703A1 (en) 2003-12-05 2005-06-23 Vanderbilt University Accommodative intraocular lens
US7025455B2 (en) 2003-12-19 2006-04-11 J&J Vision Care, Inc. Multifocal contact lenses having a pinhole
EP1699385B1 (en) 2003-12-29 2012-10-24 Abbott Medical Optics Inc. Intraocular lenses having a visible light-selective-transmissive-region
WO2005066662A1 (en) 2003-12-30 2005-07-21 Advanced Medical Optics, Inc. Intraocular lens materials suitable for insertion through a small bore cartridge
US20050187621A1 (en) 2004-02-24 2005-08-25 Brady Daniel G. Foldable unitary intraocular lens
US7909852B2 (en) 2004-03-31 2011-03-22 Depuy Spine Sarl Adjustable-angle spinal fixation element
TW201440760A (en) 2004-07-16 2014-11-01 Texas A & M Univ Sys Organic arsenic compounds, uses of the same in treating cancer and pharmaceutical compositions comprising the same
US10426600B2 (en) 2004-07-22 2019-10-01 University Of Houston Accommodating intraocular lens and methods of use
CN100368846C (en) 2004-08-13 2008-02-13 亚洲光学股份有限公司 Camera lens with regulating mechanism
US20060064077A1 (en) 2004-08-13 2006-03-23 Peyman Gholam A Method for correcting hyperopia and presbyopia using a laser and an inlay outside the visual axis of eye
US7061693B2 (en) 2004-08-16 2006-06-13 Xceed Imaging Ltd. Optical method and system for extended depth of focus
JP4555030B2 (en) 2004-09-02 2010-09-29 富士フイルム株式会社 Microlens array, optical member, and manufacturing method of microlens array
WO2006047534A1 (en) 2004-10-22 2006-05-04 Acufocus System and method for aligning an optic with an axis of an eye
US7922326B2 (en) 2005-10-25 2011-04-12 Abbott Medical Optics Inc. Ophthalmic lens with multiple phase plates
JP5011117B2 (en) 2004-10-25 2012-08-29 アボット・メディカル・オプティクス・インコーポレイテッド Ophthalmic lens having a plurality of phase plates
DE102004055683B4 (en) 2004-10-26 2006-09-07 Carl Zeiss Surgical Gmbh Eye Surgery Microscopy System and Method Therefor
US7455691B2 (en) 2004-11-03 2008-11-25 Biovision, Ag Intraocular and intracorneal refractive lenses
US7491350B2 (en) * 2004-12-01 2009-02-17 Acufocus, Inc. Method of making an ocular implant
US20060113054A1 (en) 2004-12-01 2006-06-01 Silvestrini Thomas A Method of making an ocular implant
US7446157B2 (en) 2004-12-07 2008-11-04 Key Medical Technologies, Inc. Nanohybrid polymers for ophthalmic applications
SE0403091D0 (en) 2004-12-20 2004-12-20 Amo Groningen Bv New composition for injectable ophthalmic lenses
DE102004061943A1 (en) 2004-12-22 2006-07-06 *Acri.Tec Gesellschaft für ophthalmologische Produkte mbH Artificial iris replacement implantable in one eye
US7976577B2 (en) 2005-04-14 2011-07-12 Acufocus, Inc. Corneal optic formed of degradation resistant polymer
US20060235428A1 (en) 2005-04-14 2006-10-19 Silvestrini Thomas A Ocular inlay with locator
US7842367B2 (en) 2005-05-05 2010-11-30 Key Medical Technologies, Inc. Ultra violet, violet, and blue light filtering polymers for ophthalmic applications
DE102005032041A1 (en) 2005-07-08 2007-01-18 Carl Zeiss Meditec Ag Device and method for changing an optical and / or mechanical property of a lens implanted in an eye
US20070032866A1 (en) 2005-08-05 2007-02-08 Valdemar Portney Accommodating diffractive intraocular lens
DE102005045197B4 (en) 2005-09-21 2010-12-09 Schott Ag Process for producing a hybrid optical lens
WO2007047425A1 (en) 2005-10-12 2007-04-26 Cellular Bioengineering, Inc. Resorbable cornea button
TWI437275B (en) 2005-10-20 2014-05-11 Mitsubishi Rayon Co Light regulating film, laminated light regulating film, and method for producing light regulating film and laminated light regulating film
CN1951843B (en) 2005-10-21 2011-09-28 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 Optic element forming device
ITBO20050647A1 (en) 2005-10-26 2007-04-27 Marinella Bergamaschi CONTACT LENSES PHOTOCROMATIC HOLES
US20070129797A1 (en) 2005-12-01 2007-06-07 Revision Optics, Inc. Intracorneal inlays
GB0603734D0 (en) 2006-02-24 2006-04-05 Applied Multilayers Ltd Method and apparatus for forming a coated optical lens
US20070219542A1 (en) 2006-03-15 2007-09-20 Toru Yahagi Surgical procedure and instrumentation for intrastromal implants of lens or strengthening materials
US8113651B2 (en) 2006-03-20 2012-02-14 High Performance Optics, Inc. High performance corneal inlay
CN100484498C (en) 2006-04-19 2009-05-06 华中科技大学 A flexible retina chip and preparation method thereof
US20070258143A1 (en) 2006-05-08 2007-11-08 Valdemar Portney Aspheric multifocal diffractive ophthalmic lens
EP2074472A2 (en) 2006-05-31 2009-07-01 Junzhong Liang Methods and apparatus for improving vision
US8568478B2 (en) 2006-09-21 2013-10-29 Abbott Medical Optics Inc. Intraocular lenses for managing glare, adhesion, and cell migration
US20080077238A1 (en) 2006-09-21 2008-03-27 Advanced Medical Optics, Inc. Intraocular lenses for managing glare, adhesion, and cell migration
JP4812592B2 (en) 2006-10-27 2011-11-09 パナソニック株式会社 Manufacturing method of composite optical component
US20080151190A1 (en) 2006-12-21 2008-06-26 Bentley Joseph R Corneal measurment apparatus and a method of using the same
US7641337B2 (en) 2006-12-22 2010-01-05 Bausch & Lomb Incorporated Ophthalmic lens including photochromic material
AR064985A1 (en) 2007-01-22 2009-05-06 E Vision Llc FLEXIBLE ELECTROACTIVE LENS
US20080306587A1 (en) 2007-02-21 2008-12-11 Jingjong Your Lens Material and Methods of Curing with UV Light
US7926940B2 (en) 2007-02-23 2011-04-19 Pixeloptics, Inc. Advanced electro-active optic device
US20080255663A1 (en) 2007-04-13 2008-10-16 Akpek Esen K Artificial Cornea and Method of Making Same
US20080269884A1 (en) 2007-04-30 2008-10-30 Alcon, Inc. Graduated blue filtering intraocular lens
CN101322663A (en) 2007-06-14 2008-12-17 苏州六六视觉科技股份有限公司 Intraocular lens with iris diaphragm
US8414123B2 (en) 2007-08-13 2013-04-09 Novartis Ag Toric lenses alignment using pre-operative images
US9216080B2 (en) 2007-08-27 2015-12-22 Amo Groningen B.V. Toric lens with decreased sensitivity to cylinder power and rotation and method of using the same
US8740978B2 (en) 2007-08-27 2014-06-03 Amo Regional Holdings Intraocular lens having extended depth of focus
US8747466B2 (en) 2007-08-27 2014-06-10 Amo Groningen, B.V. Intraocular lens having extended depth of focus
EP2224881B1 (en) 2007-10-16 2014-04-23 Donald Tan Ophthalmic surgical device for endothelial keratoplasty for descemet's stripping automated endothelial keratoplasty (dsaek) surgery
US20090164008A1 (en) 2007-12-21 2009-06-25 Xin Hong Lens surface with combined diffractive, toric, and aspheric components
US8480734B2 (en) 2007-12-27 2013-07-09 Anew Optics, Inc. Intraocular lens with accommodation
CA2715537C (en) 2008-02-15 2016-09-06 Amo Regional Holdings System, ophthalmic lens, and method for extending depth of focus
JP5128308B2 (en) 2008-02-20 2013-01-23 Hoya株式会社 Intraocular lens manufacturing method
US8439498B2 (en) 2008-02-21 2013-05-14 Abbott Medical Optics Inc. Toric intraocular lens with modified power characteristics
US7780290B2 (en) 2008-02-21 2010-08-24 Abbott Medical Optics Inc. Toric intraocular lens with spatially-variant astigmatism
IL190577A0 (en) 2008-04-02 2008-12-29 Nulens Ltd Cartridge for storing an iol and forceps for use therewith
NL2001503C2 (en) 2008-04-21 2009-10-22 Oculentis B V Intraocular lens.
US8167940B2 (en) 2008-05-06 2012-05-01 Novartis Ag Aspheric toric intraocular lens
US9060847B2 (en) 2008-05-19 2015-06-23 University Of Rochester Optical hydrogel material with photosensitizer and method for modifying the refractive index
US20090306773A1 (en) 2008-06-04 2009-12-10 Acufocus, Inc. Opaque corneal insert for refractive correction
KR20100004777A (en) 2008-07-04 2010-01-13 김현호 Intraocular lens and correction method of postoperative refractive error of intraocular lens
KR101630260B1 (en) 2008-07-15 2016-06-14 알콘, 인코퍼레이티드 Extended depth of focus(edof) lens to increase pseudo-accommodatiion by utilizing pupil dynamics
RU2501054C2 (en) 2008-07-15 2013-12-10 Алькон, Инк. Accommodative intraocular lens (iol) having toric optical element and extended focal depth
US8441731B2 (en) 2008-09-04 2013-05-14 Innovega, Inc. System and apparatus for pixel matrix see-through display panels
US20100082017A1 (en) 2008-09-26 2010-04-01 Advanced Medical Optics, Inc. Laser modification of intraocular lens
JP2010104772A (en) 2008-09-30 2010-05-13 Yoichi Mikawa Intraocular lens
US8292953B2 (en) 2008-10-20 2012-10-23 Amo Groningen B.V. Multifocal intraocular lens
WO2010059214A2 (en) 2008-11-20 2010-05-27 Insight Innovations, Llc Biocompatible biodegradable intraocular implant system
US20120232649A1 (en) 2008-11-20 2012-09-13 Insight Innovations, Llc Intraocular Lens Cell Migration Inhibition System
US7794633B2 (en) 2008-11-26 2010-09-14 Aptina Imaging Corporation Method and apparatus for fabricating lens masters
US8529060B2 (en) 2009-02-19 2013-09-10 Alcon Research, Ltd. Intraocular lens alignment using corneal center
US8646916B2 (en) 2009-03-04 2014-02-11 Perfect Ip, Llc System for characterizing a cornea and obtaining an opthalmic lens
US8633292B2 (en) 2009-03-26 2014-01-21 Signet Armorlite Polyurethane-based photochromic optical materials
AU2010237607B2 (en) 2009-04-16 2015-05-21 Peter Leo Macken Surgical tool
US20100312336A1 (en) 2009-06-09 2010-12-09 Xin Hong Zonal diffractive multifocal intraocular lens with central monofocal diffractive region
TW201103518A (en) 2009-07-17 2011-02-01 Alcon Inc Accommodative IOL with toric optic and extended depth of focus
CA2770735C (en) 2009-08-13 2017-07-18 Acufocus, Inc. Masked intraocular implants and lenses
US10004593B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2018-06-26 Acufocus, Inc. Intraocular lens with elastic mask
AU2010282307A1 (en) 2009-08-13 2012-04-05 Acufocus, Inc. Corneal inlay with nutrient transport structures
JPWO2011030509A1 (en) 2009-09-11 2013-02-04 株式会社トプコン Ophthalmic surgery microscope
EP2488095A1 (en) 2009-10-13 2012-08-22 AcuFocus, Inc. Method and apparatus for centration of an ocular implant
ES2634212T3 (en) 2009-10-20 2017-09-27 Universal View Co., Ltd. Soft contact lens
WO2011053633A1 (en) 2009-10-27 2011-05-05 Agency For Science, Technology And Research Fast-response photochromic nanostructured contact lenses
EP2319457A1 (en) 2009-11-10 2011-05-11 Lenspecial S.r.L. Vision aiding system comprising at least one intraocular dioptric lens
USD656526S1 (en) 2009-11-10 2012-03-27 Acufocus, Inc. Ocular mask
GB2507465A (en) 2009-11-23 2014-05-07 Rayner Intraocular Lenses Ltd Intraocular lens with a Fresnel prism
US8287593B2 (en) 2009-11-24 2012-10-16 Valdemar Portney Adjustable multifocal intraocular lens system
US20120245683A1 (en) 2009-12-04 2012-09-27 Acufocus, Inc. Corneal implant for refractive correction
WO2011088107A2 (en) 2010-01-12 2011-07-21 Acufocus, Inc. Ocular inlay delivery system and method of use
US8531783B2 (en) 2010-02-09 2013-09-10 Xceed Imaging Ltd. Imaging method and system for imaging with extended depth of focus
WO2011123484A2 (en) 2010-03-31 2011-10-06 Novartis Ag Adjustable intraocular lens system
US8308800B2 (en) 2010-04-09 2012-11-13 Chu Milton W Intraocular lenses with high contrast haptics, materials, and methods
JP5511516B2 (en) 2010-05-31 2014-06-04 株式会社ニデック Ophthalmic equipment
ES2634491T3 (en) 2010-07-07 2017-09-28 California Institute Of Technology Photoinitiated on demand polymerization
US8207595B2 (en) 2010-10-05 2012-06-26 Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company, Ltd. Semiconductor having a high aspect ratio via
WO2012054402A2 (en) 2010-10-18 2012-04-26 University Of Utah Research Foundation Vision correction system
RU2459598C2 (en) 2010-12-01 2012-08-27 Федеральное государственное учреждение "Межотраслевой научно-технический комплекс "Микрохирургия глаза" имени академика С.Н. Федорова Федерального агентства по высокотехнологичной медицинской помощи" Device for increasing rotation stability of toric intraocular lens
USD645337S1 (en) 2011-01-15 2011-09-20 Group-A Autosports, Inc. Small washer
RU2456968C1 (en) 2011-03-23 2012-07-27 государственное бюджетное учреждение "Уфимский научно-исследовательский институт глазных болезней Академии наук Республики Башкортостан (ГБУ "Уф НИИ ГБ АН РБ") Method of toric intraocular lens implantation in children
RU2457812C1 (en) 2011-03-23 2012-08-10 Федеральное государственное учреждение "Межотраслевой научно-технический комплекс "Микрохирургия глаза" имени академика С.Н. Федорова Федерального агентства по высокотехнологичной медицинской помощи" Artificial intraocular lens
JP5932027B2 (en) 2011-06-06 2016-06-08 トランジションズ オプティカル, インコーポレイテッド Polarizing photochromic article
US9358735B2 (en) 2011-11-29 2016-06-07 Novartis Ag Method of treating a lens forming surface of at least one mold half of a mold for molding ophthalmic lenses
JP6046160B2 (en) 2011-12-02 2016-12-14 アキュフォーカス・インコーポレーテッド Ophthalmic mask with selective spectral transmission
US8950859B2 (en) 2011-12-25 2015-02-10 Global-Ok Vision, Inc. Multi-focal optical lenses
EP3915519A1 (en) 2012-01-24 2021-12-01 The Regents of the University of Colorado, a body corporate Modular intraocular lens designs
RU2493801C1 (en) 2012-01-31 2013-09-27 Владимир Николаевич Трубилин Marker of capsulorexis and astigmatic axis of toric intraocular lens
DE112013001018T5 (en) 2012-02-16 2014-10-30 Acufocus, Inc. A mask having ocular device for implantation next to an intraocular lens
WO2013158942A1 (en) 2012-04-20 2013-10-24 Hanita Lenses R.C.A. Ltd. Intraocular assembly
US20130289543A1 (en) 2012-04-23 2013-10-31 David Haydn Mordaunt System and method for in situ creation of a small aperture intraocular lens
RU2517488C2 (en) 2012-04-26 2014-05-27 Государственное бюджетное образовательное учреждение высшего профессионального образования "Самарский государственный медицинский университет" Министерства здравоохранения Российской Федерации (ГБОУ ВПО СамГМУ Минздрава России) Method of presbyopia correction
RU134784U1 (en) 2012-07-04 2013-11-27 Общество с ограниченной ответственностью предприятие "Репер-НН" Intraocular lens
RU2511081C1 (en) 2012-08-03 2014-04-10 Владимир Николаевич Трубилин Toric marker of capsulorrhexis
WO2014054946A1 (en) 2012-10-01 2014-04-10 Akkolens International B.V. Artificial asymmetrical pupil for extended depth of field
US20140121767A1 (en) 2012-10-31 2014-05-01 Novartis Ag Method and system for providing a toric intraocular lens
US20140131905A1 (en) 2012-11-09 2014-05-15 Acufocus, Inc. Process for manufacturing an intraocular lens
RU2500368C1 (en) 2012-11-09 2013-12-10 федеральное государственное бюджетное учреждение "Межотраслевой научно-технический комплекс "Микрохирургия глаза" имени академика С.Н. Федорова" Министерства здравоохранения Российской Федерации Method of implanting toric intraocular lenses
US8998984B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2015-04-07 Andrew F. Phillips Adjustable toric intraocular lens
US9204962B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2015-12-08 Acufocus, Inc. In situ adjustable optical mask
US9427922B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2016-08-30 Acufocus, Inc. Process for manufacturing an intraocular lens with an embedded mask
RU134049U1 (en) 2013-04-02 2013-11-10 Общество с ограниченной ответственностью "Приморский центр микрохирургии глаза" TORIC INTRAOCULAR LENS WITH LABELING OF CYLINDRICAL COMPONENT
CN105491981B (en) 2013-04-17 2018-04-13 光学医疗公司 Laser datum for the axis alignment in cataract operation
ES2407457B1 (en) 2013-05-07 2014-04-09 Francisco Javier FERNÁNDEZ CAMBRA Pre-operative toric axis corneal marker
DE102013105738A1 (en) 2013-06-04 2014-12-04 Faramarz Madjlessi Laser treatment device for refractive surgery
BR102013015451A2 (en) 2013-06-19 2014-06-10 Claudio Lovaglio Cancado Trindade SMALL OPENING INTRA-OCULAR IMPLANT (PINHOLE) FOR EXPANDING THE DEPTH OF FOCUS
US9968295B2 (en) 2013-08-07 2018-05-15 Novartis Ag Surgical guidance and planning software for astigmatism treatment
WO2015021323A1 (en) 2013-08-08 2015-02-12 Acufocus, Inc. Intraocular lens with elastic mask
KR101504476B1 (en) 2013-08-23 2015-03-20 주식회사 지앤아이솔루션 Optical lens, fabrication appratus and fabrication method thereof
WO2015069927A1 (en) 2013-11-06 2015-05-14 Nexisvision, Inc. Bimodular contact lenses
US9341864B2 (en) 2013-11-15 2016-05-17 Nexisvision, Inc. Contact lenses having a reinforcing scaffold
CN104127262B (en) 2013-11-27 2016-07-27 爱博诺德(北京)医疗科技有限公司 Astigmatism correction type artificial intraocular lenses and design thereof and production method
CN203647535U (en) 2013-11-27 2014-06-18 爱博诺德(北京)医疗科技有限公司 Astigmatism correction type intraocular lens
DE102013020706A1 (en) 2013-12-10 2015-06-11 Carl Zeiss Meditec Ag Method for optimized selection of the IOL to be implanted in an eye
WO2015095565A1 (en) 2013-12-20 2015-06-25 Novartis Ag Molds for making contact lenses
US9782942B2 (en) 2013-12-30 2017-10-10 Verily Life Sciences Llc Methods and apparatus for positioning a structure on a polymer layer
WO2015136380A2 (en) 2014-03-10 2015-09-17 Amo Groningen B.V. Piggyback intraocular lens that improves overall vision where there is a local loss of retinal function
CN106999278A (en) 2014-11-19 2017-08-01 阿库福库斯公司 Cloak is broken for treat presbyopia
US20170049560A1 (en) 2015-08-21 2017-02-23 Scott A. Cherne Intraocular Lens Holder
WO2017062316A1 (en) 2015-10-05 2017-04-13 Acufocus, Inc. Methods of molding intraocular lenses
CN108431676B (en) 2015-11-24 2022-01-04 阿库福库斯公司 Toric small-aperture intraocular lens with extended depth of focus
US11395732B2 (en) 2017-07-05 2022-07-26 Acufocus, Inc. Protective lens holder
AU2018330604A1 (en) 2017-09-11 2020-04-02 Amo Groningen B.V. Methods and apparatuses to increase intraocular lenses positional stability
EP3727818B1 (en) 2017-12-21 2022-04-06 Alcon Inc. Method for manufacturing toric contact lenses
WO2019169084A1 (en) 2018-03-01 2019-09-06 Ellis Forrest J Intraocular lens with centration lips

Patent Citations (99)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3507566A (en) * 1968-04-29 1970-04-21 Arthur A Knapp Contact lens and spectacle lens structure
US3726587A (en) * 1971-03-09 1973-04-10 C Kendall Bifocal corneal contact lens and method of making same
US3794414A (en) * 1972-05-12 1974-02-26 Jessen Inc Wesley Multiple focal contact lens
US4010496A (en) * 1975-10-01 1977-03-08 Neefe Charles W Bifocal lens which positions within the anterior chamber
US4073015A (en) * 1976-05-07 1978-02-14 Peyman Gholam A Artificial intraocular lens attachment
US4138191A (en) * 1977-04-04 1979-02-06 Peyman Gholam A Operating microscope with two pairs of stereo eye-piece lenses
US4191195A (en) * 1978-09-07 1980-03-04 Hewlett-Packard Company Coupling circuit with driven guard
US4312575A (en) * 1979-09-18 1982-01-26 Peyman Gholam A Soft corneal contact lens with tightly cross-linked polymer coating and method of making same
US4367949A (en) * 1980-06-02 1983-01-11 Lavering Gordon R Aiming method and means
US4642112A (en) * 1981-04-29 1987-02-10 Pilkington P.E. Limited Artificial eye lenses
US4633866A (en) * 1981-11-23 1987-01-06 Gholam Peyman Ophthalmic laser surgical method
US4636212A (en) * 1982-05-10 1987-01-13 Optical Radiation Corporation Ultraviolet radiation absorbing intraocular lens
US4639105A (en) * 1982-09-13 1987-01-27 Neefe Charles W Spin cast ocular cosmetic device with color separation
US4641934A (en) * 1982-09-29 1987-02-10 Pilkington P.E. Limited Ophthalmic lens with diffractive power
US4890913A (en) * 1982-10-13 1990-01-02 Carle John T De Zoned multi-focal contact lens
US4637697A (en) * 1982-10-27 1987-01-20 Pilkington P.E. Limited Multifocal contact lenses utilizing diffraction and refraction
US4575915A (en) * 1983-09-06 1986-03-18 Continental Packaging Company, Inc. Method of forming a composite container
US4813955A (en) * 1983-09-07 1989-03-21 Manfred Achatz Multifocal, especially bifocal, intraocular, artificial ophthalmic lens
US4636049A (en) * 1983-09-20 1987-01-13 University Optical Products Co. Concentric bifocal contact lens
US4636211A (en) * 1984-03-13 1987-01-13 Nielsen J Mchenry Bifocal intra-ocular lens
US4646720A (en) * 1985-03-12 1987-03-03 Peyman Gholam A Optical assembly permanently attached to the cornea
US4655774A (en) * 1986-01-03 1987-04-07 Choyce D Peter Intra-corneal implant for correction of aniridia
US4799931A (en) * 1986-05-14 1989-01-24 Lindstrom Richard L Intracorneal lens
US5192318A (en) * 1986-06-05 1993-03-09 Schneider Richard T One-piece bifocal intraocular lens construction
US4814050A (en) * 1986-10-06 1989-03-21 Aluminum Company Of America Estimation and control of alumina concentration in hall cells
US4983181A (en) * 1986-10-16 1991-01-08 Cbs Lens, Collagen hydrogel for promoting epithelial cell growth and artificial lens using the same
US4729373A (en) * 1986-12-18 1988-03-08 Peyman Gholam A Laser-powered surgical device with a vibrating crystalline tip
US4891043A (en) * 1987-05-28 1990-01-02 Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois System for selective release of liposome encapsulated material via laser radiation
US4898461A (en) * 1987-06-01 1990-02-06 Valdemar Portney Multifocal ophthalmic lens
US6527389B2 (en) * 1987-06-01 2003-03-04 Advanced Medical Optics, Inc. Multifocal ophthalmic lens
US4990165A (en) * 1987-07-31 1991-02-05 Union Carbide Industrial Gases Technology Corporation Permeable membranes for enhanced gas separation
US4808181A (en) * 1987-08-07 1989-02-28 Kelman Charles D Intraocular lens having roughened surface area
US4985559A (en) * 1987-10-15 1991-01-15 University Of Florida UV Absorbing vinyl monomers
US5192316A (en) * 1988-02-16 1993-03-09 Allergan, Inc. Ocular device
US5108428A (en) * 1988-03-02 1992-04-28 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Corneal implants and manufacture and use thereof
US5489300A (en) * 1988-03-02 1996-02-06 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Co. Surgical method for implanting a corneal implant
US5089024A (en) * 1988-04-19 1992-02-18 Storz Instrument Company Multi-focal intraocular lens
US4994080A (en) * 1988-07-15 1991-02-19 Shepard Dennis D Optical lens having at least one stenopaeic opening located in the central area thereof
US5002571A (en) * 1989-02-06 1991-03-26 Donnell Jr Francis E O Intraocular lens implant and method of locating and adhering within the posterior chamber
US5089022A (en) * 1989-04-26 1992-02-18 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Rectified intraocular lens
US4997268A (en) * 1989-07-24 1991-03-05 Dauvergne Hector A Corrective lens configuration
US5185152A (en) * 1990-01-10 1993-02-09 Peyman Gholam A Method and apparatus for controlled release drug delivery to the cornea and anterior chamber of the eye
US5104957A (en) * 1990-02-28 1992-04-14 Autogenesis Technologies, Inc. Biologically compatible collagenous reaction product and articles useful as medical implants produced therefrom
US5480427A (en) * 1990-02-28 1996-01-02 Darby & Darby Biologically compatible collagenous reaction product and articles useful as medical implants produced therefrom
US6036957A (en) * 1990-03-30 2000-03-14 Autoimmune, Inc. Suppression of T-cell proliferation using peptide fragments of myelin basic protein
US5858980A (en) * 1990-03-30 1999-01-12 Autoimmune, Inc. Peptide fragments of myelin basic protein
US5296881A (en) * 1990-04-17 1994-03-22 Pilkington Diffractive Lenses Limited Method and contact lenses for treating presbyopia
US5599537A (en) * 1990-12-18 1997-02-04 The General Hospital Corporation Salmonella virulence genes
US6010901A (en) * 1990-12-18 2000-01-04 The General Hospital Corporation Salmonella virulence genes
US5731196A (en) * 1990-12-18 1998-03-24 The General Hospital Corporation Salmonella virulence genes
US5874537A (en) * 1991-01-29 1999-02-23 C. R. Bard, Inc. Method for sealing tissues with collagen-based sealants
US5196026A (en) * 1991-09-16 1993-03-23 Chiron Ophthalmics, Inc. Method of implanting corneal inlay lenses smaller than the optic zone
US5864128A (en) * 1991-10-15 1999-01-26 Geo Labs, Inc. Lens with variable focal length
US5401508A (en) * 1992-01-15 1995-03-28 Allergan, Inc. Hydrogel compositions and structures made from same
US5863537A (en) * 1992-02-19 1999-01-26 Schering Corporation Humanized monoclonal antibodies against human interleukin-4
US5300116A (en) * 1992-08-05 1994-04-05 Lions Eye Institute Of Western Australia Keratoprosthesis
US5861486A (en) * 1992-09-09 1999-01-19 Devore; Dale P. Collagen modulators for use in photoablation eximer laser keratectomy
US6204365B1 (en) * 1992-09-09 2001-03-20 Collagenesis, Inc. Collagen modulators for use in photoablation eximer laser keratectomy
US5391201A (en) * 1992-10-02 1995-02-21 Chiron Intraoptics, Inc. Method of using a corneal ring inlay
US5713957A (en) * 1993-11-19 1998-02-03 Ciba Vision Corporation Corneal onlays
US6197019B1 (en) * 1994-04-25 2001-03-06 Gholam A. Peyman Universal implant blank for modifying corneal curvature and methods of modifying corneal curvature therewith
US5731862A (en) * 1994-07-08 1998-03-24 Eschenbach Optik Gmbh + Co. Hyperocular lens assembly attachable to an eyeglass lens
US5733760A (en) * 1994-08-05 1998-03-31 Virus Research Institute Salmonella vectors encoding truncated pag fusion protein, method of making, and uses thereof
US5855605A (en) * 1994-12-08 1999-01-05 Herrick Family Limited Partnership, A Calif Ltd Part. Multifocal lens system having eccentic axes and method
US6357875B1 (en) * 1994-12-08 2002-03-19 Herrick Family Limited Partnership Artificial lens including a lens system having eccentric axes for use in an eye having an enlarged pupil and method
US6358280B1 (en) * 1994-12-08 2002-03-19 Herrick Family Limited Partnership A California Limited Partnership Artificial lens including a lens system having eccentric axes for use in an eye having an enlarged pupil
US5719656A (en) * 1995-05-19 1998-02-17 Bowling; Patricia J. Contact lens utilizing stiles-crawford effect
US5608471A (en) * 1995-07-03 1997-03-04 Westcon Contact Lens Co., Inc. Soft, bifocal contact lens
US5610719A (en) * 1995-07-10 1997-03-11 Qc Optics, Inc. Displacement detection system
US5722971A (en) * 1995-10-20 1998-03-03 Peyman; Gholam A. Intrastromal corneal modification
US6203538B1 (en) * 1995-11-03 2001-03-20 Gholam A. Peyman Intrastromal corneal modification
US6024447A (en) * 1996-05-21 2000-02-15 Allergan Enhanced monofocal ophthalmic lens
US5864378A (en) * 1996-05-21 1999-01-26 Allergan Enhanced monofocal IOL or contact lens
US20040047014A1 (en) * 1996-11-15 2004-03-11 Parker William P. In-line holographic mask for micromachining
US5713844A (en) * 1997-01-10 1998-02-03 Peyman; Gholam A. Device and method for regulating intraocular pressure
US20030033013A1 (en) * 1997-08-20 2003-02-13 Callahan Wayne B. Method of using a small incision lens
US6197934B1 (en) * 1998-05-22 2001-03-06 Collagenesis, Inc. Compound delivery using rapidly dissolving collagen film
US20020010510A1 (en) * 1998-11-04 2002-01-24 Thomas A. Silvestrini Variable modulus corneal implant and fabrication methods
US6503276B2 (en) * 1998-11-10 2003-01-07 Advanced Medical Optics Accommodating multifocal intraocular lens
US6176878B1 (en) * 1998-12-17 2001-01-23 Allergan Sales, Inc. Accommodating intraocular lens
US6361560B1 (en) * 1998-12-23 2002-03-26 Anamed, Inc. Corneal implant and method of manufacture
US6673112B2 (en) * 1998-12-23 2004-01-06 Anamed, Inc. Corneal implant and method of manufacture
US6335006B1 (en) * 1999-03-22 2002-01-01 Boston Innovative Optics, Inc. Methods of using agents that act on the epithelial sheet of a human eye
US6536899B1 (en) * 1999-07-14 2003-03-25 Bifocon Optics Gmbh Multifocal lens exhibiting diffractive and refractive powers
US20030055497A1 (en) * 1999-07-28 2003-03-20 The Lions Instutute Of Western Australia Incorporated Method of insertion of keratoprostheses
US6183498B1 (en) * 1999-09-20 2001-02-06 Devore Dale P. Methods and products for sealing a fluid leak in a tissue
US6533905B2 (en) * 2000-01-24 2003-03-18 Tini Alloy Company Method for sputtering tini shape-memory alloys
US20020028330A1 (en) * 2000-09-06 2002-03-07 Alcon Universal Ltd. Switchable tackiness coating compositions for ophthalmic implants
US20030002994A1 (en) * 2001-03-07 2003-01-02 Johnson A. David Thin film shape memory alloy actuated flow controller
US20030014107A1 (en) * 2001-06-28 2003-01-16 Michael Reynard Multifocal phakic intraocular lens
US20030014042A1 (en) * 2001-07-13 2003-01-16 Tibor Juhasz Method of creating stromal pockets for corneal implants
US20030045930A1 (en) * 2001-08-30 2003-03-06 Allergan Sales, Inc. Apparatus and methods for packaging intrcorneal implants and facilitating placement thereof
US6849090B2 (en) * 2001-11-07 2005-02-01 Alok Nigam Myopic corneal ring with central accommodating portion
US20040014253A1 (en) * 2002-07-17 2004-01-22 Vikas Gupta Three dimensional thin film devices and methods of fabrication
US20040015234A1 (en) * 2002-07-19 2004-01-22 Peyman Gholam A. Gradual correction of corneal refractive error using multiple inlays
US6855163B2 (en) * 2002-07-19 2005-02-15 Minu, Llc Gradual correction of corneal refractive error using multiple inlays
US20040019379A1 (en) * 2002-07-25 2004-01-29 Advanced Medical Optics, Inc. Intracorneal lens with flow enhancement area for increased nutrient transport
US20050033420A1 (en) * 2003-05-28 2005-02-10 Bruce A. Christie Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US20050046794A1 (en) * 2003-06-17 2005-03-03 Silvestrini Thomas A. Method and apparatus for aligning a mask with the visual axis of an eye

Cited By (40)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8343215B2 (en) 1999-03-01 2013-01-01 Acufocus, Inc. System and method for increasing the depth of focus of the human eye
US8752958B2 (en) 1999-03-01 2014-06-17 Boston Innovative Optics, Inc. System and method for increasing the depth of focus of the human eye
US9138142B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2015-09-22 Acufocus, Inc. Masked intraocular devices
US10869752B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2020-12-22 Acufocus, Inc. Mask for increasing depth of focus
US8460374B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2013-06-11 Acufocus, Inc. Mask configured to maintain nutrient transport without producing visible diffraction patterns
US8858624B2 (en) 2003-05-28 2014-10-14 Acufocus, Inc. Method for increasing the depth of focus of a patient
US8079706B2 (en) 2003-06-17 2011-12-20 Acufocus, Inc. Method and apparatus for aligning a mask with the visual axis of an eye
US8864824B2 (en) 2003-06-17 2014-10-21 Acufocus, Inc. Method and apparatus for aligning a mask with the visual axis of an eye
US7976577B2 (en) 2005-04-14 2011-07-12 Acufocus, Inc. Corneal optic formed of degradation resistant polymer
US8287592B2 (en) 2005-04-14 2012-10-16 Acufocus, Inc. Ophthalmic devices having a degradation resistant polymer
US7802883B2 (en) 2007-12-20 2010-09-28 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Cosmetic contact lenses having a sparkle effect
US9427311B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2016-08-30 Acufocus, Inc. Corneal inlay with nutrient transport structures
US9005281B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2015-04-14 Acufocus, Inc. Masked intraocular implants and lenses
US10548717B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2020-02-04 Acufocus, Inc. Intraocular lens with elastic mask
US10449036B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2019-10-22 Acufocus, Inc. Masked intraocular implants and lenses
US10004593B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2018-06-26 Acufocus, Inc. Intraocular lens with elastic mask
US9492272B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2016-11-15 Acufocus, Inc. Masked intraocular implants and lenses
US11311371B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2022-04-26 Acufocus, Inc. Intraocular lens with elastic mask
US11357617B2 (en) 2009-08-13 2022-06-14 Acufocus, Inc. Method of implanting and forming masked intraocular implants and lenses
USD681086S1 (en) 2009-11-10 2013-04-30 Acufocus, Inc. Ocular mask
USD656526S1 (en) 2009-11-10 2012-03-27 Acufocus, Inc. Ocular mask
US9848979B2 (en) 2011-12-02 2017-12-26 Acufocus, Inc. Ocular mask having selective spectral transmission
US9545303B2 (en) 2011-12-02 2017-01-17 Acufocus, Inc. Ocular mask having selective spectral transmission
US10342656B2 (en) 2011-12-02 2019-07-09 Acufocus, Inc. Ocular mask having selective spectral transmission
US10765508B2 (en) 2011-12-02 2020-09-08 AcFocus, Inc. Ocular mask having selective spectral transmission
US9603704B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2017-03-28 Acufocus, Inc. In situ adjustable optical mask
US11771552B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2023-10-03 Acufocus, Inc. In situ adjustable optical mask
US10939995B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2021-03-09 Acufocus, Inc. In situ adjustable optical mask
US10350058B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2019-07-16 Acufocus, Inc. In situ adjustable optical mask
US9204962B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2015-12-08 Acufocus, Inc. In situ adjustable optical mask
US9844919B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-12-19 Acufocus, Inc. Process for manufacturing an intraocular lens with an embedded mask
US10583619B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2020-03-10 Acufocus, Inc. Process for manufacturing an intraocular lens with an embedded mask
US10183453B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2019-01-22 Acufocus, Inc. Process for manufacturing an intraocular lens with an embedded mask
US9573328B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-02-21 Acufocus, Inc. Process for manufacturing an intraocular lens with an embedded mask
US9427922B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2016-08-30 Acufocus, Inc. Process for manufacturing an intraocular lens with an embedded mask
US9943403B2 (en) 2014-11-19 2018-04-17 Acufocus, Inc. Fracturable mask for treating presbyopia
US10687935B2 (en) 2015-10-05 2020-06-23 Acufocus, Inc. Methods of molding intraocular lenses
US11690707B2 (en) 2015-10-05 2023-07-04 Acufocus, Inc. Methods of molding intraocular lenses
US11464625B2 (en) 2015-11-24 2022-10-11 Acufocus, Inc. Toric small aperture intraocular lens with extended depth of focus
US11364110B2 (en) 2018-05-09 2022-06-21 Acufocus, Inc. Intraocular implant with removable optic

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2007516019A (en) 2007-06-21
EP1635739A2 (en) 2006-03-22
US8858624B2 (en) 2014-10-14
US20060079959A1 (en) 2006-04-13
EP2301477A1 (en) 2011-03-30
US20060274265A1 (en) 2006-12-07
US20060268228A1 (en) 2006-11-30
US9138142B2 (en) 2015-09-22
US20060271179A1 (en) 2006-11-30
US20060271176A1 (en) 2006-11-30
US7628810B2 (en) 2009-12-08
JP5324527B2 (en) 2013-10-23
US20060268226A1 (en) 2006-11-30
US10869752B2 (en) 2020-12-22
US20060271178A1 (en) 2006-11-30
US20060271181A1 (en) 2006-11-30
US20060268227A1 (en) 2006-11-30
US20060079960A1 (en) 2006-04-13
EP2301477B8 (en) 2014-06-18
WO2004105588A2 (en) 2004-12-09
US20060274264A1 (en) 2006-12-07
US20050033420A1 (en) 2005-02-10
ATE524137T1 (en) 2011-09-15
WO2004105588A3 (en) 2005-06-09
US20150366658A1 (en) 2015-12-24
US20060271180A1 (en) 2006-11-30
EP1635739B1 (en) 2011-09-14
US20060271183A1 (en) 2006-11-30
JP4689615B2 (en) 2011-05-25
EP1635739A4 (en) 2008-05-21
ES2380540T3 (en) 2012-05-16
EP2301477B1 (en) 2014-04-23
US8460374B2 (en) 2013-06-11
US20060271177A1 (en) 2006-11-30
US20210154002A1 (en) 2021-05-27
JP2010227615A (en) 2010-10-14

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20210154002A1 (en) Mask for increasing depth of focus
US8079706B2 (en) Method and apparatus for aligning a mask with the visual axis of an eye
US20060184243A1 (en) System and method for aligning an optic with an axis of an eye
US7491350B2 (en) Method of making an ocular implant

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION